Taskalfa 7004i en

kyoceradocumentsolutions.
com
Operation Guide
TASKalfa 5004i TASKalfa 6004i TASKalfa 7004i
> Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take
simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.
We recommend the use of our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality
control testing, to maintain quality.
The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.
We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.
A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number
before contacting your Service Representative.
i
Contents
Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i
Contents .................................................................................................................................. ii
Overview ............................................................................................................................... xii
Machine Features ................................................................................................................ xiii
Color and Image Quality Functions ................................................................................... xix
Basic Color Modes ...................................................................................................... xix
Adjusting Image Quality and Color............................................................................... xx
Guides Provided with the Machine .................................................................................... xxi
About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ......................................................................... xxiii
Structure of the guide ................................................................................................. xxiii
Conventions Used in This Guide............................................................................... xxiv
Menu Map .......................................................................................................................... xxvii
1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................ 1-1

Notice ................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................. 1-2
Environment .............................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................... 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) ............................................................................................... 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ........................................................................... 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ...................................... 1-7
Compliance and Conformity ...................................................................................... 1-7
Radio Tag Technology .............................................................................................. 1-9
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................... 1-9
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning .................................................................... 1-9
EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................. 1-9
EK1-ITB 2000 ............................................................................................................ 1-9
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ........................................................................... 1-9
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ............................... 1-10
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................... 1-10
Legal Information .................................................................................................... 1-11
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................. 1-13
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ............................................................................ 1-13
Resource Saving - Paper ........................................................................................ 1-13
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" .................................................... 1-13
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ............................................................... 1-13
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine .................................................. 2-1

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ........................................................................................ 2-2
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) .................................................................................... 2-4
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ........................................................ 2-5
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices .................................................................. 2-7
Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................ 2-8
Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-8
Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-9
Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-9
Power On/Off ................................................................................................................... 2-10
Power On ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Power Off ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 2-11
Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................. 2-11
[Job Separator] indicator ......................................................................................... 2-11
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ...................................................................... 2-12
Touch Panel ..................................................................................................................... 2-13
Using the Touch Panel ............................................................................................ 2-13
Home Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-15
ii
Assigning Functions to Function Keys .................................................................... 2-20
Display for Device Information ................................................................................ 2-22
Display Setting Screen ............................................................................................ 2-23
Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set ....................................................................... 2-24
Original Preview ...................................................................................................... 2-24
Entering Numbers ................................................................................................... 2-26
Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-28
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View) ........................................................ 2-29
Login/Logout ................................................................................................................... 2-30
Login ....................................................................................................................... 2-30
Logout ..................................................................................................................... 2-31
Default Settings of the Machine ..................................................................................... 2-32
Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................ 2-32
Network Setup ................................................................................................................. 2-33
Configuring the Wired Network ............................................................................... 2-33
Configuring the Wireless Network ........................................................................... 2-35
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................. 2-41
Configuring NFC ..................................................................................................... 2-43
Motion Sensor ......................................................................................................... 2-44
Energy Saver function .................................................................................................... 2-45
Low Power Mode .................................................................................................... 2-45
Sleep ....................................................................................................................... 2-46
Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................... 2-46
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................ 2-46
Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for Europe) ........................................ 2-47
Energy Saver Recovery Level ................................................................................. 2-47
Weekly Timer Settings ............................................................................................ 2-47
Power Off Timer (models for Europe) ..................................................................... 2-47
Quick Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................... 2-48
Installing Software .......................................................................................................... 2-51
Published Software (Windows) ............................................................................... 2-51
Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-52
Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-57
Installing Software in Mac Computer ...................................................................... 2-58
Setting TWAIN Driver .............................................................................................. 2-61
Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................... 2-63
Checking the Counter ..................................................................................................... 2-64
Additional Preparations for the Administrator ............................................................. 2-65
Sending Documents to a PC ................................................................................... 2-65
Strengthening the Security ...................................................................................... 2-65
Command Center RX ...................................................................................................... 2-67
Accessing Command Center RX ............................................................................ 2-68
Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-69
Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-70
E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-71
Registering Destinations ......................................................................................... 2-75
Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 2-76
Printing a Document Stored in a Custom Box ......................................................... 2-77
Transferring Data from Our Other Products ................................................................. 2-78
Migrating the Address Book .................................................................................... 2-78
3 Preparation before Use .......................................................................... 3-1

Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 3-2
Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................... 3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................. 3-3
Loading in Cassette 1 ............................................................................................... 3-4
Loading in Cassette 2 ............................................................................................... 3-7
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes ................................................. 3-10
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder .................................................................... 3-14
iii
Loading in the Side Feeder ..................................................................................... 3-16
Loading in the Inserter ............................................................................................ 3-18
Precautions for Outputting Paper .................................................................................. 3-19
Paper Stopper ......................................................................................................... 3-19
Envelope Stack Guide ............................................................................................. 3-19
Stack Level Adjuster ............................................................................................... 3-20
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) .................................................................. 3-22
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) .......................................................... 3-23
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .............................. 3-24
Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full Computer Name .......................... 3-24
Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name ............................................. 3-24
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................ 3-25
Configuring Windows Firewall ................................................................................. 3-29
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB ........................................................................ 3-33
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................ 3-38
Adding a Destination (Address Book) ..................................................................... 3-38
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ................................................................ 3-45
4 Printing from PC ..................................................................................... 4-1

Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ................................................................................ 4-2
Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................. 4-3
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 10) ..................................... 4-3
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................ 4-4
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................. 4-4
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-6
Banner Printing ......................................................................................................... 4-9
Canceling Printing from a Computer ....................................................................... 4-15
Printing from the Handheld Device ............................................................................... 4-16
Printing by AirPrint .................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing by Universal Print ....................................................................................... 4-16
Printing by Mopria ................................................................................................... 4-16
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ......................................................................................... 4-17
Printing with NFC .................................................................................................... 4-17
Printing Data Saved in the Printer ................................................................................. 4-18
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................... 4-18
Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 4-19
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................... 4-19
Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 4-20
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ........................................... 4-20
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 4-21
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box .......................................... 4-21
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 4-22
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box .................................... 4-22
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ............................................................ 4-23
Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-23
Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-23
Quick View State ..................................................................................................... 4-23
Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................. 4-24
Paper Tray Status Tab ............................................................................................ 4-24
Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................... 4-24
Alert Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-25
Status Monitor Context Menu .................................................................................. 4-25
Status Monitor Notification Settings ........................................................................ 4-26
5 Operation on the Machine ..................................................................... 5-1

Loading Originals .............................................................................................................. 5-2
Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-3
iv
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 5-6
Favorites .......................................................................................................................... 5-11
Registering Favorites .............................................................................................. 5-12
Recalling Favorites .................................................................................................. 5-12
Editing Favorites ..................................................................................................... 5-13
Deleting Favorites ................................................................................................... 5-13
Application ....................................................................................................................... 5-14
Installing Applications .............................................................................................. 5-14
Activating Applications ............................................................................................ 5-15
Deactivating Applications ........................................................................................ 5-16
Uninstalling Applications ......................................................................................... 5-16
Registering Shortcuts
(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) .................................................................. 5-17
Adding Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-17
Editing Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-18
Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................................... 5-18
Copying ............................................................................................................................ 5-19
Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 5-19
Proof Copy .............................................................................................................. 5-21
Interrupt Copy ......................................................................................................... 5-22
Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-22
Frequently-Used Sending Method ................................................................................. 5-23
Sending Document via E-mail ........................................................................................ 5-24
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-24
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .................................................................. 5-24
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ............. 5-26
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer ................................ 5-26
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ................................... 5-29
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server ..................................................... 5-29
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ...................................................................................... 5-31
Scanning Document Using Application ................................................................... 5-31
Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box .............................................................. 5-32
Scanning Document Stored in a Box ...................................................................... 5-32
Useful Sending Method .................................................................................................. 5-34
WSD Scan ........................................................................................................................ 5-35
Installing the Driver ................................................................................................. 5-35
Executing WSD scan .............................................................................................. 5-36
DSM Scan ......................................................................................................................... 5-37
Executing DSM Scan .............................................................................................. 5-37
Scanning with File Management Utility ......................................................................... 5-39
Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original ........................................................... 5-39
Using MultiCrop Scan ..................................................................................................... 5-40
Configuring Settings before Scanning ..................................................................... 5-40
Using MultiCrop Scan to Send/Store an Original .................................................... 5-40
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ....................................... 5-42
Send to Me (Email) .......................................................................................................... 5-43
Sending a document to the mail address of the logged in user .............................. 5-43
Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) ............................................................ 5-44
Canceling Sending Jobs ................................................................................................. 5-46
Handling Destination ...................................................................................................... 5-47
Specifying Destination ............................................................................................. 5-47
Choosing from the Address Book ........................................................................... 5-47
Choosing from the One Touch Key ......................................................................... 5-49
v
Choosing from the Search (No.) ............................................................................. 5-49
Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-50
Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-51
Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-51
How to use the FAX Function ........................................................................................ 5-52
Using Document Boxes .................................................................................................. 5-53
What is Custom Box? .............................................................................................. 5-53
What is Job Box? .................................................................................................... 5-53
What is USB Drive Box? ......................................................................................... 5-54
Fax Box ................................................................................................................... 5-54
Basic Operation for Document Box ......................................................................... 5-54
Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 5-58
Editing Custom Box ................................................................................................. 5-59
Deleting Custom Box .............................................................................................. 5-60
Storing Documents to a Custom Box ...................................................................... 5-60
Printing Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................ 5-61
Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box ....................................................... 5-62
Sending Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-63
Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address of Logged in User ............. 5-64
Moving Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-64
Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes ............................................ 5-65
Copying Documents in Custom Box to USB Drive .................................................. 5-65
Joining Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-66
Deleting Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-67
Job Box ............................................................................................................................ 5-68
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs ................................................................................. 5-68
Form for Form Overlay ............................................................................................ 5-69
Operating using Removable USB Drive ........................................................................ 5-70
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Drive ............................................ 5-70
Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB) .................................................... 5-72
Check the USB Drive Information ........................................................................... 5-73
Removing USB Drive .............................................................................................. 5-73
Using the Internet Browser ............................................................................................ 5-74
Launching and Exiting the Browser ......................................................................... 5-74
Using the Browser Screen ...................................................................................... 5-75
Manual Staple .................................................................................................................. 5-76
6 Using Various Functions ....................................................................... 6-1

Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................................... 6-2
About Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................... 6-2
Copy .......................................................................................................................... 6-2
Send .......................................................................................................................... 6-5
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) ................................................................... 6-9
USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents) ........................................................... 6-15
Functions ......................................................................................................................... 6-18
Original Size ............................................................................................................ 6-19
Paper Selection ....................................................................................................... 6-20
Mixed Size Originals ............................................................................................... 6-22
Original Orientation ................................................................................................. 6-25
Fold ......................................................................................................................... 6-26
Collate/Offset .......................................................................................................... 6-28
Staple/Punch ........................................................................................................... 6-29
Paper Output ........................................................................................................... 6-33
ID Card Copy .......................................................................................................... 6-34
Org. Manual Feed (DP) ........................................................................................... 6-34
Density .................................................................................................................... 6-34
Original Image ......................................................................................................... 6-35
EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-36
Color Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-36
vi
Sharpness ............................................................................................................... 6-37
Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) .................................. 6-37
Prevent Bleed-thru .................................................................................................. 6-38
Contrast ................................................................................................................... 6-38
Erase Colors ........................................................................................................... 6-39
Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-39
Combine .................................................................................................................. 6-42
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering ...................................................................... 6-44
Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan .................................................................... 6-45
Erase Shadowed Areas .......................................................................................... 6-47
Booklet .................................................................................................................... 6-47
Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-52
Cover ....................................................................................................................... 6-55
Form Overlay .......................................................................................................... 6-56
Page # ..................................................................................................................... 6-57
Memo Page ............................................................................................................. 6-59
Insert Sheets/Chapters ........................................................................................... 6-60
Image Repeat .......................................................................................................... 6-61
Text Stamp .............................................................................................................. 6-62
Bates Stamp ............................................................................................................ 6-65
Handwriting Enhancement ...................................................................................... 6-68
Continuous Scan ..................................................................................................... 6-68
Auto Image Rotation ............................................................................................... 6-69
Negative Image ....................................................................................................... 6-69
Mirror Image ............................................................................................................ 6-69
Job Finish Notice ..................................................................................................... 6-70
File Name Entry ...................................................................................................... 6-70
Priority Override ...................................................................................................... 6-71
Repeat Copy ........................................................................................................... 6-71
DP Read Action ....................................................................................................... 6-72
Detect Multi-fed Originals ........................................................................................ 6-72
Detect Stapled Originals ......................................................................................... 6-72
Skip Blank Page ...................................................................................................... 6-73
2-sided/Book Original .............................................................................................. 6-73
Sending Size ........................................................................................................... 6-74
Long Original ........................................................................................................... 6-75
File Format .............................................................................................................. 6-75
File Separation ........................................................................................................ 6-82
Scan Resolution ...................................................................................................... 6-82
Email Subject/Body ................................................................................................. 6-83
Send and Print ........................................................................................................ 6-83
Send and Store ....................................................................................................... 6-83
FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................... 6-84
Email Encrypted TX ................................................................................................ 6-84
Digital Signature Email ............................................................................................ 6-84
File Size Confirmation ............................................................................................. 6-85
Delete after Printed ................................................................................................. 6-85
Delete after Transmitted .......................................................................................... 6-86
Storing Size ............................................................................................................. 6-86
Encrypted PDF Password ....................................................................................... 6-87
JPEG/TIFF Print ...................................................................................................... 6-87
XPS Fit to Page ....................................................................................................... 6-87
7 Status/Job Cancel .................................................................................. 7-1

Checking Job Status ......................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................... 7-3
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs ..................................................................... 7-8
Checking Job History ....................................................................................................... 7-9
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ....................................................... 7-10
vii
Sending the Log History .......................................................................................... 7-10
Job Operation .................................................................................................................. 7-11
Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................. 7-11
Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ........................................................................... 7-11
Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................. 7-12
Device Information .......................................................................................................... 7-13
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Supplies/Paper) ................... 7-15
8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) ............................................... 8-1

System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method ..................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 8-3
Device Settings ......................................................................................................... 8-6
Notification/Report ................................................................................................... 8-25
Function Settings .................................................................................................... 8-33
Network Settings ..................................................................................................... 8-53
Security Settings ..................................................................................................... 8-70
Job Accounting/Authentication ................................................................................ 8-83
Add/Delete Application ............................................................................................ 8-83
Adjustment/Maintenance ......................................................................................... 8-84
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) ... 9-1
Overview of User Login Administration .......................................................................... 9-2
Managing the Job Account from PC ......................................................................... 9-2
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning ..................................................... 9-2
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning .......................................................... 9-2
Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC ......................................................... 9-2
Enabling User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3
Setting User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-4
Authentication Security ............................................................................................. 9-4
Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................ 9-6
Changing User Properties ....................................................................................... 9-10
User Login Administration for Printing ..................................................................... 9-12
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ............................................................ 9-13
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ................................................................. 9-14
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................... 9-15
Local Authorization .................................................................................................. 9-16
Server Settings ........................................................................................................ 9-17
Group Authorization Settings .................................................................................. 9-18
Guest Authorization Settings ................................................................................... 9-20
Obtain NW User Property ....................................................................................... 9-23
Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................. 9-25
ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-28
PIN Login ................................................................................................................ 9-30
Using User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-31
Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-31
Overview of Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-32
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ..................... 9-32
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN ................................................. 9-32
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA ...................................................... 9-32
Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC ...................................................... 9-32
Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-33
Job Accounting (Local) .................................................................................................. 9-34
Adding an Account .................................................................................................. 9-34
Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-35
Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-36
Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-37
viii
Job Accounting for Printing ..................................................................................... 9-38
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .................................................................. 9-39
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ....................................................................... 9-40
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .................................... 9-41
Configuring Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-42
Default Counter Limit .............................................................................................. 9-42
Count by Paper Size ............................................................................................... 9-44
Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-45
Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-47
Using Job Accounting .................................................................................................... 9-48
Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-48
Apply Limit ....................................................................................................................... 9-49
Copier/Printer Count ....................................................................................................... 9-50
Unknown User Settings .................................................................................................. 9-51
Unknown ID Job ...................................................................................................... 9-51
Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ....................................... 9-52
10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 10-1

Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning Glass Platen ............................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning inside of the Document Processor ........................................................... 10-2
Cleaning Slit Glass .................................................................................................. 10-3
Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................ 10-4
Replace the Waste Toner Box ................................................................................ 10-7
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 10-8
Replacing Staples (Inner Finisher) .......................................................................... 10-9
Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................ 10-11
Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................ 10-12
Replacing Staples (100-sheet Staple Finisher) ..................................................... 10-14
Replacing Staples (Folding Unit) ........................................................................... 10-15
Disposing of the Staple Waste .............................................................................. 10-17
Disposing of the Punch Waste .............................................................................. 10-19
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 10-25
Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................. 10-25
Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................... 10-25
Printed Image Trouble ........................................................................................... 10-30
Remote Operation ................................................................................................. 10-32
Responding to Messages ...................................................................................... 10-34
Adjustment/Maintenance .............................................................................................. 10-52
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................... 10-52
Tone Curve Adjustment ........................................................................................ 10-53
Drum Refresh ........................................................................................................ 10-54
Calibration ............................................................................................................. 10-55
Laser Scanner Cleaning ........................................................................................ 10-55
Developer Refresh ................................................................................................ 10-55
Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................... 10-56
Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................ 10-56
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ............................................................ 10-59
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ............................................................ 10-62
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) ........................... 10-65
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-67
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-69
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) ..................................... 10-72
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray .......................................... 10-74
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1 ....................................................... 10-75
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) ................................ 10-80
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) ............................. 10-81
Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit ..................................................... 10-83
ix
Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox ........................................................... 10-84
Remove any jammed paper in the Inner Finisher ................................................. 10-85
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) .... 10-86
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Dual Scan) .................. 10-88
Remove any jammed paper in the Inserter ........................................................... 10-90
Remove any jammed paper in the Z-fold unit ....................................................... 10-95
Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-Sheet Finisher .................................... 10-117
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher/
100-sheet Staple Finisher (Inner) ........................................................................ 10-120
100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray A) ..................................................................... 10-121
100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray B) ..................................................................... 10-125
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) .............. 10-128
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray (4,000-sheet Finisher) ............. 10-133
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit (100-sheet Staple Finisher) ...... 10-137
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray (100-sheet Staple Finisher) ..... 10-143
Clearing a Staple Jam ................................................................................................. 10-147
Clearing a staple jam of the Inner Finisher ......................................................... 10-147
Clearing a staple jam of the 1,000-Sheet Finisher .............................................. 10-149
Clearing a staple jam of the 4,000-sheet Finisher ............................................... 10-152
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 100-sheet Staple Finisher ..................................... 10-154
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) ...................... 10-157
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit (100-sheet Staple Finisher) .............. 10-162
11 Appendix ............................................................................................... 11-1

Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................ 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 11-2
Applications ............................................................................................................. 11-8
Character Entry Method ................................................................................................ 11-10
Entry Screens ........................................................................................................ 11-10
Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 11-12
Paper .............................................................................................................................. 11-13
Basic Paper Specifications .................................................................................... 11-13
Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................... 11-14
Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 11-17
Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-21
Machine ................................................................................................................. 11-21
Copy Functions ..................................................................................................... 11-23
Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 11-24
Scanner Functions ................................................................................................ 11-25
Document Processor ............................................................................................. 11-26
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................. 11-26
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................... 11-27
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) .................................................................................... 11-27
Inner Finisher ........................................................................................................ 11-28
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) ............................................................................. 11-28
1,000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................. 11-29
4,000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................. 11-30
100-sheet Staple Finisher ..................................................................................... 11-31
Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet/100-sheet Staple Finisher) .................. 11-31
Mailbox (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ....................................................................... 11-32
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ................................................................ 11-32
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) ........................................................ 11-33
Job Separator Tray ............................................................................................... 11-34
Inner Shift Tray ...................................................................................................... 11-34
Banner Tray .......................................................................................................... 11-35
Inserter Tray .......................................................................................................... 11-35
Z Fold Unit ............................................................................................................. 11-36
x
Backing up your data .................................................................................................... 11-37
Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer .............................................. 11-37
Backing up your data using Command Center RX ............................................... 11-37
Backing up your date using USB Drive ................................................................. 11-37
Functions List of Security Quick Setup ...................................................................... 11-38
Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-42
Index ............................................................................................................................ Index-1
xi
> Overview
Overview
Input Data Security
Original Electronic data USB drive Fax data You can apply the various machine security
levels to your specific needs.
Strengthen security (page xvi)
Application
You can expand the machine
Operations from your PC functions according to your needs.
Application (page 5-14)
Document Box functions

Command Center RX
You can check the status and change This function serves a variety of
the settings of the machine from a Web purposes, including saving data in the
browser on your computer. machine and on a USB drive.
Command Center RX (page 2-67) Printing Data Saved in the
Command Center RX User Guide Printer (page 4-18)
Creating a New Custom Box
(page 5-58)
Output Data
Copy functions Printer functions Send functions USB drive Fax functions
Copying (page 5-19) Frequently-Used Saving Documents FAX Operation

Printing from PC (page 4-1) Sending Method to USB Drive (Scan Guide
(page 5-23) to USB) (page 5-72)
NOTE
• Before using the machine, be sure to read the following:
Legal and Safety Information (page 1-1)
• To prepare the device for use, including setting up cable connections and installing software.
Installing and Setting up the Machine (page 2-1)
• To learn how to load paper, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to the following:
Preparation before Use (page 3-1)
xii
> Machine Features
Machine Features
The machine is equipped with many useful functions.
Using Various Functions (page 6-1)
Here are some examples.
Optimize your office workflow
Access to frequently used Interrupt other running jobs and Check the finishing before copying
functions with just one touch execute your copy job immediately a large number of sheets
(Favorites) (Interrupt Copy) (Proof Copy)
You can interrupt other running jobs

and execute your copy job It is possible to copy one sheet
You can preset frequently used immediately. When other users are before copying a large number of
functions. copying a large number of sheets, sheets. This enables you to check the
Once you register frequently used this function allows you to interrupt contents and finishing and copy the
settings as favorite, you can call up those jobs and make your copies desired number of sheets without
the settings easily. Using this favorite immediately. scanning the original again if you are
brings the same results even if When the interruption copy ends, the satisfied with the result. If you want to
operated by another person. machine resumes the paused print make changes, you can change the
jobs. settings and copy only one sheet
Favorites (page 5-11) again.
Interrupt Copy (page 5-22)
Proof Copy (page 5-21)
Scan originals of different sizes at Scan a large number of originals in Send one time with multiple
a time (Mixed Size Originals) separate batches and produce as sending options (Multi Sending)
one job (Continuous Scan)
1 11 21 1
1~10 11~20 21~30 1~30
It is useful when preparing It is useful when preparing many- You can send a same document to
conference materials. page handouts. the multiple destinations using a
You can set the different sized When a large number of originals different method.
originals at one time so you don't cannot be placed in the document You can specify multiple destinations
need to reset the originals regardless processor at one time, the originals of different send methods such as E-
of size. can be scanned in separate batches mail, SMB, and Fax.
Mixed Size Originals (page 6- and then copied or sent as one job. You can reduce your workflow by
22) Continuous Scan (page 6-68) sending a job at once.
Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending)
(page 5-42)
xiii
> Machine Features
Save frequently used documents Recover from low power mode or

in the machine (Custom Box) sleep mode automatically
(Motion Sensor)
You can save the frequently used

document in the machine and print it This model detects that the person is
when needed. approaching and recover from low
power mode or sleep mode
automatically.
(page 5-58)
Reduce waiting time before starting
to work.
Motion Sensor (page 2-44)
Save energy and cost
Save energy as needed Reduce paper use Skip blank pages when printing
(Energy Saver function) (Paper Saving Printing) (Skip Blank Page)
The machine is equipped with Energy You can print originals on both sides When there are blank pages in a
Saver function that automatically of the paper. You can also print scanned document, this function
switched into Low Power Mode or multiple originals onto one sheet. skips the blank pages and prints only
Sleep Mode. You can set appropriate pages that are not blank.
Favorites (page 5-11)
Energy Saver Recovery Level
Skip Blank Page (page 6-73)
depending on the operation.
In addition, the machine can
automatically be switched into Sleep
and recovered at a specified time for
each day of the week.
Energy Saver function (page 2-
45)
xiv
> Machine Features
Create attractive documents
Prevent image bleed-through Erase the extra shaded area Create a booklet (Booklet)
(Prevent Bleed-through) (Erase Shadowed Areas)
It is useful when preparing handout.

You can create a magazine,
pamphlet, or other booklet from sheet
originals.
You can prevent image bleed-through When scanning with the document Facing-page, two-sided copies of
from the reverse side when scanning processor open, erase the extra originals can be folded down the
thin originals. shaded area. center to create a booklet.
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-38) Erase Shadowed Areas (page The cover page can be printed onto
6-47) colored paper or heavy paper.
Booklet (page 6-47)
Create attractive documents
Print a stamp on copies

(Text Stamp / Bates Stamp)
It is useful when adding text or date

that is not included in originals.
You can add desired text and date as
a stamp.
Text Stamp (page 6-62)
Bates Stamp (page 6-65)
xv
> Machine Features
Strengthen security
Password-protect a PDF file Protect data on the hard disk/SSD Prevent loss of finished
(PDF Encryption Functions) (Encryption / Overwrite) documents
(Private Print)
Use the PDF format's password You can overwrite the unnecessary
security options to restrict document data that remains on the hard disk/ Temporarily saving print jobs in the
viewing, printing and editing. SSD automatically. main unit document box and
Encrypted PDF Password To prevent an external leakage, the outputting them when in front of the
(page 6-87) machine is able to encrypt data device can prevent documents from
before writing it to the hard disk/SSD. being taken by others.
Data Security (page 8-73) Printing Data Saved in the
Printer (page 4-18)
Strengthen security
Log in by ID card Strengthen security

(Card Authentication) (Settings for Administrator)
OK !
You can log in simply by touching an Various functions are available for
ID card. You don't need to enter your administrators to strengthen security.
user name and password. Strengthening the Security
Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card (page 2-65)
Authentication Kit" (page 11-6)
xvi
> Machine Features
Use functions more efficiently
Expand functions as necessary Display file size before sending / Install the machine without
(Application) storing a job concerning the network cables
(File Size Confirmation) (Wireless Network)
1 MB
The functionality of the machine can

be expanded by installing You can check the file size before If there is a wireless LAN
applications. sending/storing the document. environment, it is possible to install
Applications that help you perform the unit without worrying about the
If your server specifies an e-mail size
your daily more efficiently such as a network wiring. In addition, Wi-Fi
limit, you can check and change the
scan feature and an authentication Direct, etc. are supported.
size in advance.
feature are available. Configuring the Wireless
File Size Confirmation (page 6-
Application (page 5-14) Network (page 2-35)
85)
Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-41)
Configuring NFC (page 2-43)
Use USB drive Specify image file format Scan the long originals
(USB Drive) (File Format) (Long Original)
It is useful when you need to print You can select the various file You can scan the long originals such
documents outside your office or you formats when sending/storing as Contract and Data log.
cannot print documents from your images. Long Original (page 6-75)
PC. File Format (page 6-75)
You can print the document from the
USB drive by plugging it directly into
the machine.
Original scanned at the machine can
be saved in the USB drive also.
Printing Documents Stored in
Removable USB Drive (page 5-
70)
Saving Documents to USB
Drive (Scan to USB) (page 5-72)
xvii
> Machine Features
Detect the multiple feeding of Detect originals fastened with Skip the error job
originals staples (Job Skip Functions)
(Detect Multi-fed Originals) (Detect Stapled Originals)
When paper empty error occurs at

When reading a document from the When reading a document from the the cassette by specifying the special
document processor, if the multiple document processor, if a stapled paper size or type, the machine skips
feeding of documents is detected, document is detected, then the the error job and perform the next
then the reading stops automatically. reading stops automatically. job.
Detect Multi-fed Originals Detect Stapled Originals (page Error Job Skip (page 8-23)
(page 6-72) 6-72)
Perform remote operation

(Command Center RX)
You can access to the machine

remotely to print, send or download
data.
Administrators can configure the
machine behavior or management
settings.
Command Center RX (page 2-
67)
xviii
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Color and Image Quality Functions

The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.
Basic Color Modes

The basic color modes are as follows.
Reference image Reference

Color mode Description
Before After page
Color/Gray Automatically recognizes whether a page 6-36

Color/B & W document being scanned is color or
black & white.
Full Color Scans a document in full color. page 6-36
Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. page 6-36
Black & White Scans a document in black & white. page 6-36
For details, refer to the following:

Color Selection (page 6-36)
xix
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Adjusting Image Quality and Color

To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.
Sample image
I want to... Function Page
Before After
Easily adjust the image quality to match your own image
Remove dark background or Favorites page 5-11
bleed-through from the original [Newspaper Copy]
such as a newspaper.
Clearly reproduce fine lines, Favorites page 5-11

faint lines, broken lines, and [Drawing Copy]
other fine details in a CAD or
other drawings.
Adjust the color precisely.
Adjust the density. Density page 6-34
Emphasize or blur the image Sharpness page 6-37

outline.
Example: Emphasize the image
outlines
Adjust the difference between Contrast page 6-38
dark and light parts of the
image.
Darken or lighten the Background Density page 6-37

background (the area with no
texts or images) of a document.
Example: Lightening the
background
Prevent bleed-through in 2- Prevent Bleed- page 6-38
sided originals. through
Adjust the scanned image

Decrease the file size and File format page 6-75
produce the characters clearly. [High Comp. PDF]
Convert a paper document to File format page 6-75

PDF with searchable text. [PDF] or
[High Comp. PDF]
with
[OCR]
xx
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides Provided with the Machine

The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.
The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine
performance.
Printed guides
Quick Guide
Start using the Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient
machine quickly features, how to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems
occur.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of
the machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
For safe use of the
machine Safety Guide (TASKalfa 5004i/TASKalfa 6004i/TASKalfa 7004i)
Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the
cautionary labels and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before
using the machine.
xxi
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides (PDF) on our website

Operation Guide (This Guide)
Use the machine
thoughtfully Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and
indicates default settings and other information.
FAX Operation Guide

Use the fax functions
Explains how to use the fax function.
Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide

Use the ID card
Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.
Data Encryption/Overwrite Operation Guide

Strengthen security Explains how to introduce and use the Data Encryption/Overwrite Function, and how
to overwrite and encrypt data.
Easily register Command Center RX User Guide

machine information Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to
and configure settings check and change settings.
Print data from a Printer Driver User Guide

computer Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.
KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide

Directly print a PDF file
Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.
Monitor the machine KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

and printers on the Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with
network KYOCERA Net Viewer.
File Management Utility User Guide

Scan images and save
with information Explains how to use File Management Utility to set various parameters and send
and save scanned documents.
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).
Print without using the
printer driver PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of
emulation.
Maintenance Menu User Guide

Adjust the print or
scan position Maintenance Menu provides the explanation on how to configure the print, scan,
and other settings.
Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals.
Version 8.0 or later
xxii
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Structure of the guide
The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter Contents
1 Legal and Safety Information Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.
2 Installing and Setting up the Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login,
Machine logout, and other matters related to administration of the machine.
3 Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the
machine, such as how to load paper and create an address book.
4 Printing from PC Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.
5 Operation on the Machine Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals,
making copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.
6 Using Various Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.
7 Status/Job Cancel Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel
jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and
toner levels, how to check the device status, and how to cancel fax
transmission.
8 Setup and Registration Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.
(System Menu)
9 User Authentication and Explains user login and job accounting.
Accounting (User Login, Job
Accounting)
10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam
or other problem occurs.
11 Appendix Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides
information on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms.
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.
xxiii
Conventions Used in This Guide

Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.
Click an item in the Table of Click to move from the current page to the previously
Contents to jump to the displayed page. This is convenient when you want to
corresponding page. return to the page from which you jumped to the
current page.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational
requirements and restrictions to
operate the machine correctly,
and avoid damage to the
machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates supplemental
explanations and reference
information for operations.
Refer to
Click the underlined text to jump
to the corresponding page.
CAUTION
Indicates that personal injury or
mechanical damage may result
from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the
related points.
NOTE
The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not
appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.
Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.
Convention Description
[Bold] Indicates keys and buttons.
"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.
xxiv
Conventions used in procedures for operating the machine

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:
Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide
Select the [Home] key. [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings]
 > [Sound]
Select the [...].

Select the [System Menu].

Select [Device Settings].

Move the screen downwards (i.e. swiping)

Select [Sound].
Select [Job Accounting/Authentication]. [Job Accounting/Authentication] > "Job Accounting

Setting" [Job Accounting]
6HWWLQJV 4XLFN6HWXS:L]DUG
1RWLILFDWLRQ
5HSRUW )D[6HWXS
(QHUJ\6DYHU
)XQFWLRQ
6HWWLQJV (QHUJ\6DYHU6HWXS
1HWZRUN
6HWWLQJV 1HWZRUN6HWXS
6HFXULW\
6HWWLQJV (PDLO6HWXS
-RE$FFRXQWLQJ 5HVHW
$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ 6HFXULW\6HWXS
$GG'HOHWH
$SSOLFDWLRQ
$GMXVWPHQW
0DLQWHQDQFH
&RXQWHU &ORVH

Select [Job Accounting] of "Job Accounting Setting".
6HWWLQJV -RE$FFRXQWLQJ6HWWLQJ
1RWLILFDWLRQ -RE$FFRXQWLQJ
5HSRUW
(QHUJ\6DYHU
)XQFWLRQ $GG(GLW-RE$FFRXQWLQJ
6HWWLQJV
1HWZRUN -RE$FFRXQWLQJ&RXQWHU
6HWWLQJV
6HFXULW\ -RE$FFRXQWLQJ6HWWLQJ
6HWWLQJV
-RE$FFRXQWLQJ 3ULQW$FFRXQWLQJ5HSRUW 5HVHW
$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ
$GG'HOHWH
$SSOLFDWLRQ 8VHU/RJLQ6HWWLQJ
8VHU/RJLQ
$GMXVWPHQW
0DLQWHQDQFH
&RXQWHU &ORVH
For details on touch panel operation, refer to the following:

Using the Touch Panel (page 2-13)
xxv
Size and Orientation of Originals and Paper

Original sizes and paper sizes such as A4, B5, and Letter can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To
distinguish the orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the horizontal orientation. In
addition, the following icons are used to indicate original and paper placement orientations on the touch panel.
Orientation Setting Position Icons on the touch Indicated size in this

(X=Length, Y=Width) panel Guide*
Vertical Original A4, B5, Letter .etc

orientation
Original Original
Paper
Paper Paper
Horizontal Original A4-R, B5-R, Letter-R

orientation .etc
(-R)
Original Original
Paper
Paper Paper
* Original/paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details, refer to the
following.
Specifications (page 11-21)
xxvi
> Menu Map
Menu Map
This is a list of menus displayed on the touch panel. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.
Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.
&RS\
Org./Paper/Finishing Original Size (page 6-19)
Paper Selection (page 6-20)
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-22)
Original Orientation (page 6-25)
Fold (page 6-26)
Collate/Offset (page 6-28)
Staple/Punch Staple (page 6-29)
Punch (page 6-31)
Paper Output (page 6-33)
ID Card Copy (page 6-34)
Org. Manual Feed (DP) (page 6-34)
Layout/Edit Zoom (page 6-39)
Combine (page 6-42)
Margin/Centering (page 6-42)
Border Erase (page 6-45)
Erase Shadowed Areas (page 6-47)
Booklet (page 6-47)
Duplex (page 6-52)
Cover (page 6-55)
Form Overlay (page 6-56)
Page # (page 6-57)
Memo Page (page 6-59)
Insert Sheets/Chapters (page 6-60)
Image Repeat (page 6-61)
xxvii
> Menu Map
Image Quality Density (page 6-34)
Original Image (page 6-35)
EcoPrint (page 6-36)
Sharpness (page 6-37)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-37)
Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-38)
Contrast (page 6-38)
Erase Colors (page 6-39)
Advanced Setup Continuous Scan (page 6-68)
Auto Image Rotation (page 6-69)
Negative Image (page 6-69)
Mirror Image (page 6-69)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-70)
File Name Entry (page 6-70)
Priority Override (page 6-71)
Repeat Copy (page 6-71)
DP Read Action (page 6-72)
Detect Multi-fed Originals (page 6-72)
Detect Stapled Originals (page 6-72)
Shortcut (page 5-17)
xxviii
> Menu Map
6HQG
Destination Email (page 5-24)
SMB (page 5-26)
FTP (page 5-29)
Fax (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
iFax (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Fax Server (page 5-44)
WSD Scan (page 5-35)
DSM Scan (page 5-37)
Address Book (page 5-47)
Org./Sending Data Format Original Size (page 6-19)
2-sided/Book Original (page 6-73)
Sending Size (page 6-74)
Long Original (page 6-75)
File Format (page 6-75)
File Separation (page 6-82)
Scan Resolution (page 6-82)
Fax TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xxix
> Menu Map
Advanced Setup Border Erase/Full Scan (page 6-45)
Zoom (page 6-39)
Fax Delayed Transmission (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Continuous Scan (page 6-68)
Email Subject/Body (page 6-83)
iFax Subject/Body (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Fax Direct Transmission (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Centering (page 6-42)
Fax Polling RX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Send and Print (page 6-83)
Send and Store (page 6-83)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-84)
Email Encrypted TX (page 6-84)
Digital Signature to Email (page 6-84)
Handwriting Enhancement (page 6-68)
File Size Confirmation (page 6-85)
Fax TX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xxx
> Menu Map
&XVWRP%R[
Add/Edit (page 5-58)
Search (No.) (page 5-54)
Search (Name) (page 5-54)
(Open any box) Store File Functions Original Size (page 6-19)
Storing Size (page 6-86)
Density (page 6-34)
Zoom (page 6-39)
Border Erase/Full Scan (page 6-45)
xxxi
> Menu Map
(Open any box) Print Functions Paper Selection (page 6-20)
Staple/Punch (page 6-29) Staple (page 6-29)
Punch (page 6-31)
Combine (page 6-42)
Duplex (page 6-52)
Margin/Centering (page 6-44)
Page # (page 6-57)
Fold (page 6-26)
Form Overlay (page 6-56)
Cover (page 6-55)
Delete after Printed (page 6-85)
Zoom (page 6-39)
Booklet (page 6-47)
xxxii
> Menu Map
(Open any box) Send Destination (page 5-47)
Functions File Format (page 6-75)
Fax TX Resolution
(refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Fax Delayed Transmission

iFax Subject/Body
Delete after Transmitted (page 6-86)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-84)
Email Encrypted TX (page 6-84)
Digital Signature to Email (page 6-84)
Zoom (page 6-39)
File Size Confirmation (page 6-85)
Fax TX Report
Resolution (page 6-82)
xxxiii
> Menu Map
(Open any box) Others Join (page 5-69)
Move/Copy (page 5-64)
Preview (page 5-56)
Page Selection (page 5-54)
Delete (page 5-67)
Search(Name) (page 5-54)
(page 5-54)
xxxiv
> Menu Map
-RE%R[
Private Print/Stored Job (page 4-19, page 4-20)
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 4-21, page 4-22)
Form for Form Overlay (page 5-69)
xxxv
> Menu Map
86%'ULYH
Print Functions Paper Selection (page 6-20)
Staple/Punch (page 6-29 Staple (page 6-29)
Punch (page 6-31)
Duplex (page 6-52)
Margin (page 6-44)
Fold (page 6-26)
Encrypted PDF Password (page 6-87)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-87)
XPS Fit to Page (page 6-87)
xxxvi
> Menu Map
Store File Functions Original Size (page 6-19)
Density (page 6-34)
Zoom (page 6-39)
Border Erase/Full Scan (page 6-45)
Handwriting Enhancement (page 6-68)
Remove USB (page 5-73)
USB Info (page 5-73)
Delete (page 5-55)
(page 5-55)
xxxvii
> Menu Map
6WDWXV
-RE&DQFHO
Printing Jobs Status (page 7-3)

Log (page 7-2)
Sending Jobs Status (page 7-5)
Scheduled (page 7-7)
Log (page 7-2)
Storing Jobs Status (page 7-6)
Log (page 7-2)
Fax Communication Status (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Fax Incoming/Outgoing Log (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xxxviii
> Menu Map
6\VWHP0HQX
Quick Setup Fax Setup (page 2-48)

Wizard
Energy Saver Setup (page 2-48)
Network Setup (page 2-49)
Email Setup (page 2-49)
Security Setup (page 2-49)
Device Settings Language/System Language (page 8-6)
of Units
Measurement (page 8-6)
Keyboard Keyboard Layout (page 8-6)
Optional Keyboard Type (page 8-6)
Numeric Keypad Default Display (page 8-6)
Layout (HyPAS Application) (page 8-6)
Date/Time Date and Time (page 8-6)
Date Format (page 8-7)
Time Zone (page 8-7)
Energy Saver/ Auto Panel Reset (page 8-7)
Timer
Panel Reset Timer (page 8-7)
Low Power Timer (page 8-7)
Sleep Timer (page 8-7)
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-7)
Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-8)
Weekly Timer Settings (page 8-8)
Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-8)
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-9)
Energy Saver Recovery Level (page 8-9)
Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-9)
Ping Timeout (page 8-9)
xxxix
> Menu Map
Device Settings Display Settings Display Brightness (page 8-10)

Default Screen (page 8-10)
Wallpaper (page 2-16)
Show Power Off Message (page 8-10)
Quick Setup Registration (Copy) (page 8-10)
Quick Setup Registration (Send) (page 8-10)
Quick Setup Registration (Fax) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box) (page 8-10)
Quick Setup Registration (Box Print) (page 8-10)
Quick Setup Registration (Sending from Box) (page 8-10)
Sound Buzzer (page 8-11)
Fax Speaker Volume (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Fax Monitor Volume (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Original/Scan Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-11)
Settings
Custom Original Size (page 8-12)
Prevent Light Reflection (page 8-12)
Prevent Original Skewing (page 8-12)
Paper Feeding Cassette 1 Settings (page 8-13)
Cassette 2 Settings (page 8-13)
MP Tray Settings (page 8-14)
Inserter Tray 1 (page 8-15)
Inserter Tray 2 (page 8-15)
Custom Paper Settings (page 8-16)
Media Type Setting (page 8-17)
Show Paper Setup Message (page 8-18)
Paper Feed Default Paper Source (page 8-18)
Settings
Auto Paper Selection (page 8-18)
Media for Auto (B&W) (page 8-18)
Paper Source for Cover (page 8-19)
Separator Paper Source (page 8-19)
Special Paper Action (page 8-19)
xl
> Menu Map
Device Settings Paper Output Paper Output (page 8-20)

Paper Output Offset Documents by Job (page 8-20)
Behavior
Offset One Page Documents (page 8-20)
Function Key Assignment (page 8-21)
Operation Assist Orientation Confirmation (page 8-21)
Preset Limit (page 8-21)
Clear Settings after Job Started (page 8-21)
Error Handling Duplexing Error (page 8-22)
Finishing Error (page 8-22)
No Staple Error (page 8-22)
Finished Pages Exceeded (page 8-22)
Punch Waste Full Error (page 8-22)
Paper Mismatch Error (page 8-22)
Wrong Size Paper Loaded (page 8-22)
Paper Jam before Staple (page 8-23)
Error Job Skip (page 8-23)
Auto Error Clear (page 8-23)
Continue or Cancel Error Job (page 8-23)
Image Preview at DP Jam (page 8-23)
Toner Settings Low Toner Alert (page 8-24)
Toner Waste Full Alert (page 8-24)
xli
> Menu Map
Notification/ Printing Report/ Status Page (page 8-25)

Report List
Service Status (page 8-25)
Network Status (page 8-25)
Optional Network Status (page 8-25)
Print Accounting Report (page 9-47)
Font List (page 8-26)
Outgoing Fax Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Incoming Fax Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Fax List (Index) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Fax List (No.) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
One Touch List (ALL) (page 8-26)
One Touch List (Fax) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Fax Box List (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Application Status (page 8-26)
Configuration List (page 8-26)
Data Sanitization Report (page 8-26)
Result Report Send Result Report (page 8-26)
Settings
RX Result (refer to FAX Operation Guide
Job Finish Notice Setting (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Device Status Low Toner Alert (page 8-24)
Notification
Toner Waste Full Alert (page 8-24)
Message Board Settings (page 8-27)
Fax Communication Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xlii
> Menu Map
Notification/ History Settings Sending Log Auto Sending (page 8-28)

Report History
Destination (page 8-28)
Subject (page 8-28)
SSFC (page 8-28)
Personal Information (page 8-28)
Sending Log History (page 8-28)
Login History Login History (page 8-29)
Settings
Auto Sending (page 8-29)
Subject (page 8-29)
Log Reset (page 8-29)
Device Log Device Log History (page 8-30)
History Settings
Subject (page 8-30)
Secure Comm. Secure Comm. Error Log (page 8-31)
Error Log
Subject (page 8-31)
xliii
> Menu Map
Function Settings Function Defaults Common Clear Settings after Job Started (page 8-33)
Border Erase Default (page 8-33)
Zoom (page 8-33)
System Stamp (Basic Settings) (page 8-33)
DP Read Action (page 8-33)
Copy/Print Original Orientation (Copy) (page 8-34)
Original Image (Copy) (page 8-34)
Background Density Adj. (Copy) (page 8-34)
Continuous Scan (Copy) (page 8-34)
Prevent Bleed-through (Copy) (page 8-34)
Skip Blank Page (Copy) (page 8-34)
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-34)
Margin Default (page 8-35)
Border Erase (Copy) (page 8-35)
Auto Image Rotation (Copy) (page 8-35)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-35)
XPS Fit to Page (page 8-35)
Reserve Next Priority (page 8-35)
Auto Image Rotation Action (page 8-35)
Auto % Priority (page 8-35)
Paper Size for Small Original (page 8-35)
Original Size of Undetected Original (page 8-36)
Erase Shadowed Areas (Copy) (page 8-36)
xliv
> Menu Map
Function Settings Function Defaults Send/Store Original Orientation (Send/Store) (page 8-36)
Color Selection (Send/Store) (page 8-36)
Color Type (page 8-36)
Fax TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation
Guide)
Org. Image (Send/Store) (page 8-36)
Background Density Adj. (Send/Store) (page 8-
36)
Continuous Scan (Send/Store) (page 8-36)
Continuous Scan (Fax) (refer to FAX Operation
Guide)
Prevent Bleed-through (Send/Store) (page 8-36)
Border Erase/Full Scan (Send/Store) (page 8-36)
Border Erase/Full Scan (Fax) (refer to FAX
Operation Guide)
Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) (page 8-36)
Image Quality (File Format) (page 8-37)
High Comp. PDF Image (page 8-37)
Color TIFF Compression (page 8-37)
PDF/A (page 8-37)
OCR Text Recognition Action (page 8-37)
OCR Text Recognition (page 8-37)
Primary OCR Language (page 8-37)
OCR Output Format (page 8-37)
iFax Subject/Body (page 8-38)
Erase Shadowed Areas (Send) (page 8-38)
Erase Shadowed Areas (Store) (page 8-38)
xlv
> Menu Map
Function Settings Copy/Print Quick Setup Registration (Copy) (page 8-10)

Send/Store Default Screen (page 8-38)
Prevent Mis- Destination Check before Send (page 8-38)
sending Settings
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-38)
New Destination Entry (page 8-38)
Recall Destination (page 8-38)
Broadcast (page 8-38)
Destination History (page 8-38)
Delete Destination History (page 8-38)
Quick Setup Registration (Send) (page 8-10)
Digital Signature Digital Signature (page 8-39)
to File
Digital Signature Format (page 8-39)
Password Confirmation on Signature Permission
(page 8-39)
Password (page 8-39)
Email Email Settings SMTP (Email TX) (page 8-40)
SMTP Server Name (page 8-40)
SMTP Port Number (page 8-40)
Sender Address (page 8-40)
SMT Auth and Sender Address (page 8-40)
POP3 POP3 (page 8-40)
Remote Printing (page 8-40)
Sending Job - FTP Settings (page 8-40)
Folder
SMB Settings (page 8-40)
Fax/iFax (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
WSD WSD Scan (page 8-41)
WSD Print (page 8-41)
Address Book Add/Edit Machine Address Book (page 8-41)
Machine Address Sort (page 8-42)
Book
Narrow Down (page 8-42)
Edit Restriction (page 8-42)
External Address Book (page 8-42)
Address Book Type (page 8-42)
One-Touch Key Add/Edit One Touch Key (page 8-42)
Send and Forward (page 8-42)
RX/Forward Rules/Fax Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xlvi
> Menu Map
Function Settings Printer Emulation (page 8-47)

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-47)
Override A4/Letter (page 8-47)
Duplex (page 8-47)
Copies (page 8-47)
Orientation (page 8-47)
Form Feed Timeout (page 8-47)
LF Action (page 8-47)
CR Action (page 8-48)
Job Name (page 8-48)
User Name (page 8-48)
Paper Feed Mode (page 8-48)
MP Tray Priority (page 8-48)
Auto Cassette Change (page 8-48)
Message Banner Print (page 8-48)
Wide A4 (page 8-48)
Resolution (page 8-49)
KIR (page 8-49)
Printing Job Terminator (page 8-49)
Direct Printing from Web (page 8-49)
Document Box Custom Box - Add/Edit (page 5-58)
Auto File Deletion Time (page 8-49)
Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box) (page 8-10)
Quick Setup Registration (Box Print) (page 8-10)
Quick Setup Registration (Sending from Box) (page 8-10)
Job Box Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-50)
Repeat Copy Job Retention (page 8-50)
Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-50)
Fax Memory RX Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
xlvii
> Menu Map
Function Settings Home Customize Desktop (page 2-16)

Customize Taskbar (page 2-16)
Wallpaper (page 2-16)
Status Display Settings (page 8-51)
Job Status/Job Logs Settings (page 8-51)
Internet Browser Internet Browser (page 8-51)
Browser Environment (page 8-51)
Proxy (page 8-53)
Manual Staple (page 8-52)
Remote Services (page 8-52)
Network Settings Network Settings Host Name (page 8-53)
Proxy (page 8-53)
Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct (page 8-53)
Settings
Device Name (page 8-53)
IP Address (page 8-54)
Auto Disconnect (page 8-54)
Persistent Group (page 8-54)
Frequency band (page 8-54)
Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi (page 8-54)
Setup (page 8-55)
TCP/IP Setting (page 8-56)
Wired Network TCP/IP Setting (page 8-58)
Settings
Others (page 8-60)
xlviii
> Menu Map
Network Settings Network Settings Protocol Settings SMTP (Email TX) (page 8-40)
POP3 (Email RX) (page 8-40)
FTP Client (Transmission) (page 8-60)
FTP Server (Reception) (page 8-60)
SMB Client (Transmission) (page 8-60)
NetBEUI (page 8-60)
WSD Print (page 8-41)
iFax (page 8-60)
ThinPrint (page 8-61)
LPD (page 8-61)
Raw (page 8-61)
IPP (page 8-61)
IPP over SSL (page 8-61)
HTTP (page 8-62)
HTTPS (page 8-62)
LDAP (page 8-62)
SNMPv1/v2c (page 8-62)
SNMPv3 (page 8-62)
Enhanced WSD (page 8-62)
Enhanced WSD over SSL (page 8-62)
eSCL (page 8-62)
eSCL over SSL (page 8-63)
VNC (RFB) (page 8-63)
VNC (RFB) over SSL (page 8-63)
Enhanced VNC over SSL (page 8-63)
REST (page 8-63)
REST over SSL (page 8-64)
RESTful API Settings (page 8-64)
Ping (page 8-64)
Bonjour (page 8-64)
IP Filter (IPv4) (page 8-65)
IP Filter (IPv6) (page 8-65)
IPSec (page 8-65)
Restart Network (page 8-65)
xlix
> Menu Map
Network Settings Optional Network Host Name (page 8-66)

Wireless Network Connection Status (page 8-66)
Setup (page 8-66)
Others (page 8-67)
Wired Network TCP/IP Setting (page 8-68)
Settings
Others (page 8-68)
Connectivity Bluetooth Settings (page 8-69)
NFC (page 8-69)
Remote Operation (page 8-69)
Others Primary Network (Client) (page 8-70)
Restart Entire Device (page 8-70)
l
> Menu Map
Security Settings Security Quick Setup (page 8-70)

Interface Block USB Host (page 8-71)
Setting
USB Device (page 8-71)
USB Drive (page 8-71)
Optional Interface 1 (page 8-72)
Optional Interface 2 (page 8-72)
Device Security Unusable Time (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Settings
Security Level (page 8-72)
Software Verification (page 8-72)
Administrator Authentication on Firm Update (page 8-72)
Data Security Hard Disk/SSD Initialization (page 8-73)
Data Sanitization (page 8-74)
System Stamp Printing Jobs Text Stamp (page 8-77)
Sending Jobs Text Stamp (page 8-79)
Storing Jobs Text Stamp (page 8-81)
Authentication User Account Lockout Settings (page 9-4)
Security
Password Policy Settings (page 9-5)
Unknown User Settings (page 9-51)
Network SSL (page 8-83)
Network Access (page 8-83)
li
> Menu Map
Job Accounting/ Job Accounting Job Accounting (page 9-33)

Authentication Setting
Add/Edit Job Accounting (page 9-34)
Job Accounting Counter (page 9-45)
Job Accounting Default Setting (page 9-49, page 9-50)
Setting
Default Counter Limit (page 9-42)
Count by Paper Size (page 9-44)
User Login Setting User Login (page 9-3)
Add/Edit Local User (page 9-6)
Local Authorization (page 9-16)
Obtain NW User Property (page 9-23)
Group Authorization (page 9-18)
Group List (page 9-18)
Guest Authorization Set. (page 9-20)
Guest Property (page 9-21)
Simple Login (page 9-25)
Simple Login Key (page 9-26)
PIN Login (page 9-30)
Authentication User Account Lockout Settings (page 9-4)
Security
Password Policy Settings (page 9-5)
ID Card Settings Keyboard Login (page 9-28)
Additional Authentication (page 9-29)
Add/Delete Application (page 5-14)
Application
Optional Function (page 11-8)
lii
> Menu Map
Adjustment/ Image Adjustment Density Copy (page 8-84)

Maintenance
Send/Box (page 8-84)
Fax (refer to FAX Operation Guide)
Background Copy (Auto) (page 8-84)
Density Adj.
Send/Box (Auto) (page 8-84)
Sharpness Copy (page 8-84)
Adjustment
Contrast Copy(page 8-84)
Auto Color Correction (page 8-84)
Correcting Black Lines (page 8-85)
Calibration Cycle (page 8-85)
Calibration (page 8-85)
Tone Curve Adjustment (page 8-85)
Developer Refresh (page 8-85)
Auto Drum Refresh (page 8-85)
Drum Refresh (page 8-86)
Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 8-86)
Behavior Silent Mode (page 8-86)
Adjustment
Drum Heater (page 8-86)
Others Diagnostics Memory Diagnostics (page 8-86)
Software Verification (page 8-72)
Restart/ Restart Network (page 8-65)
Initialization
Restart Network (Optional Network) (page 8-68)
Format SSD (page 8-87)
Format SD Card (page 8-87)
System Initialization (page 8-87)
liii
1 Legal and Safety
Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................................................ 1-2
Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7
Compliance and Conformity .................................................................................................................... 1-7
Radio Tag Technology .............................................................................................................................. 1-9
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................................................. 1-9
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................... 1-9
EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................................................ 1-9
EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ......................................................................................................... 1-9
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) .............................................................. 1-10
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) .............................................................................................. 1-10
Legal Information .................................................................................................................................... 1-11
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-13
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-13
Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-13
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-13
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-13
1-1
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Notice
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,
other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their
meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated
inside the symbol.
... [General warning]
... [Warning of high temperature]
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited
action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Warning of prohibited action]
... [Disassembly prohibited]
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of
the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Alert of required action]
... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are
illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE
An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this
machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
1-2
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
Temperature 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)

(But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).)
Humidity 10 to 80%
(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the
machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of
copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that
the room be properly ventilated.
1-3
Precautions for Use

Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes
and skin.
• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If
coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of
your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,
contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature
and humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multipurpose
(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
1-4
Laser Safety (Europe)

Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is
hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no
radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.
Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.
1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)

1. Safety of laser beam
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards
established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is
safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and
sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without
certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates
compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
The position of the rating label is show below.
XXXXi
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label
located on the cover of the optical unit.
4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
5. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.
1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power

Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and
are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs
sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.
Compliance and Conformity

Hereby, KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. declares that the radio equipment type TASKalfa 5004i, TASKalfa 6004i,
TASKalfa 7004i are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/service/dlc.html
Module name, Option Software Ver. Frequency band in which the Maximum radio-frequency power
radio equipment operates: transmitted in the frequency band in
which the radio equipment operates:
IB-51 (option) 2.2.6 2.4GHz 100mW
IB-37 (option) 1.0 2.4GHz 100mW
5GHz 50mW - 1W
IB-38 (option) 1.0 2.4GHz 100mW
Transmitter Module(SRD) 2005.11 13.56MHz 0.2nW
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 and
Part 18 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate this equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
1-7
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 and
Part 18 of the FCC Rules.
*Only when ZF-7100 is installed to this equipment.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Industry Canada statement:

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s) / receiver(s) that complies with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS (s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all
persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.
Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Label: CAN ICES-3B/NMB-3B
* This machine complies with CAN ICES-3 A/NMB-3 A only when ZF-7100 is installed.
* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.
Warning — Operation of this equipment in a residential environment could cause radio interference.(Only when ZF-7100
is installed.)
* The above statements are valid only in the EU Countries.
NOTE — Use shielded interface cables.
Caution:
The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful
interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
Operations in the 5.25-5.35GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only.
Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with Canada radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This
equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.
* These above statements are valid in the United States of America, Canada and EU.
For Brazil
IB-37 e IB-38
18780-20-09076
Para maiores informações, consulte o site da ANATEL www.anatel.gov.br
Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode causar interferência em
sistemas devidamente autorizados.
For Paraguay
IB-37 IB-38
NR: 2021-01-I-0031 NR: 2021-01-I-0032
1-8
Radio Tag Technology

In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to
authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.
Other precautions
(for users in California, the United States)
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do
not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.
• Paper money
• Bank note
• Securities
• Stamp
• Passport
• Certificate
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
EN ISO 7779
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder
weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld
platziert werden.
Wireless Connection (Mexico only)

The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe
aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
1-9
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN

(If equipped)
Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable,
which offers the advantage that a WLAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can
be transmitted.
On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can
pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.
Secretly Viewing Communication Contents

A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the
following communication contents.
• Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers
• Contents of email messages
Illegal Intrusion
A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the
following illegal actions.
• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)
• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information
(spoofing)
• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)
• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)
Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to
reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when
the product is used.
We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and
that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the
security settings.
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical
institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and
precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.
• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire
alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the
instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.
• If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles
or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy
including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please
use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and
redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in
applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,
nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in
these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.
Sólo México (Mexico only)

Este equipo utiliza el módulo de interfaz de red inalámbrica modelo IB-37 (DHUA-K77-7) / IB-38 (DHUA-K77-8) para
conectarse a las redes Inalámbricas.
1-10
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document
Solutions Inc. is prohibited.
Regarding Trade Names

• PRESCRIBE is registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• TASKalfa is registered trademarks or trademarks of KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Excel and PowerPoint are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging
Inc.
• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.
• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of
International Typeface Corporation.
• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.
• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by
Apple Inc.
• Google is trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google LLC.
• Mopria™ is registered trademarks of Mopria™ Alliance.
• Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Powered by ABBYY FineReader.
ABBYY and FineReader are trademarks of ABBYY Software Ltd.
• RealVNC, VNC and RFB are registered trademarks of RealVNC Ltd. in the U.S. and in other countries.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The
designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
1-11
Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as
well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and
versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or
personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of
this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the
fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from
Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights
are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary
information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access
to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You
agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License
may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not
remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you
shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as
requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.
7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with
Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.
Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular
purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is
repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential
damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.
9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written
consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.
Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in
FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and
conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No
change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.
By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Open Source Software License

For the “Open Source Software license, go into the following URL and select Country > Product Name > OS > Language
and then, refer to the “OSS_Notice” from the manual tab in the “Download”.
https://kyocera.info/
1-12
Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of
time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state
but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of
time.
Low Power Mode (page 2-45)
Sleep (page 2-46)
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function

This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single
sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.
Duplex (page 6-52)
Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex
mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that
machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.
Resource Saving - Paper

For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper
certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or
an equivalent quality standard, be used.
This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to
further saving of forest resources.
* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"
Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Environmental benefits of "Power Management"

To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that
automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.
Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a
significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation
time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We participate in the ENERGY STAR® Program.
We provide the products complied with ENERGY STAR® to the market.
ENERGY STAR® is an energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the use of
products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing the products
complied with ENERGY STAR®, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during
product use and cut energy-related costs.
1-13
2 Installing and Setting
up the Machine
This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and
software installation.
Part Names (Machine Exterior) ..................... 2-2 Energy Saver Recovery Level .......... 2-47
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ................. 2-4 Weekly Timer Settings ...................... 2-47
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Power Off Timer (models for Europe) 2-47
Attached) ....................................................... 2-5 Quick Setup Wizard .................................... 2-48
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ..... 2-7 Installing Software ....................................... 2-51
Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-8 Published Software (Windows) ......... 2-51
Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-8 Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-52
Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-9 Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-57
Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-9 Installing Software in Mac
Power On/Off .............................................. 2-10 Computer .......................................... 2-58
Power On .......................................... 2-10 Setting TWAIN Driver ........................ 2-61
Power Off .......................................... 2-10 Setting WIA Driver ............................ 2-63
Using the Operation Panel ........................... 2-11 Checking the Counter ................................. 2-64
Operation Panel Keys ........................ 2-11 Additional Preparations for the
[Job Separator] indicator .................... 2-11 Administrator ............................................... 2-65
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle .... 2-12 Sending Documents to a PC ............ 2-65
Touch Panel ................................................ 2-13 Strengthening the Security ............... 2-65
Using the Touch Panel ...................... 2-13 Command Center RX .................................. 2-67
Home Screen .................................... 2-15 Accessing Command Center RX ...... 2-68
Assigning Functions to Function Changing Security Settings .............. 2-69
Keys .................................................. 2-20 Changing Device Information ........... 2-70
Display for Device Information .......... 2-22 E-mail Settings .................................. 2-71
Display Setting Screen ..................... 2-23 Registering Destinations ................... 2-75
Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set ..... 2-24 Creating a New Custom Box ............ 2-76
Original Preview ................................ 2-24 Printing a Document Stored in a
Entering Numbers ............................. 2-26 Custom Box ...................................... 2-77
Help Screen ...................................... 2-28 Transferring Data from Our Other
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying Products ...................................................... 2-78
the View) ........................................... 2-29 Migrating the Address Book .............. 2-78
Login/Logout ............................................... 2-30
Login ................................................. 2-30
Logout ............................................... 2-31
Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-32
Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-32
Network Setup ............................................ 2-33
Configuring the Wired Network ......... 2-33
Configuring the Wireless Network .... 2-35
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 2-41
Configuring NFC ............................... 2-43
Motion Sensor ................................... 2-44
Energy Saver function ................................. 2-45
Low Power Mode .............................. 2-45
Sleep ................................................. 2-46
Auto Sleep ........................................ 2-46
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ...... 2-46
Sleep Level (Energy Saver)
(models except for Europe) .............. 2-47
2-1
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
Part Names (Machine Exterior)

21
13 12 11
14 20
10 15
2 9
16 19
3 17 18
8
4 7
5
7
6
1 Document Processor 12 Original Table
2 Operation Panel 13 Original Width Guides
3 Power Switch 14 Slit Glass
4 Waste Toner Box Cover 15 Job Separator Tray
5 Cassette 1 16 Paper Stopper
6 Cassette 2 17 Inner Tray
7 Handles 18 Front Cover
8 Multipurpose Tray 19 Motion Sensor
9 USB Memory Slot 20 Platen
10 Original Eject Table 21 Original Size Indicator Plates
11 Original Stopper
2-2
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
29
28
27
26
25
22
23 24
22 Paper Length Guide 26 Multipurpose Tray
23 Paper Width Guide 27 Paper Width Guide
24 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 28 Right Cover 1 Lever
25 Support Tray Section of the Multipurpose Tray 29 Right Cover 1
2-3
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
1
2
4
3
7
8
1 Option Interface Slot 5 Toner Container (Black)

2 USB Port 6 Toner Container Cover
3 USB Interface Connector 7 Waste Toner Box
4 Network Interface Connector 8 Waste Toner Box Cover
2-4
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached)
12 11
1
4
3
2
4
10
8
2 3 6 7
10
9
7 6
1 Tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the top tray) 7 Cassette 4

2 Tray A 8 Cassette 5
3 Tray B 9 Inner Shift Tray
4 Job Separator Tray 10 Finisher Tray
5 Folding Tray 11 Original Cover
6 Cassette 3 12 Control Section of the Finisher
Optional Equipment (page 11-2) Manual Staple (page 5-76)
2-5
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
13
14
15
13 Inserter Tray 1
14 Inserter Tray 2
15 Z fold unit Tray
Optional Equipment (page 11-2)
2-6
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.
When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB

MFP
USB
When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct
Network cable
connection
Wi-Fi
Network connection*1
Wi-Fi access point

Wi-Fi Direct
Tablet connection*1
Wi-Fi connection or *1 Only for models with

Wi-Fi Direct connection Wi-Fi.
NOTE
If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following.
Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-35)
Cables that Can Be Used

Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable
Connect a LAN cable to the Printer/Scanner/Network LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T)
machine. FAX*1
Connect a USB cable to the Printer USB 3.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant,
machine. max. 5.0 m, shielded)
*1 Function available when using optional FAX kit. For more information on using the Network FAX, refer to the FAX
Operation Guide.
IMPORTANT
Using a cable other than a USB 3.0 compatible cable may cause failure.
2-7
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.
Power Off (page 2-10)
1 Connect the cable to the machine.

1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub or the PC.
2 Power on the machine and configure the network.

2-8
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting USB Cable

IMPORTANT
Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.
Power Off (page 2-10)

1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the left side of the body.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
2 Power on the machine.
Connecting the Power Cable

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power
outlet.
IMPORTANT
Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-9
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power On/Off
Power On
1 Turn the power switch on.
Power Off
1 Turn the power switch off.
The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed.

Show Power Off Message (page 8-10)
It takes several minutes for power off.
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the
machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the
outlet as a safety precaution.
IMPORTANT
• Do not press and hold the power switch more than 5 seconds continuously. Forcibly turning off the power
may damage the HDD or the memory so that it causes the failure.
• If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power switch
disables fax transmission and reception.
• Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
2-10
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Using the Operation Panel

Operation Panel Keys
5
1 2 3 4
1 [Home] key: Displays the Home screen.

2 [Data] indicator: Blinks while the machine is printing or sending/receiving, or accessing the hard disk/SSD. Also, it
lights when there is a sending job FAX using delayed transmission.
3 [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
4 [Energy Saver] indicator: Blinks while the machine is asleep.
5 Touch Panel: Displays icons for configuring machine settings.
[Job Separator] indicator

Blinks when there is paper in the job separator tray.
2-11
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle

The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted.
2-12
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Touch Panel
Using the Touch Panel
This section explains the basic operation of the touch panel.
Tapping
This is the operation used to select an icon or key.
In this document, the tap operation is expressed as "select."
8VHU 'HYLFH$GPLQ
&RS\ 6HQG )D[

/RJRXW
6WDWXV 'HYLFH /DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV
-RE&DQFHO ,QIRUPDWLRQ 'HYLFH$GPLQ
(QHUJ\6DYHU
&RS\ 6HQG )D[ &XVWRP%R[
5HVHW
-RE%R[ 86%'ULYH )D[%R[ 3ROOLQJ%R[
Popover
Tap the icons and keys to display detailed information on the icons and menus. A popover displays information and
menus without switching between screens.
&RS\ 6HQG )D[ 6WDWXV 'HYLFH /DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV

-RE&DQFHO ,QIRUPDWLRQ

(QHUJ\6DYHU
:L)L'LUHFW +HOS ,QFRPLQJ 2XWJRLQJ
)D[/RJ )D[/RJ
6\VWHP0HQX &RXQWHU $FFHVVLELOLW\ 1XPHULF.H\SDG

&RS\ 6HQG 6WDQGDUG
)DYRULWHV
5HVHW
Swiping
This is the operation used to switch between screens and to display items that are not displayed in the list.
Move in one direction as if tracing on the screen.
Example: Home Screen

Move the screen to the left and right.
8VHU 'HYLFH$GPLQ
&RS\ 6HQG )D[

/RJRXW
(QHUJ\6DYHU
5HVHW
2-13
Example: System Menu Screen 8VHU 'HYLFH$GPLQ
Move the screen up and down.

&RS\ 6HQG )D[
/RJRXW
6\VWHP0HQX
/DQJXDJH6\VWHPRI8QLWV
4XLFN6HWXS
:L]DUG
.H\ERDUG
'HYLFH (QHUJ\6DYHU
6HWWLQJV
1XPHULF.H\SDG
1RWLILFDWLRQ
5HSRUW
'DWH7LPH
)XQFWLRQ
6HWWLQJV
(QHUJ\6DYHU7LPHU
1HWZRUN 5HVHW
6HWWLQJV
'LVSOD\6HWWLQJV
6HFXULW\
6HWWLQJV
6RXQG
-RE$FFRXQWLQJ
$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ
2ULJLQDO6FDQ6HWWLQJV
&RXQWHU &ORVH
Operating the touch panel
11 10 9
1 8VHU 'HYLFH$GPLQ

/RJRXW
&RS\ 6HQG )D[
&RSLHV
2 4XLFN6HWXS
$XWR
(QHUJ\6DYHU
8
2UJ3DSHU
)LQLVKLQJ 3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP
/D\RXW 1RUPDO VLGHG!! ,QWHUUXSW 7

(GLW
VLGHG
,PDJH4XDOLW\ 'HQVLW\ 'XSOH[
5HVHW 6
$GYDQFHG 2II 2II
6HWXS
&RPELQH 6WDSOH3XQFK 6WRS
5
,'&DUG
3 &RS\
3UHYLHZ
1XPHULF
.H\SDG 6WDUW
4
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW
1 Displays the status of the equipment as well as necessary operation messages.

2 Displays the Quick Setup screen.
3 Displays registered shortcuts.
4 [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
5 [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.
6 [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.
7 [Interrupt] key: Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
8 [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode.
9 Displays the time.
10 Remaining amount of toner.
11 Set the copy functions.
2-14
Home Screen
This screen is displayed by selecting the [Home] key on the operation panel. Touching an icon will display the
corresponding screen.
You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background.
Editing the Home Screen (page 2-16)
1 8 7
8VHU 'HYLFH$GPLQ
2 &RS\ 6HQG )D[ 6WDWXV

-RE&DQFHO
'HYLFH
,QIRUPDWLRQ
/DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV
'HYLFH$GPLQ
/RJRXW
6
5
(QHUJ\6DYHU
3 5HVHW
4
* The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option
settings.
No. Item Description
1 Status Area Displays the messages and status icons for the current status.
Displays the logged-in user name when user login
administration is enabled.
2 Taskbar Displays task icons.

If an error occurs, the [Status/Job Cancel] icon will show "!".
Once the error clears, the display will return to normal.
3 Desktop Displays the application icons. Icons that are not displayed on
the first page will appear by changing the page.
4 Screen-switching Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages.

keys
NOTE
It is also possible to use swiping to switch between displays.
Using the Touch Panel (page 2-13)
5 [...] Displays every task icons including the icons displayed in an

taskbar area in a popover.
6 [Login] / [Logout] Logs in or logs out when user login administration is enabled.
7 Remaining amount Displays the remaining amount of toner. Select this icon to
of toner display details of the remaining amount of toner in a popover.
2-15
8 Sub status icons Displays the icons that indicate the status of the machine. 5
icons can be displayed. Select this area to display the icon
information in a popover.
Status Icon (Wi-Fi) The icon " " is displayed when Wi-Fi is connected. When
Wi-Fi is not connected, " " is displayed.
Status Icon " " is displayed when the security level is set at [Low].
(Security level:
Low)
Status Icon " " is displayed when using the remote operation.
(Remote operation)
Status Icon When you activate the Data Encryption/Overwrite Function,

(Security the Security information icon will be displayed.
information) " " is displayed while the data is overwriting.
" " is displayed if remaining data is in HDD.
" " is displayed if remaining data is not in HDD.
Status Icon (FAX " " is displayed when the capacity of the FAX Memory RX
Memory RX Box Box is 10% or less.
capacity)
Status Icon (USB " " is displayed when a USB drive is connected to this
drive) machine.
Tapping the USB drive icon and selecting [Remove USB]
allows you to safely remove the USB drive.
Editing the Home Screen

You can change the background of the Home screen as well as which icons are displayed.
1 Display the screen.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Home]
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges or as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The factory
default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: TASKalfa 5004i: 5000, TASKalfa 6004i: 6000, TASKalfa 7004i: 7000
Login Password: TASKalfa 5004i: 5000, TASKalfa 6004i: 6000, TASKalfa 7004i: 7000
2-16
2 Configure the settings.

The available settings are shown below.
Item Description
Customize Specify the function icons to display on the desktop.*1

Desktop Select [Add] to display the screen for selecting the function to
display. Select [Function Type] to narrow down the functions by
applications and favorites. Select the function to display and [OK].
Select an icon and [Previous] or [Next] to change the display
position of the selected icon on the Desktop.
To delete an icon from desktop, select the desired one and select
[Delete].
Customize Specify the task icons to display on the taskbar. Select [Taskbar
Taskbar Button 1 (to 4)]. Select the function to display, and select [OK]. 4
task icons can be displayed.
NOTE
Functions that are hidden can be displayed by selecting [...] (popover
icon) on the right end of the taskbar.
Taskbar buttons for which [None] has been selected will not be
displayed. Other taskbar buttons will be displayed in order from the
left.
Wallpaper Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen.

Value: Images 1 to 8
*1 Displays a maximum of 60 function icons including the installed applications and the
functions that can be used when options are installed.
2-17
Available Functions to Display on Desktop
Reference
Function Icon Description
page
Copy*1 Displays the Copy screen. page 5-19
Send*1 Displays the Send screen. page 5-23
Fax Server Displays the FAX Server screen. page 5-44
Fax*2 Displays the FAX screen. Refer to FAX

Operation
Guide.
Custom Box*1 Displays the Custom Box screen. page 5-58
Job Box*1 Displays the Job Box screen. page 4-18
USB Drive*1 Displays the USB Drive screen. page 5-70
Fax Box*2 Displays the Fax Box screen. Refer to FAX

Operation
Guide.
Polling Box*2 Displays the Polling Box screen. Refer to FAX
Operation
Guide.
Fax Memory RX Displays the Fax Memory RX Box Refer to FAX
Box*2 screen. Operation
Guide.
Internet Browser Displays the Internet Browser page 5-74
screen.
Send to Me Displays the Send screen. The E- page 5-43

(Email)*3 mail address of the logged-in user is
set as the destination.
Send to Me from Displays the Custom Box screen. page 5-64
Box (Email)*3 The E-mail address of the logged-in
user is set as the destination.
Favorites Calls up the registered favorite. The page 5-11
icon will change according to the
function of the favorite.
Application Name*4 — Displays the selected applications. page 5-14

*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.
*2 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
*3 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
*4 The icon of the application appears.
2-18
Available Functions to Display on Taskbar
Reference
Function Icon Description
page
Status/Job Cancel*1
Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen. —
Device Displays the Device Information page 2-22

Information*1 screen. Check the system and
network information, and information
on the options that are used.
It is possible to print various reports
and lists.
Language*1 Displays the Language setting page 8-6
screen in System Menu.
Paper Settings*1 Displays the Paper setting screen in page 8-13
System Menu.
Wi-Fi Direct*2 Wi-Fi Direct is set and a list of page 2-41
information relating to the machine
that can use the network appears.
Help Displays the Help screen. page 2-28
User Property Displays the User Property screen. page 9-10
Incoming Fax Log*3 Displays the Incoming Fax Log Refer to FAX
screen. Operation
Guide.
Outgoing Fax Log*3 Displays the Outgoing Fax Log Refer to the
screen. FAX
Operation
Guide.
System Menu Displays the System Menu screen. page 8-2
Counter Displays the Counter screen. page 2-64
Accessibility/ Magnifies the text and icons on the page 2-29

Standard screen. Select [Accessibility/
Standard] again to return to the
previous view.
Massage Board Displays the Message Board screen. page 8-27
NOTE
To use this function, set "Message
Board" to [ON] in System Menu.
Numeric Keypad Displays the numeric keys on the
—
touch panel.
Favorites Displays the favorite list screen. page 5-11
*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.

*2 Displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
2-19
Assigning Functions to Function Keys

Function keys are keys to which various functions and applications, including copy and scan, can be assigned.
Frequently used functions and applications can be assigned and the screen can easily be displayed.
For this machine, the following functions are pre-assigned; however, alternative functions can be registered by
re-assigning these functions.
• [F1] (Function key 1): Copy
• [F2] (Function key 2): Send
• [F3] (Function key 3): FAX (Option)

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]
NOTE

1 Select the function key to be set.
2 Select the function to be assigned.
Function Description Reference page
None No function has been assigned. —
Copy Displays the Copy screen. page 5-19
Send Displays the Send screen. page 5-23
Fax Server Displays the Fax Server screen. page 5-44
Fax*1 Displays the Fax screen. Refer to FAX

Operation
Guide.
Custom Box Displays the Custom Box screen. page 5-53
Job Box Displays the Job Box screen. page 4-18
USB Drive Displays the USB Drive screen. page 5-70
Fax Box*1 Displays the Fax Box screen. Refer to FAX

Operation
Polling Box*1 Displays the Polling Box screen. Guide.
Fax Memory RX Box*1 Displays the Fax Memory RX Box screen.
Send to Me (Email)*2 Displays the Send screen. The E-mail page 5-43
address of the logged-in user is set as the
destination.
Send to Me from Box Displays the Custom Box screen. The E- page 5-64
(Email)*2 mail address of the logged-in user is set as
the destination.
2-20
Function Description Reference page
Internet Browser Displays the Internet Browser screen. page 5-74
ID Card Copy Displays the ID Card Copy screen. page 6-34
Favorites Name Calls up the registered favorite. page 5-11
Application Name Displays the selected applications. page 5-14

*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
2-21
Display for Device Information

Shows device Information. It is possible to check the status of the system and network, the status of consumables such
as toner and paper and the situation of the options being used. It is also possible to print various reports and lists.
1 [Home] key > [Device Information]
2 Check the device Information.
Tab Description
Identification/Wired You can check ID information such as the model name, serial
Network number, host name and location, and the IP address of the
wired network.
Wi-Fi*1 You can check the status of Wi-Fi connection, such as the
device name, network name and IP address.
Supplies/Paper You can check the remaining amount of toner, and paper.
Fax*2 You can check the local fax number, local fax name, local fax
ID and other fax information.
USB/NFC/Bluetooth You can check the connection status of USB drive, NFC (Near
Field Communication) and Bluetooth keyboard.
Option/Application You can check information on the options and applications that
are used.
Capability/Software You can check the software version and performance.

Version
Security You can check the security information on the machine.
Report You can print various reports and lists.
Remote Ope. Status You can check the status of remote operation.
*1 Displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

2-22
Display Setting Screen

The following procedure is an example of the Copy screen.
1 Global Navigation
Displays the function categories.
3 2 Body
Display functions and shortcuts of
&RSLHV
copy.
4XLFN6HWXS
1 $XWR
(QHUJ\6DYHU 3 Arrow Button
2UJ3DSHU
)LQLVKLQJ
3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP Moves the screen up or down.
/D\RXW VLGHG!!
(GLW 1RUPDO ,QWHUUXSW
4 Right Pane Area
VLGHG
,PDJH4XDOLW\ 'HQVLW\ 'XSOH[ Displays specific functions such
5HVHW as preview or numeric keypad.
$GYDQFHG 2II 2II 3UHYLHZ 3URRI&RS\
6HWXS
2ULJLQDO
2 &RPELQH 6WDSOH3XQFK =RRP

3DSHU
6WRS
,'&DUG
&RS\ 1XPHULF
3UHYLHZ 6WDUW
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW .H\SDG
3 4
Select Global Navigation and configure each function. Select the Arrow Button to display the following functions.
&RSLHV
4XLFN6HWXS 2ULJLQDO6L]H
$XWR (QHUJ\6DYHU
2UJ3DSHU 3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ
)LQLVKLQJ $XWR
/D\RXW 0L[HG6L]H2ULJLQDOV ,QWHUUXSW
(GLW 2II
,PDJH4XDOLW\ 2ULJLQDO2ULHQWDWLRQ
7RS(GJHRQ7RS
5HVHW
$GYDQFHG )ROG
6HWXS 2II
&ROODWH2IIVHW
6WRS
&ROODWH2Q
6WDSOH3XQFK
2II 1XPHULF
3UHYLHZ 6WDUW
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW 3DSHU2XWSXW .H\SDG
When an On/Off Flipswitch is displayed for a function, select the switch to change between ON and OFF.
&RSLHV
4XLFN6HWXS =RRP
(QHUJ\6DYHU
2UJ3DSHU &RPELQH
)LQLVKLQJ 2II
/D\RXW 0DUJLQ&HQWHULQJ
: On
,QWHUUXSW
(GLW 2II
,PDJH4XDOLW\ %RUGHU(UDVH
6WDQGDUG
5HVHW
(UDVH6KDGRZHG$UHDV
$GYDQFHG
6HWXS : Off
%RRNOHW
6WRS
2II
'XSOH[
VLGHG!!VLGHG 1XPHULF
3UHYLHZ .H\SDG 6WDUW
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW &RYHU
2-23
Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set

Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a non-
selectable state.
Normal Grayed out Hidden
&RSLHV &RSLHV &RSLHV

4XLFN6HWXS 4XLFN6HWXS 4XLFN6HWXS
$XWR $XWR $XWR
(QHUJ\6DYHU (QHUJ\6DYHU (QHUJ\6DYHU
2UJ3DSHU 2UJ3DSHU 2UJ3DSHU

3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP )LQLVKLQJ 3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP 3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP
)LQLVKLQJ )LQLVKLQJ
/D\RXW 1RUPDO VLGHG!! ,QWHUUXSW /D\RXW 1RUPDO VLGHG!! ,QWHUUXSW /D\RXW 1RUPDO VLGHG!! ,QWHUUXSW
(GLW (GLW (GLW
VLGHG VLGHG VLGHG
,PDJH4XDOLW\ 'HQVLW\ 'XSOH[ ,PDJH4XDOLW\ 'HQVLW\ 'XSOH[ ,PDJH4XDOLW\ 'HQVLW\ 'XSOH[
5HVHW 5HVHW 5HVHW
$GYDQFHG 2II 2II $GYDQFHG 2II 2II $GYDQFHG 2II
6HWXS 6HWXS 6HWXS
&RPELQH 6WDSOH3XQFK 6WRS &RPELQH 6WDSOH3XQFK 6WRS &RPELQH 6WRS
,'&DUG ,'&DUG ,'&DUG

&RS\ 3UHYLHZ 1XPHULF &RS\ 1XPHULF &RS\ 1XPHULF
.H\SDG 6WDUW 3UHYLHZ 6WDUW 3UHYLHZ .H\SDG 6WDUW
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW )DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW .H\SDG )DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW
In the following cases, the key is Cannot be used because an option is

grayed out and cannot be selected. not installed.
• Cannot be used in combination with a
feature that is already selected.
• Use prohibited by user control.
• For functions that cannot be changed
when using proof copy.
NOTE
• If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this case, select
the [Reset] key and try again.
• If the key is still grayed out after the [Reset] key is selected, it is possible that you are prohibited from using the
function by user login administration. Check with the administrator of the machine.
Original Preview
You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.
NOTE
To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to the following:
Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details (page 5-56)
The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.

[Home] key > [Copy]
2 Place the originals.
2-24
3 Display a preview image.

1 Select [Preview] tab > [Preview].
&RSLHV
4XLFN6HWXS
$XWR
(QHUJ\6DYHU
2UJ3DSHU
3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP
)LQLVKLQJ
/D\RXW
1RUPDO VLGHG!! ,QWHUUXSW
(GLW
VLGHG
2
5HVHW
6HWXS
2ULJLQDO
&RPELQH 6WDSOH3XQFK =RRP 6WRS
3DSHU
,'&DUG
&RS\ 1 3UHYLHZ
1XPHULF
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW .H\SDG 6WDUW
The machine starts scanning the original. When scanning is completed, the preview image
appears on the panel.
1 Zoom out.
2 1 6 7
2 Zoom in.
3 &DQFHO -RE1DPHV GRF &RS\
3 Cancel the job.

=RRP,Q =RRP2XW -RE6HWWLQJV
(QHUJ\6DYHU
4 Displays the data

4 6L]H
'HQVLW\
&RORU
%LQGLQJ
$
1RUPDO
)XOO&RORU
information.
6LGH ,QWHUUXSW
5 Displays the current number

of pages and overall number
5HVHW
6WRS
of pages.
6 You can change the job
5 6WDUW
settings.
7 Start the copying.
Duplex Printing
Settings for duplex printing appear.
&DQFHO -RE1DPHV GRF &RS\

=RRP,Q =RRP2XW -RE6HWWLQJV
(QHUJ\6DYHU
6L]H $
'HQVLW\ 1RUPDO
&RORU )XOO&RORU
%LQGLQJ /HIW5LJKW
6LGH )URQW ,QWHUUXSW
5HVHW
6WRS
6WDUW
NOTE
• To change the quality or the layout, select [Cancel].
Change the settings and select [Preview] again to see a preview image with the new
settings.
• Depending on the function you are using, even if you scan a multi-page original, only
the first page can be previewed.
2 If there is no problem with the preview image, select [Copy].

Copying starts.
2-25
Using the Preview Screen

When the Preview screen is displayed, you can do the following by moving the finger that is touching the touch panel.
Function Description
Swipe If a document with multiple pages is placed on the Document Processor, then all of the
document is read and then the preview for the first page is displayed. Swipe the preview to
the left and right to display a preview of the pages in the order read.
Drag With the finger touching the touch panel, slide the finger to move the position of the
displayed preview.
Pinch in With two fingers touching the touch panel, widen or tighten the space between the two
Pinch out fingers to zoom in and out on the view.
Entering Numbers
When entering numbers, numeric keys appear on the touch panel if you select the area in which the number is entered.
2 1 11
3 10
4 9
5 6 7 8
1 Enter numbers.
2 Clear entered numbers.
3 Enters [-].
4 Insert a space.
5 Move to the next input box.
6 When [.] is displayed: Enters the decimal point. The numbers entered after selecting this key will be the numbers
after the decimal point.
When [*] is displayed: Enters [*].
7 When [+/-] is displayed: Switches between positive and negative numbers.
When [#] is displayed: Enters [#].
8 Close the numeric keypad.
9 Entry by numeric keys is confirmed.
10 Move the cursor.
11 Delete a character to the left of the cursor.
NOTE
• Depending on the item being entered, some of the keys other than the number keys may not be usable.
• Numeric keys do not appear on the touch panel if an optional numeric keypad is installed.
2-26
Example: When entering the number of copies
&RSLHV &RSLHV
4XLFN6HWXS 4XLFN6HWXS
$XWR $XWR
(QHUJ\6DYHU (QHUJ\6DYHU
2UJ3DSHU 2UJ3DSHU
3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP 3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP
)LQLVKLQJ )LQLVKLQJ
/D\RXW 1RUPDO VLGHG!! ,QWHUUXSW /D\RXW VLGHG!! ,QWHUUXSW
(GLW
1RUPDO
(GLW
VLGHG VLGHG
,PDJH4XDOLW\ 'HQVLW\ 'XSOH[ ,PDJH4XDOLW\ 'HQVLW\ 'XSOH[
5HVHW 5HVHW
$GYDQFHG 2II 2II $GYDQFHG 2II 2II
6HWXS
&RPELQH 6WDSOH3XQFK 6WRS 6WRS
,'&DUG
1XPHULF (QWHU
&RS\ 3UHYLHZ 6WDUW
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW .H\SDG 6WDUW
Example: When entering a one-touch key number
&DQFHO 6HDUFK1R 2.
'HVWLQDWLRQ 'HVWLQDWLRQ HVWLQDWLRQ

(QWHUGHVWLQDWLRQ (QHUJ\ (QWHU2QH7RXFKNH\QXPEHUXVLQJNH\V
(QHUJ\6DYHU
6DYHU
4XLFN6HWXS 'HVW
$GGUHVV%RRN 5HFDOO
+LVWRU\
2UJ6HQG
'DWD)RUPDW 2QH7RXFK'HVWLQDWLRQ
2QH7RXFK.H\ 6HDUFK1R
,PDJH4XDOLW\
5HVHW 5HVHW
$GYDQFHG
$XWR&RORU [GSL 3UHYLHZ 3UHYLHZ
6HWXS &RO*UD\
&RORU6HOHFWLRQ 6FDQ5HVROXWLRQ 2ULJLQDO
=RRP 6WRS 6WRS
6HQG
1RUPDO VLGHG
(QWHU
6KRUWFXW 'HQVLW\ VLGHG%RRN2ULJLQDO 6WDUW 6WDUW
)DYRULWHV
Example: When searching for an address number
&DQFHO $GGUHVV%RRN
6HDUFK &DQFHO $GGUHVV%RRN 2.

1R
$GG(GLW )LOWHU
6HDUFK HVWLQDWLRQ
1R
$GG(GLW )LOWHU
(QHUJ\6DYHU
1R 7\SH 1DPH $GGUHVV

5HVHW
3UHYLHZ
6WRS
(QWHU
6WDUW
NOTE
For copy and print screens, you can set numeric keys to be displayed in advance. In addition, you can select the
layout for numeric keys that are used on the application.
Numeric Keypad (page 8-6)
2-27
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.
Select [Help] on the Home screen to show the Help list.
1 [Home] key > [...] > [Help]
&RS\ 6HQG )D[ 6WDWXV 'HYLFH /DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV


(QHUJ\6DYHU
)D[/RJ )D[/RJ

&RS\ 6HQG 6WDQGDUG
)DYRULWHV
5HVHW
2 Select the items to check from the list.

+HOS 2SHUDWLRQVIRU+RPHVFUHHQ
([SODQDWLRQRI
%DVLF2SHUDWLRQV
%DVLF&RS\LQJ
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ (QHUJ\6DYHU
6HQGLQJD%DVLF)D[
6HQGLQJD%DVLF,QWHUQHW)D[
6HQG6FDQQHG2ULJLQDO6HQG7R)ROGHU
5HVHW
6HQG6FDQQHG2ULJLQDO6HQGDV(PDLO
%DVLF:6'6FDQQLQJ
6HOHFWLQJ'HVWLQDWLRQIURP$GGUHVV%RRN
&ORVH
1 Help titles
1 %DVLF&RS\LQJ &ORVH
3 2 Displays information about functions and
2SHQWKHSODWHQFRYHUDQGSODFHWKHVLGH
WREHFRSLHGIDFHGRZQRQWKHJODVVVXUIDFH machine operation.
3 Closes the Help screen and returns to the
original screen.5
2
3UHVV>&RS\@LQWKH+RPHVFUHHQWR
VZLWFKWRWKH&RS\VFUHHQ
2-28
Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View)

You can magnify the text and keys displayed on the touch panel. You can also select items and move to the next screen
using the numeric keys.
Select [Home] key > [...] > [Accessibility/Standard]
Large keys and text appear on the touch panel.
NOTE
• This function can be used on the Home screen and on the functions that were registered via Copy/Send/Fax Quick
Setup.
• To configure any functions that are not displayed on the Accessibility screen, you need to return to the original view.
Select [Accessibility/Standard] again.
• Long press the [Home] key to switch between the Standard screen and the Accessibility screen.
&RS\ 6HQG )D[ 6WDWXV 'HYLFH /DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV &RS\ 6HQG )D[ 6WDWXV 'HYLFH /DQJXDJH 3DSHU6HWWLQJV
-RE&DQFHO ,QIRUPDWLRQ -RE&DQFHO ,QIRUPDWLRQ

(QHUJ\6DYHU (QHUJ\6DYHU
)D[/RJ )D[/RJ

&RS\ 6HQG 6WDQGDUG
)DYRULWHV
5HVHW 5HVHW
You can also control the screen using the numeric key corresponding to the number in circle. (Example: Select the [2]
key on the numeric key pad to display the Send screen.)
Control the functions according to the display on the screen.
2-29
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Login/Logout
If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter
your login user name and login password.
NOTE
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator
privileges and change your login user name or login password.
Login
Normal login
1 Enter the login user name and login password to login.

If this screen is displayed during operations, enter the login user name and login password.
.H\ERDUG/RJLQ
(QWHUORJLQXVHUQDPHDQGSDVVZRUG
(QHUJ\6DYHU
1
/RJLQWR
/RFDO
/RJLQ
2 8VHU1DPH
3 3DVVZRUG
/RJLQ 5HVHW
2WKHU/RJLQ :L)L'LUHFW &KHFN&RXQWHU /DQJXDJH
4 5 6 7
1 If [Network Authentication] is selected as the user authentication method, authentication
destinations are displayed and either [Local] or [Network] can be selected as the
authentication destination.
2 Enter the login user name.
3 Enter the login password.
Character Entry Method (page 11-10)
4 Select the login method from [Simple login], [PIN code login] and [IC card login].
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)
5 Check the Wi-Fi Direct environment.
6 Refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned. Displayed when
job accounting is enabled.
7 Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
2-30
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
2 Select [Login].
Simple Login
6LPSOH/RJLQ.H\
6HOHFWWKHXVHUWRORJLQ 1R
(QHUJ\6DYHU
5HVHW
2WKHU/RJLQ :L)L'LUHFW
If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.
NOTE
If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.
Simple Login Settings (page 9-25)
Logout
8VHU 'HYLFH$GPLQ
&RS\ 6HQG )D[

/RJRXW
(QHUJ\6DYHU
5HVHW
To logout from the machine, select the [Logout] key to return to the login user name/login
password entry screen.
Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:
• When the machine enters the sleep state.
• When the auto panel reset function is activated.
2-31
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Default Settings of the Machine

The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu. Before using this machine, configure such settings
as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as needed.
NOTE
For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:
Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)
Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of
the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.
NOTE
• To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:
Date/Time (page 8-6)
• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.
Command Center RX User Guide

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Date/Time]

[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]
Item Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed
location from the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer
time, configure settings for summer time.
Date and Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine.
If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be
displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),
Hour (0 to 23), Minute (0 to 59), Second (0 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is
displayed in Western notation.
Value: MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year), DD/MM/YYYY (Day/
Month/Year), YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)
2-32
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Network Setup
Configuring the Wired Network
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),
TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings.
Connecting LAN Cable (page 2-8)
Configuration Method Description Reference Page
Configuring the Connection Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-
from the Operation Panel network in a wizard-style screen, without setting 48)
on This Machine individually in System menu.
Use Wired Network Settings or Optional Network to Wired Network Settings

configure the network in details from System menu. (page 8-58)
Optional Network (page 8-66)
Configuring Connections For the equipped network interface, the connection Command Center RX User
on the Web Page can be set by using Command Center RX. For the Guide
optional IB-50, the connection can be set by using IB-50 Operation Guide
the dedicated Web page.
Setting the Connection by This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-50. You IB-50 Operation Guide
Using the Setup Utility of can use it on Windows.
IB-50
NOTE
When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network
Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37, IB-38 or IB-51), select the desired setting on
"Primary Network (Client)".
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-70)
For other network settings, refer to the following:

Network Settings (page 8-53)
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges or
as a user with privileges to configure this setting.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login].
2-33
IPv4 setting

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wired
Network Settings] > "TCP/IP Setting" [IPv4 Settings]

When using DHCP server
• [DHCP]: Set to [On].
When setting the static IP address

• [DHCP]: Set to [Off].
• [Auto-IP]: Set to [Off].
• [IP Address]: Enter the address.
• [Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255).
• [Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
When using the Auto-IP

Enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
When setting the DNS server

In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server.
• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off".
• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.
Select [Use DNS Server from DHCP] or [Use following DNS Server]. When [Use following
DNS Server] is selected, you can enter static DNS server information in the Primary and
Secondary fields provided.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the
machine OFF and then ON.
NOTE
Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you
configure this setting.
2-34
Configuring the Wireless Network

When the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37, IB-38 or IB-51) is installed on the machine and the connection settings
are configured, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The configuration
methods are as follows:
Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring the Connection Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-
from the Operation Panel on network in a wizard-style screen, without setting 48)
This Machine individually in System menu.
Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-54)
the network in details from System menu. Wireless Network (page 8-66)
Setting the Connection by This is a tool that can be downloaded from our Setting the Connection by
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool website. You can configure the connection according Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
to the instructions provided by the wizard. (page 2-35)
Setting the Connection by This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-51. You IB-51 Operation Guide
Using the Setup Utility of can use it on both Windows and Mac OS.
IB-51
Configuring Connections on For the IB-37, IB-38, the connection can be set from Command Center RX User Guide
the Web Page the Command Center RX.
For the IB-51, the connection can be set on the IB-51 Operation Guide
dedicated Web page.
NOTE
• The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37, IB-38) is an option for some models and the Wireless Network Interface
Kit (IB-51) is a standard option. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for detail.
IB-37/IB-38 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)
IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-6)
• When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network
Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37, IB-38 or IB-51), select the desired setting on
"Primary Network (Client)".
Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device with
the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection (Wi-Fi Direct).
NOTE
• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [ON]) and Restart Network from
the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.
• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the
machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.
• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.
Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-54)
Wireless Network (page 8-66)
2-35
Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable
1 Connect the machine with a computer.

1 Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.
2 Turn on the computer.

IP addresses (link local addresses) of the machine and computer are generated
automatically.
2 Launch the Wi-Fi Setup Tool.

1 Launch a web browser.
2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" to the browser's address bar or location bar.
3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
2-36
5 Utility tab > "Wi-Fi Setup Tool"

The Wi-Fi Setup Tool will be downloaded.
6 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator
privileges.
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1 [Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]
2 [Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]
3 [Easy setup] > [Next]

The machine is detected.
NOTE
• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search
the machine.
• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or
[Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to
search the machine.
4 Select the machine > [Next]

5 Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user
name and password. Login user name and Password.
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: xxxxxxxxxx (Serial Number)
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)
6 Configure the communication settings > [Next]
7 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.
2-37
Wireless LAN Connection by Using Wi-Fi Direct

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct
Settings]

"Wi-Fi Direct": [On] > [Close]
3 Restart the network.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Restart
Network] > [Restart]
4 Connect a computer or a handheld device with the machine.

5 Launch the Wi-Fi Setup Tool.

2-38
5 Utility tab > "Wi-Fi Setup Tool"

The Wi-Fi Setup Tool will be downloaded.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator
privileges.
2-39

1 [Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]
2 [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]
3 [Advanced setup] > [Next]

Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or
host name to search the machine.
4 Select the machine > [Next]
5 Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user
name and password. Login user name and Password.
6 Configure the communication settings > [Next]
7 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.
2-40
Setting Wi-Fi Direct

Setting Wi-Fi Direct enables you to print from the Wi-Fi Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows:
NOTE
To use Wi-Fi Direct, Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) must be installed in the machine.
Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct

Settings]

"Wi-Fi Direct": [On] > [OK]

4 Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld

device.
If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].
The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct

Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.

Settings]


4 [Home] key > [Device Information] > [Wi-Fi]
5 Note the “Wi-Fi Direct” network name (SSID), IP address, and

password.
2-41
6 Configure the handheld device.

1 [Settings] > [Wi-Fi]
2 Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.
3 Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.
Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button

When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the
network using push button.

Settings]


4 [Home] key > [Device Information] > [Wi-Fi]
5 Press the push button on the computer or handheld device and

select "Wi-Fi Direct" [Push Button Setup] > [OK] on the screen
of operation panel.
The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.
IMPORTANT
You can connect up to ten handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices
that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the already-
connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows:
• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer
• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel
Select [Home] key > [Device Information] > [Wi-Fi] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Device] > [Disconnect] > [Disconnect]
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu
Wi-Fi Direct Settings (page 8-53)
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX
2-42
Configuring NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) is the internal standard for near field communication in which the data communication
distance is limited to approximately 10 cm. Establishing data communication simply requires you to show the handheld
device supporting NFC to this machine.
The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuring Connections on the Web Page

You can set NFC from the Command Center RX.
Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

Configure the NFC from the System Menu.
NFC (page 8-69)
This section presents an example for configuring the NFC from the System Menu.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Connectivity" [NFC]

"NFC": [On] > [OK]
2-43
Motion Sensor
This model detects that the person is approaching and recover from low power mode or sleep mode automatically.
The range of detection of the Motion Sensor can be switched using the lever on the front.
For more information on Motion Sensor settings, refer to the following:

2-44
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function
Energy Saver function

If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Low Power Mode to
reduce power consumption. If a further period of time elapses without the machine being used, the machine
automatically enters sleep mode, which minimizes power consumption.
Low Power Mode

If the machine is not operated for a certain period of time, the energy saver indicator will light up and the screen will
become dark to reduce power consumption. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode. In the Low Power Mode, the
touch panel turns off and the Energy Saver indicator lights up.
The amount of time before entering Low Power Mode: 3 minutes (default setting).
If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax
data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform one of the following actions.
• Select any key on the operation panel.
• Touch the touch panel.
• Place originals in the document processor.
• Open the document processor.
Recovery time from Low Power Mode is as follows.
• 14.4 seconds or less
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
NOTE
If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.
2-45
Sleep
To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save
a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator, and then the Energy Saver indicator is flashing. This
status is referred to as Sleep.
Energy Saver indicator
If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax data arrives
while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
When Using the Machine

Automatically wakes up when someone approaches the machine while the Motion Sensor is being used.
For more information on Motion Sensor settings, refer to the following:
If the Motion Sensor is not being used, perform one of the following actions.
• Select any key on the operation panel.
• Touch the touch panel.
• Place originals in the document processor.
• Open the document processor.
Recovery time from Sleep Mode is as follows.
• 14.4 seconds or less
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.
The amount of time before entering Sleep is as follows.
• 10 minutes (default setting)
To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-48)
NOTE
If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.
Sleep Rules (models for Europe)

You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function. When the machine enters sleep mode, the ID card cannot
be recognized.
For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-7)
2-46
Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for

Europe)
This mode reduces power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be set
separately for each function. Printing from a computer connected with a USB cable is not available while the machine is
asleep. The time required for the machine to wake up from power save mode and resume normal operation will be
longer than for normal Sleep Mode.
NOTE
If the optional network interface kit is installed, Energy Saver cannot be specified.
For more information on Sleep Level (Home) Mode settings, refer to the following:
Energy Saver Recovery Level

This machine can reduce power consumption when recovering from Energy Saver Mode.
For EnergySaver RecoveryLevel, "Full Recovery" or "Normal Recovery" can be selected.
The factory default is "Normal Recovery".
For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to the following:
Energy Saver Recovery Level (page 8-9)
Weekly Timer Settings

Set the machine to automatically sleep and wake up at times specified for each day.
For more information on Weekly Timer Settings, refer to the following:
Weekly Timer Settings (page 8-8)
Power Off Timer (models for Europe)

If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off. The Power Off Timer is used to set the
time until the power turns off.
The factory setting for the time until the power turns off: 3 days
2-47
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
Quick Setup Wizard

The following settings can be configured in a wizard-style screen.
Fax Setup Configures basic fax settings. This function is displayed when the optional FAX Kit
is installed.
FAX Operation Guide
Dialing/RX Mode Dialing Mode (Port 1, Port 2*1)*2

Reception Mode
Auto (DRD)*3
Local Fax Information Local Fax Name (Fax Port 1, Fax Port 2*1)
Local Fax Number (Fax Port 1, Fax Port 2*1)
Local Fax ID
TTI
Volume Fax Speaker Volume

Fax Monitor Volume
Job Finish
Rings Rings (Normal)*4

Rings (TAD)*4
Rings (Fax/Phone)*4
Paper Source/Output Paper Source Settings

Fax Port 1
Fax Port 2*1
Redial Retry Times
Show Power Off Show Power Off Message —

Message
Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode and low power mode.
Sleep Mode For Europe

Sleep Timer
Sleep Rules
Except for Europe
Sleep Timer
Sleep Level
Low Power Mode Low Power Timer
Recovery Mode Energy Saver Recovery Level
Weekly Timer Weekly Timer Settings

Schedule*5
Retry*5
Retry Times*5
Retry Interval*5
2-48
Network Setup Configures network settings.
Network Network Selection*6

Wi-Fi*7
DHCP*8
IP Address*9
Subnet Mask*9
Default Gateway*9
Email Setup Set SMTP server name and sender address to enable mail sending.
Email SMTP (Email TX)

SMTP Server Name*10
SMTP Port Number*10
Sender Address*10
Security Setup Specify the security level.
Security Quick Setup
*1 This is displayed when the option of two FAX Kits has been installed.
*2 Inch version only.
*3 DRD reception mode is available for some countries.
*4 This setting does not appear in some regions.
*5 This function is displayed when [Weekly Timer] is set to [On].
*6 This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) is installed.
*7 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wi-Fi].
*8 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wired Network].
*9 This function is displayed when [DHCP] is set to [Off].
*10 This function is displayed when [SMTP (Email TX)] is set to [On].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Quick Setup Wizard]
2 Select a function.

Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.
NOTE
If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to the following:
Help Screen (page 2-28)
Control Description
End Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.
Previous Returns to the previous item.
2-49
Control Description
Skip Advances to the next item without setting the current item.
Next Advances to the next screen.
Back Returns to the previous screen.
Complete Register the settings and exit the wizard.
2-50
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software
To use printer function, TWAIN/WIA connection, or network fax function, download and install prerequisite softwares
from our website (https://kyocera.info/).
Published Software (Windows)

Recommended
Software Description
software
KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.

Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are
supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full
advantage of the features of the machine.
Use this driver to create PDF files.
KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini- This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There -
driver are some restrictions on the machine features and option features
that can be used with this driver.
FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer -

software application as a fax via the machine.
TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN-
compliant software application.
WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that -

enables reciprocal communication between an imaging device such
as a scanner and an image processing software application. An
image can be acquired using a WIA-compliant software application,
which is convenient when a TWAIN-compliant software application is
not installed in the computer.
KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the -
network.
Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an
ongoing reporting function.
File Management Utility This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document to a -
specified network folder.
KYOCERA Net Direct Print This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe -
Acrobat/Reader.
FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be
used in a software application.
Wi-Fi Setup Tool This is a tool for wireless network (wireless LAN) configuration of this -
machine.
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for This is a tool to create a shared folder in personal computers and set -
SMB the shared folder as a destination.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
2-51
Installing Software in Windows

Downloading and installing from the website
Download and install a software from our website.
1 Download a software from the website.

2-52
5 Driver tab or Utility tab > of the software you want to download
An installer of the selected software will be downloaded.

Follow the guidance on the screen to install the software.
NOTE
Using the web installer

Install a software by using a web installer downloaded from our website.

2-53
5 Click "Web installer" .

A web installer will be downloaded.
NOTE
2-54

1 Read the license agreement.
1
2 Click [Accept] if there is no
problem.
4 Click [Install].
5 Select a model and click [Next].
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable.
• If a desired device is not displayed, select [Add custom device] to directly select the
device you want to use.
2-55
6 Install the softwares.

1 Select softwares you want to install.
NOTE
Softwares recommended to install have in their checkboxes by default. Configure
them as needed.
2
2 Click [Install].
When [Install] is clicked, a screen which asks for cooperation for data collection may
appear. Select one of the answer choices and click [OK].
NOTE
• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
• To install Status Monitor for Windows 8.1, it is necessary to install Microsoft.NET
Framework 4.0 beforehand.
7 Finish the installation.
Click [Next] > [Finish] to finish the installation wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-61)
2-56
Uninstalling the Software

Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.
NOTE
Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

Click Search box in taskbar, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in the search box.
Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.
NOTE
In Windows 8.1, click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in
the search box. Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.
2 Uninstall the software.

Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.
3 Finish uninstalling.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the software uninstallation procedure.
NOTE
The software can also be uninstalled using Web Installer. In the screen of Web Installer,
click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software.
2-57
Installing Software in Mac Computer

Printer driver for Macintosh can be installed.
NOTE
• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].
Printer (page 8-47)
• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.
Bonjour (page 8-64)
• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.

2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" into the address bar.
2-58
5 Driver tab > "Mac Printer Driver(x.x and later)"

An installer of the selected software will be downloaded.
2 Install the Printer Driver.

Double click to launch the downloaded installer.
Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.
This completes the printer driver installation.
If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.
If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.
2-59
3 Configure the printer.

1 Open System Preferences and add the printer.
1
2
2 Select [Default] and click the item that appears in "Name" and then select the driver in
"Use".
3
4
3 The selected machine is added.
NOTE
When using an IP connection, click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the
host name or IP address. The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in
"Name". Change if needed.
4 Select the printer added newly, and click the [Options & Supplies...] to select the options
equipped with the machine.
1
2
3
2-60
Setting TWAIN Driver

Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1 Click Search box in taskbar, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list.
NOTE
In Windows 8.1, Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the
search box. Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list.
2 Click [Add].
2 Configure TWAIN Driver.
1
2 4
3
6
1 Enter the machine name.
2 Select this machine from the list.
3 Enter the machine's IP address or host name.
4 Set units of measurement.
5 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
6 Click [OK].
NOTE
When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.
2-61
3 Finish registering.
NOTE
Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.
2-62
Setting WIA Driver

Register this machine to the WIA Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1 Click Search box in taskbar, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box.
Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras
screen appears.
NOTE
In Windows 8.1, click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the
search box. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].
1
2
2 Configure WIA Driver.
1
2
3
4
1 Click the [Settings] tab.

2 Enter the machine IP addresses or host name.
3 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
4 Set units of measurement.
5 Click [OK].
2-63
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter
Checking the Counter

Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.

[Home] key > [...] > [Counter]
2 Check the counter.
2-64
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Additional Preparations for the Administrator

In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and
configure the settings as needed.
Sending Documents to a PC
To Send to a Shared Folder (Send to Folder (SMB))
To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a shared folder to receive the document on your
computer.
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-24)
To E-mail Scanned Images (Send as E-mail)

You can send a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
E-mail Settings (page 2-71)
Strengthening the Security

This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with
Administrator rights. Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login
user name and password.
In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this
machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)
NOTE
Protection of confidential information by TPM
This product is equipped with the security chip called TPM (Trusted Platform Module). The encryption key used to
encrypt confidential information on this machine is stored in a dedicated storage area on the TPM chip. Since this
storage area cannot be read from outside the TPM, confidential information can be safely protected.
I want to... Function Reference page
Restrict the users of the machine. User Login page 9-2
Authentication Security page 9-4
Auto Panel Reset page 8-7
ID Card Settings*1 page 9-28
Restrict the basic functions that can be Local Authorization page 9-16
used.
Group Authorization Set. page 9-18
Guest Authorization Set. page 9-20
Prevent another user from handling the Custom Box page 5-53
documents stored in the machine.
Output the document stored in the Remote Printing page 8-49

machine at the time when user operates
the device via operation panel.
2-65
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
I want to... Function Reference page
Prevent the data stored in the machine Data Overwrite*2 Refer to the
from being leaked. Data
Encryption*2 Encryption/
Overwrite
Operation
Guide.
PDF Encryption Functions page 6-77
Completely delete the data on the machine Data Sanitization page 8-74
before disposing of the machine.
Record the operation history of users. Login History Settings page 8-29
Device Log History Settings page 8-30
Secure Comm. Error Log page 8-31
Protect the transmission from interception IPP over SSL page 8-61
and wiretapping.
HTTPS page 8-62
LDAP Security Refer to the

Command
Center RX User
Guide.
SMTP Security page 8-40
POP3 Security page 8-40
FTP Encrypted TX page 6-84
Enhanced WSD (SSL) page 8-62
IPSec page 8-65
SNMPv3 page 8-62
Verify the software in the machine. Software Verification page 8-72
*1 The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.

*2 It is necessary to activate the Data Security Function.
2-66
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Command Center RX
If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX.
This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click [Login].
Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,
Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator
privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.
Administ- General
Setting Description
rator User
Device The machine's structure can be checked.

Information/
Remote
Operation
Job Status Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing
jobs, scheduled jobs, and job log history.
*1
Document Box Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a document
box.
*1
Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups.
Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. ―
Function Configure the advanced function settings. ―

Settings
Network Configure the network advanced settings. ―

Settings
Security Configure the security advanced settings. ―

Settings
Management Configure the advanced management settings. ―

Settings
*1 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.
NOTE
The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.
FAX Operation Guide
2-67
Accessing Command Center RX

1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
Examples: https://10.180.81.3/ (for IP address)
https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well
as their current status.
NOTE
If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,
configure the certificate.
You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.
2 Configure the function.

Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and
Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user
to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation
menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown
below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
2-68
Changing Security Settings

3 Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.
(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page 1-i)
4 Click [Security Settings].
2 Configure the Security Settings.

From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.
NOTE
For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:
2-69
Changing Device Information

4 From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].
2 Specify the host name.

Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings]
menu, and then click [Restart Network] in "Restart".
2-70
E-mail Settings
By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and
to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
In addition, configure the following.
• SMTP settings
Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"
• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails
Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"
• The setting to limit the size of E-mails
Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

Display the SMTP Protocol screen.
2-71
4 From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].

Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".
2-72

Display the E-mail Settings screen.
From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].

Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.
Setting Description
SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.
SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP Protocol" is set to
[On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and set the SMTP protocol to [On].
SMTP Server Name*1 Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port number is 25.
SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for authentication.
Protocol
SMTP Security Set SMTP security.

Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the
[Protocol Settings] page.
Connection Test Tests to confirm that the E-mail function is operating under the settings without
sending a mail.
Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter the domain names of
addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can also be specified by e-mail
address.
2-73
Setting Description
POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only enable the function of
sending e-mail from the machine. Set the following items if you want to enable
Check Interval the function of receiving e-mail on the machine.
Run once now Command Center RX User Guide
Domain Restriction
POP3 User Settings
E-mail E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When E-mail
Send size is greater than this value, an error message appears and E-mail sending is
Settings cancelled. Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If
not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending regardless of the size
limit.
Sender Address*1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails, such as the
machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 256
characters.
Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of
the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The
maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.
Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Default Settings] page.
*1 Be sure to enter the items.
5 Click [Submit].
2-74
Registering Destinations
4 From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].
3
1
2
5 Click [Add].
2 Populate the fields.

1 Enter the destination information.
Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the
same as when registering via operation panel.
Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-38)
2 Click [Submit].
2-75

3 From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].
3
1
2
4 Click [Add].
2 Configure the Custom Box.

1 Enter the box details.
Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. For details on the fields to
populate, refer to the following:
2 Click [Submit].
2-76
Printing a Document Stored in a Custom Box

3 From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].
1
2
3
4 Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document you wish to print.

Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.
2 Click [Print].
3 Configure settings for printing, click [Print].
2-77
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
Transferring Data from Our Other Products

By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.
This section explains how to transfer data between our products.
Migrating the Address Book

The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the KYOCERA Net Viewer
downloaded from our website.
For details on operating the KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following:
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
Backing Up Address Book Data to PC
1 Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.
2 Create a backup.
1 Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and
select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
2 Select [Custom mode] and click [Next].
2-78
3 Select destination device group and click [Next].
4 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
5 Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on
target device], and then click [Next].
2-79
6 Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].
NOTE
If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and
then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters
are distinguished (case sensitive)).
7 Click on [Save to file].
8 Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].
For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".
2-80
9 After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.
Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.
Writing Address Book Data to the Machine
1 Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.
2 Load the Address Book data.

1 Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select
[Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
2 Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
2-81
3 Select destination device group and click [Next].
4 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
5 Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target
device], and then click [Next].
Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's
Address Book from entry No.1.
2-82
6 Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].
7 Click [Finish].
The write process of the Address Book data starts.
8 Once the write process is complete, click [Close].
2-83
3 Preparation before Use
This chapter explains the following operations.
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................................................ 3-3
Loading in Cassette 1 .............................................................................................................................. 3-4
Loading in Cassette 2 .............................................................................................................................. 3-7
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes ................................................................................ 3-10
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder ................................................................................................... 3-14
Loading in the Side Feeder .................................................................................................................... 3-16
Loading in the Inserter ........................................................................................................................... 3-18
Precautions for Outputting Paper ..................................................................................................................... 3-19
Paper Stopper ........................................................................................................................................ 3-19
Envelope Stack Guide ........................................................................................................................... 3-19
Stack Level Adjuster .............................................................................................................................. 3-20
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ................................................................................................. 3-22
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) ......................................................................................... 3-23
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................................................... 3-24
Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full Computer Name ......................................................... 3-24
Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name ........................................................................... 3-24
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-25
Configuring Windows Firewall ............................................................................................................... 3-29
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB ........................................................................................................ 3-33
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-38
Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-38
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ............................................................................................... 3-45
3-1
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading Paper
Precaution for Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.

In addition, note the following points.
• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded
may cause a jam.
• Avoid exposing opened paper to high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.
Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multipurpose tray or cassettes back in the
paper storage bag.
• Leaving paper in the cassette for a long time may cause a discoloration of paper by heat
from the cassette heater.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by
removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is
stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image
quality.
NOTE
If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like
logo or company name, refer to the following:
Paper (page 11-13)
3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units

Select the paper feeder units according to the size and type of paper.
1
2
3
6
5 4
7
No. Name Paper Size Paper Type Capacity Page
1 Cassette 1 A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Plain, Rough, 500 sheets page 3-4
216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Vellum, Recycled, (80 g/m2)
Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, Preprinted, Bond,
16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Cardstock, Color,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Prepunched,
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Letterhead,
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return Envelope, Thick,
postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 4 Custom 1 to 8
2 Cassette 2 A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R,

B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger,
3 Cassette 3 Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
4 Cassette 4 Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,
16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku
hagaki (Return postcard), Kakugata 2,
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom 1
to 4
5 Cassette 3 A4, Letter, B5 (Fixed to one of sizes.) Plain, Rough, 1,500 sheets page 3-14
Vellum, Recycled, (80 g/m2)
6 Cassette 4 Preprinted, Bond,
7 Cassette 5 Color, Prepunched, 3,000 sheets page 3-16
Letterhead, Thick, (80 g/m2)
High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.
• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper
jams or other faults.)
• For higher quality color printing, use special color paper.
3-3
Loading in Cassette 1
Load the paper in Cassette. The procedures here represent the Cassette 1.
1 Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
NOTE
Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.
2 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
NOTE
When using Legal size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it
down.
3-4
3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left
and right sides of the cassette.
4 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
cassette.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
5 Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely
against the paper.
If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
3-5
6 Gently push the cassette back in.
7 Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Setting] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette 1]

Select the paper size and paper type.
Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings (page 8-13)
NOTE
Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.
3-6
Loading in Cassette 2
NOTE
NOTE
When using 12×18" size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it
down.
3-7
3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left
and right sides of the cassette.
NOTE
When using SRA3/12×18", A3, or Ledger paper, adjust the auxiliary guide accordingly.
4 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
cassette.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
3-8
against the paper.



Select the paper size and paper type.
NOTE
Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.
3-9
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes

Load envelope or cardstock in the cassettes. Here, we'll explain the procedures for cassette 1, as an example.
1 Pull Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.
NOTE
2 Remove the envelope feed guide.

When loading cardstock, go to step 5.
3 Expand the lever of the envelope feed guide when loading

envelopes larger than Envelope C5 which has a width of
162 mm (6.4").
3-10
4 Attach the envelope feed guide as shown in the illustration.

The illustration below shows that the lever of the envelope feed guide is expanded.
6 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the

left and right sides of the cassette.
3-11
7 Load the envelope with the print side facing up.

Example: When printing the address.
IMPORTANT
• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of
envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the
wrong direction or on the wrong face.
• Ensure that loaded envelopes do not exceed the level indicator.
NOTE
Approximately 100 post cards or 30 envelopes can be set.
against the paper.
3-12
9 Gently push Cassette 1 back in.


Select the paper size and type of envelope.
12 Set by using the printer driver on the PC.

Select the paper size and type of envelope using the printer driver on the PC.
Printing on Standard Sized Paper (page 4-4)

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)
3-13
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder

The procedures here represent the cassette 3.
2 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
cassette.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.
3-14



Select the paper type.
3-15
Loading in the Side Feeder
2 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing down.
cassette.
3-16



Select the paper type.
3-17
Loading in the Inserter

No.
Item Paper Size Paper Type
Sheets
Inserter Tray A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5R, B5, Folio, SRA3, Plain, Thin, recycled, Preprint, 250
1 Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement, Bond, Color, Prepunched, sheets
12×18", Executive, Oficio II, 8K,16K, 16K-R, ISO Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, (64 g/m2)
Inserter Tray B5, custom1~4 (148 × 210~320 × 457 mm) Custom 1 to 8
2
NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.
• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper
jams or other faults.)
Load paper in the inserter tray. Here, the inserter tray 1 is used as an example.
1 Adjust the inserter tray size.
2 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the surface side facing up.
• Paper loading method when Booklet setting is set, refer to the following:
Booklet (page 6-47)
cassette.
Upper: Plain paper Lower: Thick paper
3-18
Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper
Precautions for Outputting Paper

Paper Stopper
When using paper A3/Ledger or larger, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.
NOTE
When using the Job Separator for output, you can if needed open the paper stopper on the Job Separator.
Envelope Stack Guide

To use an envelope, open the Envelope Stack Guide as shown below.
3-19
Stack Level Adjuster

If the paper output is significantly curled, you can extend the Stack Level Adjuster as described in the figure.
Job Separator Tray

Extending the Stack Level Adjuster
Restoring the Stack Level Adjuster
3-20
Inner Shift Tray

Extending the Stack Level Adjuster
Restoring the Stack Level Adjuster
3-21
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher)

In case of ejecting number of sets exceeding the storage limit in the folding unit, detach the folding tray.
NOTE
Refer to the following for maximum number for storage of folding unit.
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) (page 11-32)
In case of ejecting to the folding tray
In case of ejecting more than the limit of the folding tray
3-22
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher)

In case of ejecting nunmber of sets exceeding the storage limit in the folding unit, store them in the sub tray.
NOTE
Refer to the following for maximum number for storage of folding unit.
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) (page 11-33)
In case of ejecting to the folding tray
In case of ejecting more than the limit of the folding tray
3-23
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Preparation for Sending a Document to a

Shared Folder in a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 10 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other
versions of Windows.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full

Computer Name
Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.

Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],
[System and Security], and [System].
NOTE
In Windows 8.1, right-click [PC] in the Start screen and select [Properties]. Or, right-click
the Window icon and select [System].
2 Check the computer name.
Check the computer name and full computer name.

Screen example:
Computer name: PC001
Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com
After checking the computer name, click the [Close] button to close the "System"
screen.
Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name

Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.

Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows System] and [Command
Prompt].
In Windows 8.1, click [Search] in charms, and enter "Command Prompt" in the search box.
Select [Command Prompt] in the search list.
The Command Prompt window appears.
3-24
2 Check the domain name and user name.

At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].
Check the user name and domain name.

Screen example:
User Name: PC0270
Domain Name: PC0270
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared

Folder
Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.
NOTE
If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or
group.
1 Open up a window in File Explorer and select [View], [Options], and then [Folder
Options].
In Windows 8.1, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel],
[Appearance and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
1 Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.
3
Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced
settings".
3-25
1 Create a folder.
Create a folder on your computer.
For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.
2 Configure permission settings.

1 Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, select [Property], and click [Sharing] and
[Advanced Sharing].
2 Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.
3 Make a note of the [Share name].
3-26
4 Click the [Add] button.
5 Specify the location.
1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page 3-24 is the same as the domain
name:
If the computer name is not shown in "From this location", click the [Locations] button,
select the computer name, and click the [OK] button.
Example: PC001
If the computer name that you made a note of on page 3-24 is not the same as the
domain name:
If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does
not appear in "From this location", click the [Locations] button, select the text after the
dot (.), and click the [OK] button.
Example: abcdnet.com
Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name (page 3-24)
2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK]
button.
Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a
user.
3-27
6 Set the access permission for the user selected.
1 Select the user you entered.

2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of the
1 "Change" and "Read" permissions
3 Press [OK].
NOTE
"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen
security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow]
checkmark.
7 Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.
8 Check the details set in the [Security] tab.
1 Select the [Security] tab.

1
2 Select the user you entered.
If the user does not appear on "Group or
2 user names", click [Edit] button to add user
in a similar way of "configuration of
permission settings".
3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on
[Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and
"Read & execute" permissions.
3 4 Click the [Close] button.
3-28
Configuring Windows Firewall

Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
1 Check file and printer sharing.

1 Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],
[System and Security], and [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].
NOTE
• In Windows 8.1, in charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and
Security], and then [Windows Firewall].
• If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
2 Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.
3-29
2 Add a port.
[System and Security], and [Check firewall status].
2 Select [Advanced settings].
3 Select [Inbound Rules].
4 Select [New Rules].
3-30
5 Select [Port].
6 Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter
"445" then click [Next].
7 Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button.
3-31
8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.
9 Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].
In Windows 8.1
1 In Windows 8.1, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel],
[System and Security], and then [Windows Firewall].
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-29)
3-32
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB

An environment for sending a document to Windows can be set up smoothly by using the Scan to Folder Setup Tool for
SMB downloaded from our website.
By operating the Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB, you can configure the following settings.
• Create a shared folder in a PC for receiving documents
A new folder can be easily created on the desktop. Also, the newly created folder is automatically set as a shared folder.
• Set the created shared folder as an address on this machine
Information about such things as the name of the computer and shared names for the shared folder is easily
recorded in the address book of this machine with a sequence of actions. Can also be registered on the One Touch
Keys.
NOTE
• Log in to Windows with administrator privileges.
• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges or as a user with execution authority.

3-33
5 Utility tab > "Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB"

Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB will be downloaded.
6 Double click to launch the downloaded installer.
3-34

1 Select the device to use and click [Next].
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network cable and that it is
turned on and click [ Refresh].
• If user administration is valid on this machine, the user authentication screen appears.
Log in with administrator privileges or as a user with execution authority.
The address book of the device appears.
2 Select [Add].
NOTE
• Clicking on [Edit] after selecting the registered address allows you to change the
content of the registration.
• Unchecking the [Show fax-capable addresses] check-box will hide the address
containing the fax.
3-35
3 Create a new folder.
Select "Create a new folder on the desktop" and click [OK] to create a new folder on the
desktop. (The default folder name is "Scan".)
NOTE
• Click [Edit] to change the desktop folder name.
• Selecting [Select an existing folder and address] allows you to select an existing
folder that is already set as a shared folder on the PC.
4 Enter the information requested to register the address.
2
3
4
5
1 Enter the name for display in the address book.

2 Display the folder name and path to the shared folder.
3 Shared folders can be selected from a PC on the network.
4 Display the user name of the selected PC.
5 Enter the password corresponds to the log in user name of the selected PC.
5 Click [OK] to register the address to the address book.
6 Click [Close].
7 To register the registered address in a One Touch key, click [Yes].
3-36
8 Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination, and click [Submit].
9 Click [Close].
10Click [Finish] to exit the Scan to Folder Setup Tool.
3-37
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering Destinations in the Address

Book
Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed.
The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (Only on products with the fax
function installed).
NOTE
• Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-75)
• Editing of the Address Book and One Touch Keys can be restricted to administrators.
Adding a Destination (Address Book)

Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a
group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
NOTE
If registering and editing of the Address Book is restricted to administrators, you can edit the Address Book by logging
in with administrator privileges.
Registering a contact address

A maximum of 2,000 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as
destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (Only on products with the
fax function installed).

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit
Machine Address Book] > [Add] > [Contact]
2 Add the name.

1 Enter the destination name to be displayed on the Address Book.
NOTE
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
3-38
2 Enter an address number.

To have the number assigned automatically, select [Auto].
NOTE
Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of
2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when
you select [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set [Auto] (0000) as the
address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
3 Add the address.

Select the address type icon.
: Email Address
: Folder (SMB) Address
: Folder (FTP) Address
: Fax
: iFax Address
NOTE
Refer to the following for details on adding FAX and i-FAX address.
FAX Operation Guide
E-mail Address
Select the entry field, and enter the E-mail address.
NOTE
The Folder (SMB) Address

• To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select [Search Folder from Network] or
[Search Folder by Host Name].
If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for
a destination.
If you selected [Search Folder by Host Name], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup",
and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.
A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you
want to specify in the screen that appears, and select [OK]. The login user name and login
password entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the
shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [OK]. The
address of the selected shared folder is set.
Select the folder from the Search Results list.
3-39
• To directly specify the SMB folder, enter the "Host name," "Port," "Folder Path," "Login User
Name" and "Login Password."
NOTE
For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the
information that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating
shared folders, refer to the following:
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-24)
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Item Description
Host Name*1 Computer name
Port Port number

If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 445.
Folder Path Share name

For example: scannerdata
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
share name\folder name in shared folder
Login User Name*2 • If the computer name and domain name are the same:
User Name
For example: james.smith
• If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Login Password Windows logon password

(Case sensitive.)
*1 "Host name" or "IP address"

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])
*2 When sending a document through an optional network interface (IB-50 or IB-51), "\"
cannot be used. If the computer name is different from the domain name, login user
name needs to be input by using "@."
(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)
3-40
NOTE
• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
• Select [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the
connection fails, check the entries you made.
The Folder (FTP) Address

Enter "Host Name", "Port", "Folder Path", "Login User Name" and "Login Password".
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Item Descriptions
Host Name*1 Host name or IP address of FTP server
Port Port number

If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 21.
Folder Path*2 Path for the file to be stored

For example: User\ScanData
If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
Login User Name FTP server login user name
Login Password FTP server login password
*1 "Host name" or "IP address"

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])
*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is
combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.
NOTE
• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
• Select [Connection Test] or [Connection Test (Encrypted TX)] to check the connection
to the FTP server you chose. If the connection fails, check the entries you made.
4 Check if the destination entry is correct > [Register]

The destination is added to the Address Book.
To add a new address to the One Touch Key, select [Register] and follow the on-screen
instructions to enter the necessary information.
NOTE
Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 3-45)
3-41
Add the group

Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a
group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE
To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed
before proceeding. Up to 100 destinations for the E-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, 100 destinations for the i-FAX,
and a total of 10 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per group.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit
Machine Address Book] > [Add] > [Group]
2 Add the name.

1 Enter an address number.
To have the number assigned automatically, select [Auto].
NOTE
• Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of
2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears
when you select [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set [Auto] (0000)
as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
2 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book.
NOTE
3 Select the destinations.

Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group. Put a checkmark in the checkbox to select
an item and remove the checkmark to cancel the selection.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-50)
4 Check if the group entry is correct > [Save]

The group is added to the Address Book.
To add a new address to the One Touch Key, select [Register] and follow the on-screen
instructions to enter the necessary information.
NOTE
Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key.
3-42
Editing Address Book Entries

Edit the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1 [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit
Machine Address Book]
2 Select [ ] (information icon) for the destination or group to edit.
NOTE
Destination Search (page 5-48)
2 Edit the destination.

Editing a Contact
1 Change "Name", "Address Number" and destination type and address.

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-38)
2 [Save] > [OK]

Register the changed destination.
Editing a destination to a group
1 Change "Name" and "Address Number".

Add the group (page 3-42)
2 Change the destination. Put a checkmark in the checkbox to select an item and remove the
checkmark to cancel the selection.
3 [Save] > [OK]

Register the changed destination.
3-43
Deleting Address Book Entries

Delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1 [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit
Machine Address Book]
2 Select a destination or group to delete.
NOTE
2 [Delete] > [Delete]

Delete the contact or group.
3-44
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key

Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key.
NOTE
• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.
Specifying Destination (page 5-47)
• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Command Center RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-75)
• If registering and editing of the One Touch Keys is restricted to administrators, you can edit the One Touch Keys by
logging in with administrator privileges.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key] > [Add/Edit
One Touch Key]
2 Add One Touch Keys.

1 Select a One Touch Key number for the destination > [Add/Edit]
Enter a number in "Search (No.)" and select [ ] (search icon) to display that One Touch
Key.
Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.
2 2QH7RXFK.H\ &ORVH
6HDUFK
1R
$GG(GLW 'HOHWH
2 Enter the One Touch Key name displayed in the send base screen.
NOTE
3 Select [Destination].
The Address Book appears.
4 Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number > [OK]
Selecting [ ] (information icon) shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
NOTE
3-45
5 Select [OK].
The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
Editing One Touch Key

1 [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key] > [Add/
Edit One Touch Key]
2 Select a One Touch Key number to edit.

Key.
NOTE
Select [ ] (information icon) for the One Touch Key to display the information registered
in the One Touch Key.
2 Change the Registered Information.

1 Change "Display Name".
NOTE
2 Select [Destination], and select a new destination (contact or group). Selecting [ ]

(information icon) shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
NOTE
3 [OK] > [OK]

Add the destination to the One Touch Key.
Deleting the Destination to the One Touch Key

1 [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key] > [Add/
Edit One Touch Key]
2 Select a One Touch Key number to delete.

Key.
2 Delete the Registered Information.

[Delete] > [Delete]
The data registered in the One Touch Key is deleted.
3-46
4 Printing from PC
This chapter explains the following topics:
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ................................................................................................................... 4-2
Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................................................ 4-3
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 10) .................................................................... 4-3
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ........................................................................................................... 4-4
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-6
Banner Printing ........................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Canceling Printing from a Computer ...................................................................................................... 4-15
Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing by Universal Print ..................................................................................................................... 4-16
Printing by Mopria .................................................................................................................................. 4-16
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ....................................................................................................................... 4-17
Printing with NFC ................................................................................................................................... 4-17
Printing Data Saved in the Printer .................................................................................................................... 4-18
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job .............................................................. 4-18
Printing Documents from Private Print Box ........................................................................................... 4-19
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ....................................................................... 4-19
Printing Document from Stored Job Box ............................................................................................... 4-20
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ......................................................................... 4-20
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 4-21
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ........................................................................ 4-21
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 4-22
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box ................................................................... 4-22
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ................................................................................................. 4-23
Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-23
Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-23
Quick View State .................................................................................................................................... 4-23
Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................................................. 4-24
Paper Tray Status Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-24
Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-24
Alert Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-25
Status Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................ 4-25
Status Monitor Notification Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-26
4-1
Printing from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen

The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.
Printer Driver User Guide
1
3
No. Description
1 [Quick Print] tab
Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it changes to an
image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
[Basic] tab
This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size, destination, and duplex
printing.
[Layout] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode, poster printing,
and scaling.
[Finishing] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media, including binding and stapling.
[Imaging] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.
[Publishing] tab
This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.
[Job] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used documents and
other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can be printed directly from the
machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don't want others to see.
[Advanced] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.
2 [Profiles]
Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a convenient practice to
save frequently used settings.
3 [Reset]
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
4-2
Printing from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
Displaying the Printer Driver Help

The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display
Help as explained below.
1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of
1 the screen.
2 Click the item you want to know about.
NOTE
The Help appears, even when you click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings

(Windows 10)
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when
printing. For the settings, refer to the following:
1 Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows

System], [Control Panel], and [Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the
[Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.
4 Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.
4-3
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Printing from PC
This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER.
NOTE
• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver downloaded from our website on your computer.
• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.
• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multipurpose tray before
performing the following procedure.
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-6)
Printing on Standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the
print settings screen of the printer driver.
NOTE
Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel.
Paper Feeding (page 8-13)

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
1 2
2 Select the [Basic] tab.
4-4
3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.
To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or
envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select
the media type.
4 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3 Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
4-5
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab
of the print settings screen of the printer driver.
The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.
NOTE
To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:

and [View devices and printers].
NOTE
In Windows 8.1, in charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and then
[Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3 Click the [Preferences] button on the [General] tab.
2 Register the paper size.

1 Click the [Basic] tab.
1
2
2 Click the [Page Size...] button.
3 Click the [New] button.
3
4
5
6
7
4-6
4 Enter the paper size.
5 Enter the name of the paper.
6 Click the [Save] button.
7 Click the [OK] button.
3 Display the print settings screen.

4 Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.

1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
1 2
4-7
3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select
the media type.
NOTE
If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media
type" menu.
4 Select the paper source in the "Source" menu.
5 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
5 Start printing.
4-8
Banner Printing
When a document length from 488.1 mm (19.22") to a maximum of 1,220 mm (48.03") is specified for printing, the print
job is treated as banner printing.
Max. number of sheets 1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when optional banner tray is attached*)
Paper width 210 mm to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")
Paper length 488.1 mm to 1,220 mm (19.22" to 48.03")
Paper weight 136 to 163 g/m2
Media type Heavy 2
* When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously For details,
refer to the follows:
Using the Banner Tray (Option) (page 4-12)
Follow the steps below to set banner paper in the printer driver.


1 Select the machine from the "Name" menu and click the [Properties] button.
1 2
2
3
3 Click the [Page Size...] button.
4-9
3 Register the paper size.
1
2
3
4
5
1 Click the [New] button.
2 Enter the length (488.1 mm (19.22") or longer), and width of the custom paper size being
registered.
3 Enter the name of the paper.
4 Click the [Save] button.
4 Configure the print paper size.

1 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 3.
2 Click "Source" menu and select [Multipurpose tray].
3 Click "Media type" menu and select [Plain].
NOTE
When banner printing, a resolution of 600 dpi is set.
4-10
5 Start printing.
When you execute printing in this case, a message appears on the machine's operation panel.
Place the paper in the multipurpose tray, continue to support it so that it does not fall, and
select [Continue]. If paper has been loaded beforehand, no message is displayed and printing
starts automatically.
IMPORTANT
• If an output tray that cannot be used for banner printing such as Mailbox (option) is
selected in the printer driver, the output tray automatically changes to a tray that
can be used.
• After pressing [Continue], support the paper with both hands so that it feeds in
correctly.
• After printing starts, catch the paper when it is output so that it does not fall. When
using the inner tray as the output location, do not stand up the stopper.
Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when printing
multiple banner sheets.
4-11
Using the Banner Tray (Option)

When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously.
The operation procedure for setting the banner paper by using the printer driver is the same as that of using the
multipurpose tray.
Banner Printing (page 4-9)
NOTE
The paper length supported in banner tray is 488.1 mm to 1,220 mm (18.5" to 48.03").
1 Open the multipurpose tray.

Open the multipurpose tray until it stops.
Do not extend the multipurpose auxiliary tray.
2 Attach the banner tray.

1 Release the paper width guide lock on the banner tray and open to the maximum width.
2 Attach the banner tray to the multipurpose tray.
4-12
3 Load paper.
1 Open the paper width guides on the multipurpose tray to the maximum width.
Make sure that the banner tray is attached so that the paper width guides on the banner
tray are outside the paper width guides on the multipurpose tray.
2 Load banner paper so that it passes under the paper clamp bar.
3 Loop the banner paper back and place the end on the paper support.
4-13
4 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper.
IMPORTANT
If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides
to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
5 Adjust the paper width guides on the banner tray to the same width as the paper width
guides on the multipurpose tray and lock.
IMPORTANT
Remove the paper when banner printing finishes, or when you are not using the banner tray.
NOTE
The print confirmation screen can be set in System Menu to not appear when the banner tray is attached. This will
allow continuous printing on multiple sheets. Refer to the follows:
4-14
Canceling Printing from a Computer

To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:
NOTE
When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:
Canceling Jobs (page 5-22)
1 Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at

the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog
box for the printer.
2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select
[Cancel] from the "Document" menu.
4-15
Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device
Printing from the Handheld Device

This machine supports the AirPrint and Mopria. According to the supported OS and application, you can print the job
from any handheld device or computer without installing a printer driver.
Printing by AirPrint
AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later
products.
To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX.
Printing by Universal Print

Universal Print is a printing service provided by Microsoft. This service enables a user with a Azure Active Directory to
print from a machine connected to the Internet.
The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX.
NOTE
• In order to use Universal Print, it is necessary for Windows 10 or Microsoft365 license, and Azure Active Directory
account. If not, please acquire those license and the account.
• It is also necessary to register the machine in the Azure portal in advance. The machine can be registered from a
PC connected to the same network.
Printing by Mopria
Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products.
Mopria Print Service needs to be installed and enabled in advance.
For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.
4-16
Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the
wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly
on a peer to peer basis.
The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.
When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by
specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.
When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.
Printing with NFC

When the Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct has been configured in advance, the network between this machine and handheld
device will be configured by simply tapping an NFC tag.
Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-35)
4-17
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Data Saved in the Printer

You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary.
If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box
(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.
Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.
Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job. (page 4-18)
Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.
You can print the documents from the following boxes.
Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-19)
Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-20)
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-21)
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-22)
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job
1 Click [File] and select [Print] in the application. The Print
dialog box displays.
2 Select the machine from the "Name" menu.
3 Click the [Properties] button. The Properties dialog box

displays.
4 Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check
box to set the function.
NOTE
For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:
4-18
Printing Documents from Private Print Box

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job
from the application software, specify a password in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by entering the
password on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. If you do not specify a password, you will be
able to print without entering a password. The data will be deleted upon completion of the print job or after the power
switch is turned off.

1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 Select [Private Print/Stored Job].
3 Select the creator of the document.

1 Select the document to print > [Print]
2 Enter the password.

If a password is not set, go to step 3.
3 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
4 Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box

2 Delete the document.

1 Select the document to delete > [Delete]
%DFN 8VHU
2 3ULQW 'HOHWH
(QHUJ\6DYHU
1DPH 'DWHDQG7LPH 6L]H
1

5HVHW
6WRS
6WDUW
2 If the document is protected by a password, enter the password.

The document is deleted.
4-19
Printing Document from Stored Job Box

In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up a password as necessary.
If you set up a password, enter the password when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job Box after printing.
This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.


2 Enter the password.

Printing starts.
NOTE
If the document is protected by a password, the password entry screen will be displayed.
Enter the password.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box


1 Select the document to delete > [Delete]
2 If the document is protected by a password, enter the password.

4-20
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a
document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies
are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the touch panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be
stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE
• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.
• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-50)

2 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].


Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box


Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Delete]
4-21
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining
copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while
maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the touch panel. You can
change the number of copies to print.



Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold

Box

Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Delete]
4-22
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status

Monitor)
The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.
NOTE
When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.
• KX DRIVER is installed.
• Either [Enhanced WSD] or [Enhanced WSD(SSL)] is enabled.
Network Settings (page 8-53)
Accessing the Status Monitor

The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.
Exiting the Status Monitor

Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.
• Exit manually:
Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.
• Exit automatically:
The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.
Quick View State

The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.
1 Printing progress tab
2 Paper tray status tab
3 Toner status tab
4 Alert tab
1 2 3 45 6 5 Expand button
6 Settings icon
Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.
4-23
Printing Progress Tab

The status of the print jobs is displayed.
1 Status icon
2 Job list
1
Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.
Paper Tray Status Tab

Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.
Toner Status Tab

The amount of toner remaining is displayed.
4-24
Alert Tab
If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.
Status Monitor Context Menu

The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.
• Command Center RX
If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the
Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings. This menu is not displayed when using USB
connection.
• Notification…
This sets the display of the Status Monitor.
Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 4-26)
• www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
Open our website.
• Exit
Exits the Status Monitor.
4-25
Status Monitor Notification Settings

The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.
Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.
1 Select Enable event notification.

If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is
executed.
2 Select an event to use with the text to speech function in

Available events.
3 Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.

Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.
NOTE
The available file format is WAV.
When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text box.
4-26
5 Operation on the Machine
Loading Originals .......................................................... 5-2 Using MultiCrop Scan to Send/Store an
Placing Originals on the Platen .......................... 5-2 Original ............................................................ 5-40
Loading Originals in the Document Processor ... 5-3 Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ....................... 5-6 Sending) ..................................................................... 5-42
Favorites ..................................................................... 5-11 Send to Me (Email) ..................................................... 5-43
Registering Favorites ....................................... 5-12 Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-43
Recalling Favorites .......................................... 5-12 Sending a document to the mail address of
Editing Favorites .............................................. 5-13 the logged in user ............................................ 5-43
Deleting Favorites ............................................ 5-13 Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) ......... 5-44
Application .................................................................. 5-14 Canceling Sending Jobs ............................................. 5-46
Installing Applications ...................................... 5-14 Handling Destination .................................................. 5-47
Activating Applications ..................................... 5-15 Specifying Destination ..................................... 5-47
Deactivating Applications ................................. 5-16 Choosing from the Address Book .................... 5-47
Uninstalling Applications .................................. 5-16 Choosing from the One Touch Key .................. 5-49
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Choosing from the Search (No.) ...................... 5-49
Box Settings) .............................................................. 5-17 Checking and Editing Destinations .................. 5-50
Adding Shortcuts ............................................. 5-17 Confirmation Screen of Destinations ............... 5-51
Editing Shortcuts .............................................. 5-18 Recall ............................................................... 5-51
Deleting Shortcuts ........................................... 5-18 How to use the FAX Function ..................................... 5-52
Copying ...................................................................... 5-19 Using Document Boxes .............................................. 5-53
Basic Operation ............................................... 5-19 What is Custom Box? ...................................... 5-53
Proof Copy ....................................................... 5-21 What is Job Box? ............................................. 5-53
Interrupt Copy .................................................. 5-22 What is USB Drive Box? .................................. 5-54
Canceling Jobs ................................................ 5-22 Fax Box ........................................................... 5-54
Frequently-Used Sending Method .............................. 5-23 Basic Operation for Document Box ................. 5-54
Sending Document via E-mail .................................... 5-24 Creating a New Custom Box ........................... 5-58
Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-24 Editing Custom Box ......................................... 5-59
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .......... 5-24 Deleting Custom Box ....................................... 5-60
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Storing Documents to a Custom Box .............. 5-60
Computer (Scan to PC) .............................................. 5-26 Printing Documents in Custom Box ................. 5-61
Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-26 Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box ... 5-62
Sending Document to Desired Shared Sending Documents in Custom Box ................ 5-63
Folder on a Computer ...................................... 5-26 Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server mail Address of Logged in User ....................... 5-64
(Scan to FTP) ............................................................. 5-29 Moving Documents in Custom Box ................. 5-64
Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-29 Copying Documents in Custom Box into
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Other Boxes ..................................................... 5-65
Server .............................................................. 5-29 Copying Documents in Custom Box to USB
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ................................... 5-31 Drive ................................................................ 5-65
Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-31 Joining Documents in Custom Box .................. 5-66
Scanning Document Using Application ............ 5-31 Deleting Documents in Custom Box ................ 5-67
Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box ............. 5-32 Job Box ...................................................................... 5-68
Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-32 Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs ......................... 5-68
Scanning Document Stored in a Box ............... 5-32 Form for Form Overlay .................................... 5-69
Useful Sending Method .............................................. 5-34 Operating using Removable USB Drive ..................... 5-70
WSD Scan .................................................................. 5-35 Printing Documents Stored in Removable
Installing the Driver .......................................... 5-35 USB Drive ........................................................ 5-70
Executing WSD scan ....................................... 5-36 Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to
DSM Scan .................................................................. 5-37 USB) ................................................................ 5-72
Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-37 Check the USB Drive Information .................... 5-73
Executing DSM Scan ....................................... 5-37 Removing USB Drive ....................................... 5-73
Scanning with File Management Utility ....................... 5-39 Using the Internet Browser ......................................... 5-74
Configuring Settings before Sending ............... 5-39 Launching and Exiting the Browser ................. 5-74
Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original .... 5-39 Using the Browser Screen ............................... 5-75
Using MultiCrop Scan ................................................. 5-40 Manual Staple ............................................................ 5-76
Configuring Settings before Scanning ............. 5-40
5-1
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Loading Originals
Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function.
• Platen: Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes.
• Document Processor: Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two sided originals.
Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original
2 size indicator plates with the back
1 left corner as the reference point.
NOTE
• A5 is detected as A4-R. Set the paper size to A5 by using the function key on the touch panel.
Original Size (page 6-19)
• For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen

1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2 2 Align it flush against the original
size indicator plates with the back
left corner as the reference point.
1
NOTE
For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray (page 5-8)
CAUTION
Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
• Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass.
• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open position.
5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are
scanned.
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Detail Document Processor (Automatic 2-Sided) Document Processor

(Dual scan DP)
Type DP-7150 DP-7160

DP-7170 (Skewed, Multifeed and Staple
Detection)
Weight 35 to 160 g/m2 35 to 220 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2) (duplex: 50 to 220 g/m2)
Sizes Maximum A3/Ledger (11.69" × 17"/ 297 × 432 mm) (Long-sized 11.69" × 74.8"/297 × 1,900 mm) to
Minimum A6-R/Statement-R (4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm)
No. of Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled paper, Vellum Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled paper, Vellum
sheets paper: 140 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets) paper: 320 sheets (A4 or less), 200 sheets (A3,
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 93 sheets B4) (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Art paper: 1 sheet Thick paper (120 g/m2): 180 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the
document processor may become dirty.
• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before
loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
• Originals with adhesive tape or glue
• Originals with cut-out sections
• Curled original
• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
• Carbon paper
• Crumpled paper
IMPORTANT
• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on
the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top
cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.
5-3
1 Adjust the original width guides.

1 Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the
leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go. The original loaded indicator
lights when the original is placed correctly.
NOTE
For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
IMPORTANT
• Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,
readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
DP-7150 DP-7160 /
DP-7170
• Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the
maximum level may cause the originals to jam.
• Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way
that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).
5-4
2 Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set.
Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)/Document Processor (Dual Scan)
Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed, Multifeed and Staple Detection)
(Original size: A4/Letter or less)
(Original size: B4/Legal or more)
5-5
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

The multipurpose tray will hold up to 150 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2).
For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:
Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-14)
For the paper type setting, refer to the following:
Be sure to use the multipurpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT
• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the
paper you are using.
• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner tray may
cause a paper jam.
The capacity of the multipurpose tray is as follows.

• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 150 sheets
• B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets
• Thick paper (209 g/m2): 10 sheets
• Thick paper (157 g/m2): 50 sheets
• Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 50 sheets
• Hagaki (Cardstock): 30 sheets
• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Kakugata 2,
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4: 10 sheets
• OHP film: 10 sheet
• Coated: 10 sheets
• Banner paper: 488.1 mm (19.22") to a maximum of 1,220 mm (48.03"): 1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when
optional banner tray is attached)
• Index tab dividers: 15 sheets
NOTE
• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:
• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the
following:
• Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following:
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
5-6
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size.

Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3 Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
multipurpose tray.
IMPORTANT
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.
• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
• When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left
over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small
amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first
remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.
• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides
to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using

the operation panel.
5-7
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray

Load the paper with the print side facing down. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:
Example: When printing the address.
1 Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard)
2 Hagaki (Cardstocks)
3 Portrait form envelopes (Open the flap)
4 Landscape form envelopes (Close the
flap)
1 2 3 4
IMPORTANT
• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).
• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to
load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE
• When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:
• When you load cardstocks in the multipurpose tray, open the stopper as shown below.
5-8
Loading Index Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
1 Prepare paper.
Sort the pages so that the 1st page is at the back.
1 2 3
1
2
3
2 Orient the paper in the same orientation.

Place the paper print side down, oriented so that the tabs are on the trailing side of the paper
when it feeds in.
123
1 2 3
1 1
2 2
3 3
3 3
2 2
1 1
1 2 3 1 2 3
3 3
2 2
1 1
5-9
3 Load paper.
Load paper in the tray.
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:
Index paper must meet the following conditions.
Item Description
Paper size A4/Letter
Paper weight 136 to 256 g/m2
Number of tabs 1 to 15
Length of tabs 30 mm or less
5-10
Operation on the Machine > Favorites
Favorites
After you add frequently used functions to Favorites, you can recall them quickly and easily. You can also name the
favorites for easy identification when recalling.
The favorites below have been preregistered. The registered contents can be re-registered for easier use in your
environment.
Favorite name Description Default Registration

ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an • Copying Functions
insurance card. • Original Size: [A5]/[Statement]
When you scan the front and back of the card, both sides
Paper Selection: [Cassette 1]
will be combined and copied onto a single sheet.
Zoom: [100%]
Erase Shadowed Areas: [On]
Eco Copy Use this to save toner consumption when printing. • Copying Functions
This changes color printing to black & white with lighter • EcoPrint: [On] (Level [5])
density, so that the toner consumption can be reduced.
Newspaper Copy Use this when you want to copy a newspaper article, or • Copying Functions
other originals printed on a colored substrate. • Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]
This adjusts the image quality so that the color of the
Background Density Adj.: [Auto]
substrate or the text on the reverse side will not show on
the copy.
Technical Drawing Copy Use this when you want to copy a drawing that contains • Copying Functions
shapes drawn with lines, and graphics. Use this also • Original Image: [Text]
when you want to copy colored lines in black & white.
Sharpness (All): [+3]
Background Density Adj.: [Auto]
Confidential Stamp Use this to show a translucent text "Confidential" on the • Copying Functions
center of the document. • Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]
Stamp: [Confidential]
Font Size: [middle]
Font Color: [Black]
Stamp Position: [Center]
Display Pattern: [Transparent]
NOTE
• Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the favorites.
• If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.
5-11
Registering Favorites
The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.

1 [Home] key > [Copy]
2 Select [Favorites] while the copy mode is accessed.
2 Register the favorite.

1 [Add/Edit] > Select a number (01 to 50) for the favorite number
NOTE
If you register on a favorite number already registered, delete the currently registered
favorite before registering.
2 Enter the new favorite name > [Register]

The favorite is registered.
To display a registered favorite on the Home screen, select [Add] on the confirmation
screen that appears.
3 Select [OK].
Recalling Favorites
1 Recall the favorite.
1 [Home] key > [...] > [Favorites] or select the icon of a favorite.
If you selected the icon of a favorite, that favorite will be recalled. If you selected
[Favorites], proceed to step 1-2.
2 Select the favorite number you want to recall.

Select [Search] to enter the favorite number (01 to 50) directly for recalling.
NOTE
If the favorite cannot be recalled, the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the
favorite might have been deleted. Check the Document Box.
2 Execute the favorite.

Place the originals > [Start] key
NOTE
[Favorites] can be selected in each function to call up the favorite registered for the
function.
5-12
Editing Favorites
You can change favorite number and favorite name.

1 [Home] key > [...] > [Favorites]
2 Select [Add/Edit].
2 Edit the favorite.

1 Select corresponding to the favorite number (01 to 50) to change.
2 Select [Edit] to change the favorite number and favorite name.

Registering Favorites (page 5-12)
3 [OK] > [OK]
Deleting Favorites
1 [Home] key > [...] > [Favorites]
2 Select [Add/Edit].
2 Delete the favorite.

1 Select corresponding to the favorite number (01 to 50) to delete.
5-13
Operation on the Machine > Application
Application
The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications.
Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication feature are
available.
For details, consult your sales representative or dealer.
Installing Applications
To use applications, first install the application in the machine and then activate the application.
NOTE
You can install applications and certificates on the machine. The number of applications you can run may vary
according to the type of application.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application] > "Application" [Add/Delete
Application]
NOTE
• If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user with
privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
• Select [Print Report] to print an application report.
2 Install the application.

1 [Add] > [OK]
2 Insert the USB drive containing the application to be installed into the USB Memory Slot.
NOTE
When the message "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files." is displayed, select
[Cancel].
3 Select the application to be installed > [Install]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] (information
icon).
5-14
4 Select [Yes].
Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the
installation may take some time.
Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.
NOTE
• To install another application, repeat steps 2-3 and 2-4.
• To remove the USB drive, select [Remove USB] and wait until the message "USB
Drive can be safely removed." appears. Then remove the USB drive.
Activating Applications
Application]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
2 Activate the application.

1 Select the desired application > [Activate]
icon).
2 Enter the license key > [Official]

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen
does not appear, go to step 2-3. To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without
entering the license key.
3 Select [Yes].
IMPORTANT
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you
will no longer be able to use the application.
• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
4 Select the application icon in the Home screen.

Select the application icon.
The application will start up.
5-15
Deactivating Applications
Application]
NOTE
2 Deactivate the application.

Select the desired application to exit > [Deactivate]
NOTE
• Select [x] on the screen if you want to exit the already activated application.
• The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.
Uninstalling Applications
Application]
NOTE
2 Deactivate the application.

1 Select the application you want to delete > [Delete]
icon).
2 Select [Yes].
5-16
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Registering Shortcuts
(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
You can register shortcuts for easy access to the frequently used functions. A function name linked to a registered
shortcut can be changed as necessary.
Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the basic screen of each function.
1 Display the basic screen you want to register.
2 Register the shortcuts.

1 Select [Shortcut].
Display the shortcut menu.
2 Select [Add].
$GG(GLW6KRUWFXW &ORVH
$GG (GLW 'HOHWH
,'&DUG&RS\
3 Select the settings you want to add > [Next >]
4 Enter the shortcut name > [Next >].
NOTE
The function name will be displayed if you do not enter a shortcut key.
5 Confirm the entry.

Select [Shortcut Name], [Function], or [Permission] to change the settings.
NOTE
[Permission] is displayed when the user login administration is enabled.
6 Select [Finish].
&RSLHV
4XLFN6HWXS
$XWR
(QHUJ\6DYHU
2UJ3DSHU
3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP
)LQLVKLQJ
/D\RXW 1RUPDO VLGHG!! ,QWHUUXSW
(GLW
VLGHG
5HVHW
$GYDQFHG 2II 2II
6HWXS
&RPELQH 6WDSOH3XQFK 6WRS
,'&DUG 'HQVLW\
&RS\ 3UHYLHZ 1XPHULF
6WDUW
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW .H\SDG
The shortcut is registered.
5-17
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Editing Shortcuts
2 Select [ ] (edit icon).
2 Edit the shortcut.

1 Select the shortcut key you want to edit.
2 Select [Edit].
3 Select [Shortcut Name] or [Function] > Change the settings > [OK].
4 [Finish] > [Update]
Deleting Shortcuts
2 Select [ ] (edit icon).
2 Delete the shortcut.

Select the shortcut key you want to delete > [Delete] > [Delete]
5-18
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Copying
The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.
Basic Operation
1 [Home] key > [Copy]
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
3 Select the functions.

To configure the settings for functions, select the Global Navigation.
About Functions Available on the Machine (page 6-2)
4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Select the area for inputting the number of sheets to display the numeric keypad. Or, use [+] or
[-] to enter the number of sheets. Specify the desired number up to 9999.
&RSLHV
4XLFN6HWXS
$XWR
(QHUJ\6DYHU
2UJ3DSHU
3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP
)LQLVKLQJ
(GLW
VLGHG
5HVHW
$GYDQFHG 2II 2II
6WRS
(QWHU
6WDUW
5-19
5 Check the preview image.

Select [Preview] tab > [Preview] to show a preview image.
&RSLHV
4XLFN6HWXS
$XWR
(QHUJ\6DYHU
2UJ3DSHU
3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP
)LQLVKLQJ
(GLW
VLGHG
$GYDQFHG 2II 2II 2 3UHYLHZ 3URRI&RS\

5HVHW
6HWXS
2ULJLQDO
3DSHU
,'&DUG
&RS\ 1 3UHYLHZ
1XPHULF
6WDUW
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW
.H\SDG
Original Preview (page 2-24)
6 Press the [Start] key.

Copying begins.
NOTE
This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the
original will be scanned while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the
reserved copy job is printed. If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], [Reserve Next] will
appear. Select [Reserve Next] and configure the necessary settings for the copy job.
&DQFHO 5HVHUYH
6FDQQLQJ
1H[W
6FDQ6HWWLQJV 6FDQQHG3DJHV 3ULQW6HWWLQJV

(QHUJ\6DYHU
$ $ 3ODLQ
䠂 FRSLHV
VLGHG 037UD\ ,QWHUUXSW
7RS(GJHRQ7RS VLGHG
5HVHW
6WRS
6WDUW
-RE1R 8VHU1DPH -RE1DPHGRF
5-20
Proof Copy
It is possible to copy one sheet before copying a large number of sheets. This enables you to check the contents and
finishing and copy the desired number of sheets without scanning the original if you are satisfied with the result. If you
want to make changes, you can change the settings and copy only one sheet again.

Place the originals onto the machine, and configure the copy settings.
2 Select [Preview] tab > [Proof Copy].
&RSLHV
4XLFN6HWXS
$XWR
(QHUJ\6DYHU
2UJ3DSHU
3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ =RRP
)LQLVKLQJ
(GLW
,PDJH4XDOLW\ 'HQVLW\
VLGHG
'XSOH[ 2
5HVHW
6HWXS
2ULJLQDO
3DSHU
,'&DUG
&RS\ 1 3UHYLHZ
1XPHULF
.H\SDG 6WDUW
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW
A confirmation copy is printed.
3 Check.
Check contents and finishing.
Modify copy settings according to results. All functions except for functions whose keys are
grayed out on the touch panel can be corrected.
To perform a proof copy again, select [Proof Copy].

Remaining sheets are copied.
5-21
Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.
When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.
NOTE
• If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and
printing resumes.
You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change the delay as required.
Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-9)
• The interrupt copy function may be unavailable depending on the status of document finisher usage. In this case, try
the priority override.

1 Select the [Interrupt] key.
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.

Interrupt copying begins.
3 When interrupt copying ends, select the [Interrupt] key.

The machine resumes the paused print jobs.
Canceling Jobs
1 Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed.
2 Cancel a job.
When there is a job is being scanned

The copy job is canceled.
When there is a job printing or on standby

Canceling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]
NOTE
If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], the Copying screen appears in the touch panel. In such case, selecting the
[Stop] key or [Cancel] will cancel the printing job in progress.
5-22
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
Frequently-Used Sending Method

This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In
order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is
recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.
• Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
Sending Document via E-mail (page 5-24)
• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC.
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 5-26)
• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 5-29)
• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 5-31)
NOTE
• Different sending options can be specified in combination.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-42)
• The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
FAX Operation Guide
5-23
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail
Sending Document via E-mail

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an E-mail, configure the SMTP and E-mail settings using the Command Center RX.
E-mail Settings (page 2-71)
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail

1 [Home] key > [Send]
3 In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [Email]
4 Enter destination E-mail address > [OK]

Up to 256 characters can be entered.
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. Up to
100 E-mail addresses can be specified.
You can register the entered E-mail address in the Address Book by selecting [Add to Address
Book]. You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination.
Destinations can be changed later.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-51)
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.
5-24
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail

Select the Global Navigation to display other functions.
Send (page 6-5)
IMPORTANT
• [Email Encrypted TX] and [Digital Signature to Email] appear when setting S/MIME
on the Command Center RX.
• When using [Email Encrypted TX] and [Digital Signature to Email], specify the E-
mail addresses which have encryption certificate, from the address book. The
directly-entered address can not be configured these functions. When entering E-
mail address from the operation panel, you can not use these functions.

Sending starts.
5-25
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
Sending Document to Desired Shared

Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
You can store the scanned document into the desired shared folder on a computer.

Before sending a document, configure the following settings.
• Make a note of the computer name and full computer name
Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full Computer Name (page 3-24)
• Make a note of the user name and domain name
Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name (page 3-24)
• Create a shared folder and make a note of a shared folder
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 3-25)
• Configure the Windows firewall
Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-29)
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a

Computer
3 In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [SMB]

• To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select [Search Folder from Network] or
[Search Folder by Host Name].
If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for
a destination.
If you pressed [Search Folder by Host Name], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup",
and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.
5-26
Up to 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to
specify in the screen that appears, and select [OK]. The login user name and login
password entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the
shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [OK]. The
address of the selected shared folder is set.
Select the folder from the Search Results list.
• To directly specify the SMB folder, select [Folder Path Entry] and enter each item.
The table below lists the items to be set.
Max.
Item Description
characters
Host Name*1 Computer name Up to
256 characters
Port Port number ―
If the port number is not specified, the default port
number is 445.
Folder Path Share name Up to

For example: scannerdata 260 characters
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
share name\folder name in shared folder
Login User Name*2 • If the computer name and domain name are the Up to
same: 64 characters
User Name
For example: james.smith
• If the computer name and domain name are
different:
Login Password Windows logon password Up to

(Case sensitive.) 128 characters
*1 Enter the Host name or IP address.

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])
*2 Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\james.smith
When sending a document through an optional network interface (IB-50 or IB-51), "\" cannot be
used. If the computer name is different from the domain name, login user name needs to be input
by using "@."
(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)
5 Check the status.

1 Check the information.
Change the delay as required.
5-27
2 Select [Connection Test] to check the connection.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If
"Cannot connect." appears, review the entry.
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.
You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to
Address Book].
NOTE
6 Select [OK].

Send (page 6-5)

Sending starts.
5-28
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP

Server (Scan to FTP)
Before sending a document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).
Protocol Settings (page 8-60)
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server

3 In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [FTP]

Item Descriptions Max. characters

Host Name*1 Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters
Port Port number ―
If the port number is not specified, the default port
number is 21.
Folder Path*2 Path for the file to be stored Up to

For example: User\ScanData 128 characters
If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home
directory.
Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters

Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64 characters
*1 To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])
*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the
slash "/" not using the back-slash.
5-29
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
5 Check the status.

Change the delay as required.
2 Select [Connection Test] to check the connection.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If
"Cannot connect." appears, review the entry.
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.
You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to
Address Book].
NOTE
6 Select [OK].

Send (page 6-5)

Sending starts.
5-30
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA


Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.
Setting WIA Driver (page 2-63)
Scanning Document Using Application

This subsection explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way.

1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.
2 Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application
software.
2 Configure the scan settings.

Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.
NOTE
For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
4 Scan the originals.

Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.
5-31
Operation on the Machine > Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box
Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box

Follow the steps as below for scanning a document stored in a custom box using the TWAIN driver.

Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.
Scanning Document Stored in a Box

This subsection explains how to scan an original using an application supporting TWAIN.
NOTE
To load a document saved in the Custom Box, select the model name with (Box) from “Model” on the TWAIN driver
configuration screen.

1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.
2 Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application
software.
2 Display lists of documents.

1 Select a custom box stored a document. If a password has been set for the box, the
password entry screen appears. Enter the password and click the [OK] button. When you
select a box, the document files in the Custom Box appear in "Document List".
2 Set how to display the document data. Click the [Setting] button to select each item.
NOTE
For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
3 Click [OK] button.
5-32
Operation on the Machine > Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box

1 Select the document data to be scanned from [Document List].
Enter the document data name in the Search (Name) to find the data having the same
document data name or the document data name with the same beginning.
Click the [Detail] button to display the selected document data. When the document data
includes multiple pages, select the checkbox beside the pages you want to scan. The
selected pages will be scanned.
NOTE
In this case, the scanned page or the selected document data will not be deleted from
the Custom Box.
2 Click the [Acquire] button.

The document data is scanned.
5-33
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
Useful Sending Method

You can specify the following useful scanning (sending) methods.
• WSD Scan: Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
• DSM Scan: A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a
scan process from Active Directory.
• Scanning with File Management Utility: Scans a document using the settings of File Management Utility and saves it
to a specified network folder or PC.
Scanning with File Management Utility (page 5-39)
• Scanning using the fax server: A scanned original is send via a fax server.
Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) (page 5-44)
• Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending): Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses,
folders, etc.) in a single operation.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-42)
• Send to Me (Email): Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.
Send to Me (Email) (page 5-43)
5-34
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE
• To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and
"WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings.
• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.
Installing the Driver

For Windows 10
1 Right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control

Panel] and then [View devices and printer].
2 Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].
When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the
installation is completed.
For Windows 8.1 and Microsoft Windows Server 2012
1 Click [Search] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [View

devices and printers].
2 Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].
When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the
installation is completed.
5-35
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
Executing WSD scan


In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [WSD Scan]

Procedure using this machine
1 [From Operation Panel] > [Next]
2 Select the destination computer > [OK]

Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.
You can view information on the selected computer by selecting [ ] (information icon).
3 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.
Procedure from Your Computer
1 [From Computer] > [Start]
2 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.
5-36
Operation on the Machine > DSM Scan
DSM Scan
A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a scan process
from Active Directory. For details, refer to Windows Server Help.

If you are performing DSM scan, check the items below.
• The machine is connected to an Active Directory on the network that the scan process can reference.
• "DSM Scan", "LDAP" and "HTTP" are set to [On] in Network.
• "Network" [SSL] is set to [On] in Security Settings.
SSL (page 8-83)
• [Network Authentication] is set in.
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
NOTE
If the Active Directory that the scan process can reference is not on the network authentication server, DSM must be
set in Command Center RX.
Executing DSM Scan

NOTE
Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear. In this event, select
[Cancel] to display the destination screen for sending.

In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [DSM Scan]
5-37
Operation on the Machine > DSM Scan
4 Select the scan process to be used > [OK].

Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.
To check the settings, select [ ] (information icon).
5 Change the settings and add destinations as needed.

Only E-mail addresses can be added as destinations.
In the send destination screen, select [Detail/Edit], [Destination], and then [Address Book]
or [E-mail Addr Entry], and add a destination.
In some scan processes, it may not be possible to change settings or add destinations.

Sending starts.
5-38
Operation on the Machine > Scanning with File Management Utility
Scanning with File Management Utility

"FMU Connection" is installed on the machine as a standard application.
FMU Connection can be used to scan an original according to the settings configured with "File Management Utility"
downloaded from our website, and save the image data and scanning information on a specified server or in a specified
folder. Unlike regular transmission functions, this application lets you use metadata such as the scan date and time and
the data format.

The first time you use FMU Connection, you must enable it in System Menu.
To use this function, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for the
multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. To install File Management Utility, refer
to the following.
Installing Software (page 2-51)
NOTE
For information on using File Management Utility, refer to the following:
File Management Utility User Guide
Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original

1 Make sure that File Management Utility is running on the
computer (or server) on which File Management Utility is
installed.
2 Place the original.
3 Select [FMU Connection].

FMU Connection starts.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary

information and select [Next].
5 When the scan settings screen appears, select each item and
configure the necessary settings.
The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility.

Sending starts.
5-39
Operation on the Machine > Using MultiCrop Scan
Using MultiCrop Scan

MultiCrop Scan is installed as a standard application in this machine.
Using MultiCrop Scan function, you can scan multiple receipts, invoices, business cards, etc., cut them out individually,
file them, and send them to a specified destination or save them on a USB drive.
NOTE
To send to the specified destination, configure the network.
Configuring Settings before Scanning

The first time you use MultiCrop Scan function, you must enable it in System Menu.
Using MultiCrop Scan to Send/Store an Original

IMPORTANT
• Before placing originals, clean the platen glass.
• Place the original and close the cover of Document Processor to use. MultiCrop
Scan.
• Allow at least 15 mm between originals.
• Use square originals for scanning correctly.
• A maximum of 16 original sizes from 50 × 50 mm to 210 × 210 mm can be detected.
Areas longer than 210mm are clipped and scanned.
NOTE
• The maximum number of continuous scanning pages is 982.
• Using MultiCrop Scan, you can correct the skew of the original (range of -45 degrees
clockwise). Place the originals so that the correct scan results are obtained.
2 [Home] key > [MultiCrop Scan]

MultiCrop Scan function starts.
3 Select [Send] or [Store to USB].

1 When selecting [Send], select [Address book] or [Manual entry] to add the destinations.
When selecting [Store to USB], select [Open] or [Back] to specify the location to store the
file in USB drive, and go to step 4.
2 When selecting [Address book], select the destination to send the file and then select
[Back].
Sending method are SMB, FTP and E-mail. Up to 10 destinations are selected.
When selecting [Manual entry], add details of destination and select [Add to list].
3 Confirm whether the selected destinations are correct.
5-40
Operation on the Machine > Using MultiCrop Scan
4 Select [Scan & send].
5 Configure the functions.

You can use or combine the following functions.
For details of each function, access to the reference page in the table.
Item Value Reference Page

File Format PDF, TIFF, JPEG page 6-75
Image Quality Low to High (5 levels) -
Color Selection Full Color, Black & White, Grayscale page 6-36
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, page 6-25
Auto
Scan Resolution 200 x 200 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 page 6-82
dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
File Separation ON, OFF page 6-82
Continuous Scan ON, OFF page 6-68
Density -4.0 (Lighter) to ;4.0 (Darker) page 6-34
File Name Enter the file name (within 32 page 6-70

characters).
You can also add [Job No.] and [Data
and Time] .
Border Erase Standard, Full Scan, Border Erase page 6-45

Sheet, Border Erase Book, Individual
Border Erase
Select [<] or [>] to move the function pages.
6 Select [Start Scanning].

The originals are scanned, and sent them to the specified destinations or stored them to the
USB drive.
5-41
Operation on the Machine > Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
Sending to Different Types of Destinations

(Multi Sending)
You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP), fax numbers and i-FAX. This is
referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in
a single operation.
No. of broadcast items: Up to 500

However, number of items are restricted for the following sending options.
• E-mail: Up to 100
• Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 10 SMB and FTP
• i-FAX: Up to 100
Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or
folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one
time.
NOTE
• If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.
• If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be specified.
5-42
Operation on the Machine > Send to Me (Email)
Send to Me (Email)
When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

To use this function, configure the followings.
• To use this function, the function icon must be displayed in the home screen.
• An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)
Sending a document to the mail address of the logged

in user
1 Select [Home] key.
2 Select [Send to Me (Email)].
5-43
Operation on the Machine > Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send)
Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server

Send)
You can send a scanned document via a fax server.
NOTE
• A fax server is required to use this function. For information about the fax server, contact the applicable
administrator.
• FAX server settings must be configured to send a FAX.

In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [Fax Server]
4 Enter recipient information.

Entering Information Directly
1 Select [Fax No. Entry].
2 Enter the fax number > [OK]
NOTE
Use the numeric keys to enter a number.

Selecting from the Address Book
1 Select [Address Book].
2 Specify the destination > [OK]

Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-47)
5-44
Operation on the Machine > Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send)
Selecting from an External Address Book
1 Select [Ext Address Book].
2 Specify the destination > [OK]

NOTE
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Send (page 6-5)

Sending starts.
5-45
Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs
Canceling Sending Jobs

1 Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed.
2 Cancel a job.
When there is a job is being scanned

Job Cancel appears.
When there is a job sending or on standby

Canceling job screen appears.
Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]
NOTE
Selecting the [Stop] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.
5-46
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Handling Destination
This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.
Specifying Destination
Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly:
• Choosing from the Address Book
• Choosing from the External Address Book
• For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
• Choosing from One Touch key
Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-49)
• Choosing from the Search (No.)
Choosing from the Search (No.) (page 5-49)
• Choosing from the FAX
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.
Default Screen (page 8-38)
• If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other
party number using the numeric keypad.
Choosing from the Address Book

For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to the following:
Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-38)
1 In the destination screen for sending, select [Address Book] ( ).
NOTE
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
2 Select the destinations.

Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected destinations
are indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use an address book on the LDAP server,
select [Selection] > [Address Book] > [Ext Address Book].
You can change the order in which the destinations are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.].
NOTE
• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
• If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be selected. This also
applies to a group in which multiple destinations are registered.
5-47
Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. Advanced search by type or by
initial letter is also available.
&DQFHO $GGUHVV%RRN
1 $GG(GLW )LOWHU
6HDUFK
1DPH
6HDUFK
2
Keys used Search type Subjects searched

1 Filter Advanced search by type of registered destination (Email,
Folder, Fax, iFax or Group). (Fax: Only when the optional
FAX Kit is installed. iFax: Only when the optional Internet
FAX Kit is activated.)
You can set this function up so that destination types are
selected when the address book is displayed. For details,
refer to the following:
Narrow Down (page 8-42)
2 Search (No.) Search by registered address number or name. Select either

[Search (No.)] or [Search (Name)] to switch between
Search (Name) [Search (No.)] and [Search (Name)].
3 Accept the destination > [OK]

.
NOTE
• To delete the destination, select [ ]>[ ] (delete icon) for the destination you want to
delete > [Delete]
• You can set the default sort setting of the address for the address book.
Sort (page 8-42)
5-48
Choosing from the One Touch Key

In the destination screen for sending, select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.
NOTE
If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, select [ ] or [ ] to display all One
Touch Keys. This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.
For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:
2QH7RXFK.H\ &ORVH
'HVWLQDWLRQ
(QWHUGHVWLQDWLRQ
'HVWLQDWLRQ
(QHUJ\
6DYHU
'HVWLQDWLRQ 1R *
4XLFN6HWXS 'HVW
$GGUHVV%RRN 5HFDOO
+LVWRU\
2UJ6HQG
,PDJH4XDOLW\
5HVHW
$GYDQFHG
$XWR&RORU [GSL 3UHYLHZ
6HWXS &RO*UD\
=RRP 6WRS
6HQG
1RUPDO VLGHG
6KRUWFXW 'HQVLW\ VLGHG%RRN2ULJLQDO 6WDUW

)DYRULWHV
* The [No.] key has the same function as [Search (No.)] displayed on the touch panel. Use to directly enter a number
with the numeric keys, such as specifying a transmission address using a one-touch key number, or calling up a
stored program using the program number. For information on one-touch key numbers, refer to the following:
Choosing from the Search (No.)

Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to 1000) One Touch Key number.
In the destination screen for sending, select [Search (No.)] to display the numeric entry screen. Select the entry field,
and use the numeric keys to enter the speed dial number.
NOTE
If you entered the One Touch Key in 1 to 3-digit, select [OK].
'HVWLQDWLRQ 'HVWLQDWLRQ
(QWHUGHVWLQDWLRQ (QHUJ\
6DYHU
4XLFN6HWXS 'HVW
$GGUHVV%RRN 5HFDOO
+LVWRU\
2UJ6HQG
,PDJH4XDOLW\
5HVHW
$GYDQFHG
$XWR&RORU [GSL 3UHYLHZ
6HWXS &RO*UD\
=RRP 6WRS
6HQG
1RUPDO VLGHG
6KRUWFXW 'HQVLW\ VLGHG%RRN2ULJLQDO 6WDUW

)DYRULWHV
5-49
Checking and Editing Destinations

Specify the destination.
2 Check and edit the destination.

Select [ ] to display a destination list.
• Select [ ] (information icon) to check the destination.
• Select [ ] (delete icon) to remove the destination from the list.
NOTE
• When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination, the confirmation screen
appears. Enter the same destination again, and select [OK].
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-38)
• When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen appears
after pressing the [Start] key.
Destination Check before Send (page 8-38)
5-50
Confirmation Screen of Destinations

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing
the [Start] key.
Destination Check before Send (page 8-38)
&ORVH
&KHFNWKHGHVWLQDWLRQOLVWWKURXJKWKHODVWSDJH
$IWHUFKHFNLQJWKHOLVWSUHVV>&KHFN@DQGWKHQ>6WDUW@
'HOHWH
&KHFN 2
'HVWLQDWLRQ 'HWDLO
1 Move the screen to the bottom and confirm all destinations.

Selecting [ ] (information icon) shows the detailed information of the destination.
To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete > [Delete] > [Delete]
To add the destination, select [Close] and then return to the destination screen.
2 Select [Check].
NOTE
Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot
select [Check] unless you have confirmed all destination.
Recall
Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. When you want to send the image to
the same destination, select [Recall], and you can call the destination you sent on the destination list.
1 Select [Recall].
The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list.
NOTE
When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also
displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.

Sending starts.
NOTE
• When [On] is selected in "Dest. Check before Send", a destination confirmation screen is
displayed when you press the [Start] key.
• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.
- When you turn the power off
- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)
- When you log out
5-51
Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function
How to use the FAX Function

On products with a FAX function, it is possible to use the FAX function. The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make
use of FAX functionality.
FAX Operation Guide
5-52
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Using Document Boxes

Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer and sharing it with multiple users.
The available Document Boxes are as follows: Custom Box, Job Box, USB drive Box, and Fax Box.
What is Custom Box?

Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You
can create or delete a Custom Box.
The following operations are possible:
• Creating a new Custom Box
• Printing Document in a Custom Box
• Saving scanned documents to a Custom Box
• Sending Documents in a Custom Box
• Editing Documents in a Custom Box
• Deleting Documents in a Custom Box
NOTE
• To use Custom Box, a hard disk must be installed in the machine.
A hard disk is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for detail.
HD-15/HD-16 "Hard Disk" (page 11-6)
• The operation on Custom Box you perform from operation panel can also be made using Command Center RX.
What is Job Box?

Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box", "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box", "Repeat Copy Box",
and "Form for Form Overlay Box". These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
NOTE
• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.
Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-50)
• For details on operating the Job Box, refer to the following:
Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-18)
Repeat Copy Box

Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies
later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs (page 5-68)
NOTE
Repeat Copy function is not available when the Data Security Function is active.
5-53
Form for Form Overlay Box

Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store the
forms or images for overlaying.
NOTE
To use Form for Form Overlay Box, a hard disk must be installed in the machine.
A hard disk is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for details.
What is USB Drive Box?

A USB drive can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data directly
from the USB drive without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB drive in the PDF,
TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, high compression PDF, Word, Excel or PowerPoint format (Scan to USB).
NOTE
Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.
Fax Box
Fax Box store the fax data. The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of FAX functionality.
FAX Operation Guide
Basic Operation for Document Box

This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with custom
boxes.
NOTE
In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User Logon
privileges, refer to the following:
Editing Custom Box (page 5-59)
Box List
1 Sorts the box number, box name, owner name
5 4 and size of data saved in the box in ascending/
&XVWRP%R[
descending order.
&XVWRP%R[
&XVWRP%R[
6HDUFK
1R
2 This is a custom box. Select it to open it.
$GG(GLW (QHUJ\6DYHU
1 1R 1DPH 2ZQHU 8VHG

3 Displays the details for the selected box.
4 A box can be searched for by Box No. or Box
5HVHW
Name. Select either [Search (No.)] or [Search
3 (Name)] to switch between [Search (No.)] and
6WRS [Search (Name)].
6WDUW
5 Registers new boxes and checks, modifies or
)DYRULWHV
deletes box information.
2
5-54
Document List
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name or as
thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.
List 1 Selecting more than one document at a time.
10 9 8 7 6 2 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

3 Display the details for the selected document.
%DFN %R[ %R[ 4 Sorts the file name, date and time and size of
Search
5 data in ascending/descending order.
4
6WRUH)LOH 3ULQW 6HQG 2WKHUV
(QHUJ\6DYHU
)LOH1DPH 'DWHDQG7LPH 6L]H
1
5 A document can be searched for by Name.

6 The menu for document operations will be
2
5HVHW 3 displayed.
6WRS 7 Switches between list display and thumbnail
display.
6WDUW
8 Sends the selected documents.

9 Prints the selected documents.
10 Saves the document in the open box.
Thumbnail
10 9 8 7 6
%DFN %R[%R[
Search
5
1
6WRUH)LOH 3ULQW 6HQG 2WKHUV
(QHUJ\6DYHU
2
3 5HVHW
6WRS
6WDUW
NOTE
You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note that you cannot
select multiple documents when you are sending documents.
Viewing Box Details
1 Select [ ] (information icon) for the box whose details you

wish to check in the box list screen.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
2 Check the box details.
3 Select [Close].
The display returns to the default Document Box screen.
5-55
Editing Box Details
1 Select [Add/Edit] in the box list screen.
2 Select the box whose details you wish to edit and select [Edit].
NOTE
3 Edit the box details.

Enter new details.
4 If you have changed the details, select [OK] and then select
[OK] in the confirmation screen.
If you do not change the details, select [Cancel].
5 Select [Close].
Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details
1 Select a document to preview and then select [Others] >

[Preview].
2 Preview the document or check the document details.

The operations available in the preview screen are shown below.
1 Zoom out.
5 4 3 2 1
2 Zoom in.
&ORVH
3ULQW 6HQG 6HOHFW3DJHV =RRP,Q

=RRP2XW
3 Select to select any page of the open document
and print, send or copy to USB Drive.
(QHUJ\6DYHU
6L]H $
5HVROXWLRQ [GSL
&RORU )XOO&RORU
Selecting a Page (page 5-57)

5HVHW 4 Sends the selected documents.
6WRS 5 Prints the selected documents.
6WDUW
NOTE
The preview display can be controlled by moving your finger(s) on the touch panel.
Original Preview (page 2-24)
3 Confirm the document and select [Close].
5-56
Selecting a Page
When printing, sending, or copying a document within a Custom Box, you can specify any pages at will.
Select [Others] > [Page Selection] in the document list screen of the Custom Box, or [Page Selection] in the Preview
screen, to display the page selection screen.
Select the pages you want to work with, and select [Print], [Send], or [Copy to USB].
1 Selecting more than one document at a time.

8 7 6 4 3 5
2 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.
%DFN 6HOHFWHG3DJHV
3 Use a “,” (comma) to separate numbers when
specifying pages that are not consecutive.
1
3ULQW 6HQG &RS\WR86% 6HOHFW5DQJH (QWHU3DJHV
(QHUJ\6DYHU
4 Specify a continuous page range.

2 5 Displaying the number of pages selected.
5HVHW
6 Selected pages can be copied to USB drive.

6WRS
7 Selected pages can be sent.

6WDUW
8 Selected pages can be printed.
Printing Documents in Custom Box (page 5-61)

Sending Documents in Custom Box (page 5-63)
Moving Documents in Custom Box (page 5-64)
5-57
NOTE
• To use Custom Box, a hard disk must be installed in the machine.
• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges or
as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.
• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges to perform the following operations. They
cannot be performed with user privileges.
- Creating a box
- Deleting a box of which owner is another user.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Add/Edit]
2 Register the Custom Box.

1 [Add] > Enter the information for each item
Item Description
Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.
Box No. Enter the box number by selecting [+], [-] or number keys. The box number can
be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique number. If you
select [Auto] (0000), the smallest number available will be automatically
assigned.
Owner*1 Set the owner of the box. Select the owner from the user list that appears.
Permission*2 Select whether to share the box.
Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the
box. Entering a password is not mandatory. Enter the same password of up to
16 characters in both "Box Password" and "Confirmation".
This can be set if [Shared] is selected in Permission.
Usage The usage for a box can be restricted. To enable a capacity restriction enter a
Restriction value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by selecting [-],
[+] or number keys. You can enter a limit between 1 and 30,000 (MB).
Auto File Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time. Select [On] to
Deletion enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the numeric keys to enter
the number of days for which documents are stored. You can enter any number
between 1 and 31 (day(s)). To disable automatic file deletion, select [Off].
5-58
Item Description
Free Space Displays the free space on the box.
Overwrite Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new
Setting documents are stored. To overwrite old documents, select [Permit]. To retain
old documents, select [Prohibit].
Delete after Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is complete. To
Printed delete the document, select [On]. To retain the document, select [Off].
*1 Displayed when the user login administration is enabled.

*2 Not displayed when "Owner" is set to [No Owner].
2 Select [OK].
The Custom Box is created.
Editing Custom Box

2 Edit the custom box.

Select the box > [Edit] > Enter the information for each item > [OK]
NOTE
• When you have logged in as a user, you can only edit a box whose owner is set to that user.
• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.
When user login administration is enabled, the settings that can be changed varies depending
on the privileges of the logged in user.
5-59
Privileges Settings that can be changed

Administrator Box Name
Box No.
Owner
Permission
Usage Restriction
Auto File Deletion
Free Space
Overwrite Setting
Delete after Printed
User Box Name
Box Password
Usage Restriction
Auto File Deletion
Overwrite Setting
For details on each items, refer to the following:

Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-58)
3 [OK] > [Close]

Deleting Custom Box

2 Delete the custom box.

Select the box > [Delete] > [Delete]
NOTE
• When you have logged in as a user, you can only delete a box whose owner is set to that
user.
• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.
Storing Documents to a Custom Box

Custom box stores the print data which is sent from a PC. For the operation of the printing from the PC, refer to the
following:
5-60
Printing Documents in Custom Box

1 [Home] key > [Custom Box]
2 Select the box containing the document you want to print.
NOTE

1 Select the document in the list that you want to print by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
2 Select [Print].
3 Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-9)
NOTE
Select [Favorites] when registering or recalling favorites.
Recalling Favorites (page 5-12)
If a document stored from a computer is selected, the print settings selection screen
appears.
To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved), select
[Print As Is]. Select [Start Print] to start printing.
To change the print settings, select [Print after Change Settings (Use File Settings)] or
[Print after Change Settings (Do Not Use File Settings)] and change the print settings.
After a document saved in the machine is selected, [Use File Settings] may appear in the
setting screen for the feature to be used.
To use the settings saved with the document, select [Use File Settings].
If you need to change the print settings, select the desired feature.

Printing of the selected document begins.
5-61
Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box

[Home] key > [Custom Box]
3 Store the document.

1 Select the box > [Store File]

NOTE
• Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.
• Select [Favorites] when registering or recalling favorites.

The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box.
5-62
Sending Documents in Custom Box


[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box
NOTE
2 Send the document.

1 Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox.
NOTE
• You cannot select and send multiple documents.
2 Select [Send].
NOTE
Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear.
3 Set the destination.

For more information on selecting destinations, refer to the following:
IMPORTANT
Only when specifying the E-mail addresses which have encryption certificate from
the address book, [Email Encrypted TX] and [Digital Signature to Email] can be
used. When entering E-mail address from the operation panel, you can not use
these functions.
4 Set the sending size, original image, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
NOTE
Select [Favorites] when registering or recalling favorites.

Sending of the selected document begins.
5-63
Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address

of Logged in User
When user login is enabled, documents in the custom box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
Setting before send

Before using this function, the following are necessary.
• The function icon must be displayed in the home screen.
• An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.
Sending to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

When user login is enabled, documents in the custom box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
Send to the E-mail address of the logged in user. The procedure is as follows.
1 Select [Home] key.
2 Select [Send to Me(Email)].
NOTE
When this function is used, functions other than transmission cannot be used.
Moving Documents in Custom Box

NOTE
2 Move the documents.

1 Select the document in the list that you want to move by selecting the checkbox.
NOTE
2 [Others] > [Move/Copy] > [Move to Custom Box] > select the destination of move >
[Move] > [Move]
The selected document is moved.
NOTE
If the box to which the document is to be moved is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.
5-64
Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes

NOTE
2 Copy the documents.

1 Select the document in the list that you want to copy by selecting the checkbox.
NOTE
2 [Others] > [Move/Copy] > [Copy to Custom Box] > select the destination of copy >
[Copy] > [Copy]
The selected document is copied.
NOTE
If the box to which the document is to copied is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.
Copying Documents in Custom Box to USB Drive

NOTE
2 Copy the documents.

1 Select the document in the list that you want to copy by selecting the checkbox.
NOTE
2 [Others] > [Move/Copy] > [Copy to USB Drive] > select the destination of copy > [Next] >
[Copy] > [Copy]
The selected document is copied.
5-65
Joining Documents in Custom Box

You can join documents within a custom box into one file.
NOTE
You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the documents to be
joined beforehand.

NOTE
2 Join the document.

1 Select the documents in the list that you wish to join by selecting the checkbox.
You can join up to 10 documents.
NOTE
2 [Others] > [Join].
3 Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined.
Select the document you want to rearrange and select [Up] or [Down] to move it to the
correct place in the sequence.
4 [Next] > Enter the file name for the joined document
NOTE
Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.
5 [Join] > [Join]

The documents are joined.
NOTE
After joining, the original documents are left unchanged. Delete the documents if they
are no longer needed.
5-66
Deleting Documents in Custom Box

1 [Home] key > [Custom Box]
2 Select the box containing the document.
NOTE

1 Select the document in the list that you want to delete by selecting the checkbox.
NOTE
• [Delete] is disabled until a document is selected.
2 [Others] > [Delete] > [Delete]

5-67
Operation on the Machine > Job Box
Job Box
This section explains the Repeat Copy Box and the Form for Form Overlay Box. For Private Print/Stored Job Box and
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box, refer to the following:
Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-18)
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs

Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies
later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted. This
section explains how to print documents saved by the Repeat Copy function.

[Home] key > [Job Box] > [Repeat Copy]

If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys.
2 Specify the number of copies to print as desired > [Start Print]

Printing begins.
The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the power switch is turned off.
5-68
Operation on the Machine > Job Box
Form for Form Overlay

Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store the
forms or images for overlaying.
NOTE
To use Form for Form Overlay Box, a hard disk must be installed in the machine.
Storing a Form
You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the job box. One page can be registered in one form.

[Home] key > [Job Box] > [Form for Form Overlay]
3 Store the forms.

1 Select [Store File].
2 If necessary, select the image quality of original, scanning density, etc. before the original is
scanned.

The original is scanned and stored in the [Form for Form Overlay] box.
Deleting a Form Stored

You can delete the form stored in the job box

[Home] key > [Job Box] > [Form for Form Overlay]
2 Delete the forms.

Select the form to delete > [Delete] > [Delete]
The form is deleted.
5-69
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Drive
Operating using Removable USB Drive

Plugging USB drive directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB drive
without having to use a computer.
The following file types can be printed:
• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)
• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
• JPEG file
• XPS file
• OpenXPS file
• Encrypted PDF file
In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB drive connected to the machine.
The following file types can be stored:
• PDF file format
• TIFF file format
• JPEG file format
• XPS file format
• OpenXPS file format
• High-compression PDF file format
• Word file format
• Excel file format
• PowerPoint file format
NOTE
Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Drive

NOTE
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Use USB drive properly formatted by this machine.
• Plug the USB drive directly into the USB Memory Slot.
5-70
1 Plug the USB drive.

1 Plug the USB drive into the USB Memory Slot.
2 When the machine reads the USB drive, "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files." may
appear. Select [Continue].
Displays the USB Drive screen.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, select [USB Drive] on the Home screen.

1 Select the folder containing the file to be printed.
NOTE
• 1,000 documents can be displayed.
• To return to a higher level folder, select [UP].
2 Select the file to be printed > [Print]
3 Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.

USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-15)
NOTE
After a document saved in the machine is selected, [Use File Settings] may appear in
the setting screen for the feature to be used.
• To use the settings saved with the document, select [Use File Settings].
• If you need to change the print settings, select the desired feature.

Printing of the selected file begins.
5-71
Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB)

You can store scanned documents to a removal USB drive.
NOTE
The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.
2 Plug the USB Drive.

1 Plug the USB drive into the USB Memory Slot.
2 When the machine reads the USB memory, "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files."
may appear. Select [Continue].
Displays the USB Drive screen.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, select [USB Drive] on the Home screen.
3 Store the document.

1 Select the folder where the file will be stored.
2 Select [Store File].

For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-15)
4 Check the storing image.
5-72

The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB drive.
Check the USB Drive Information

1 In the USB Drive screen, select [USB Info].
2 Once you confirm the information, select [Close].
Removing USB Drive

IMPORTANT
Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB drive.

[Home] key > [USB Drive]
2 Select [Remove USB].

Select [OK], and remove the USB Drive after "USB Drive can be safely removed." is
displayed.
NOTE
USB drive can also be removed after checking the Device Information.
Device Information (page 7-13)
Tapping the USB drive icon shown at the top of the touch panel and selecting [Remove
USB] allows you to safely remove the USB drive.
Home Screen (page 2-15)
5-73
Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser
Using the Internet Browser

If the machine is connected to the network, you can browse the Internet on the touch panel.
NOTE
To use the internet browser, "Internet Browser" must be set to [On] in Function Settings.
Internet Browser (page 8-51)
Launching and Exiting the Browser

Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Internet Browser]
The Internet browser starts up.
2 Use the browser screen to browse web pages.

For information on how to use the browser screen, refer to the following:
Using the Browser Screen (page 5-75)
3 To exit the browser, select [X] (Close) and then select [OK] in the exit confirmation screen.
NOTE
You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed.
Browser Environment (page 8-51)
5-74
Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser
Using the Browser Screen

The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.
1 Back/Forward: Displays the previous page or

1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 the next page.
2 Reload: Updates the page.
3 Home page: Displays your specified home page.
You can set your home page in the Browser
Environment (page 8-51).
4 Security lock icon: Displayed when you are
viewing a protected page.
5 Enter URL: Use this to display a desired web
page by entering the URL for that page.
6 Text box: Pressing the text box displays a
keyboard that allows you to type text.
7 Search (Search Internet): Use the selected
search site to search with the entered keyword.
8 Menu: Displays the browser setup menu. You
can use this menu to specify the browser's
display magnification, set the text encoding
scheme and check the server certificate.
Retrieval in page: Search from the entered
keyword in the currently displayed page. You can
continue your search by selecting [SearchUp] or
[SearchDown].
9 Close: Closes the Internet browser and returns
you to the application list screen.
5-75
Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple
Manual Staple
You can staple copied paper manually without any print operation. It is useful when you have forgotten to set the staple
sort mode before starting copying, or when you want to staple originals.
NOTE
• This function requires the optional Document Finisher:
4,000-sheet Finisher (page 11-30)
100-sheet Staple Finisher (page 11-31)
• If there are no staples when manual stapling is performed, the stapling position lamps and stapling position key
LEDs all blink. Add staples.
Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher) (page 10-12)
Replacing Staples (100-sheet Staple Finisher) (page 10-14)
• Manual stapling cannot be executed when the machine is in operation.
Maximum number of sheets available for manual stapling

4,000-sheet Finisher
Paper weight
Paper size 52 - 90 g/m2 91 - 105 g/m2
(14.0 - 24.0 lb. Bond) (24.3 - 28.0 lb. Bond)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K 65 sheets 55 sheets
A3, B4, Folio, Ledger 30 sheets 30 sheets
100-sheet Staple Finisher
Paper weight
Paper size 52 - 90 g/m2 91 - 105 g/m2
(14.0 - 24.0 lb. Bond) (24.3 - 28.0 lb. Bond)
A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K 100 sheets 70 sheets
A3, B4, Folio, Ledger 50 sheets 35 sheets
Use the keys on the control section of the Finisher (optional) for manual stapling.
1 Stapling position lamps
2 Stapling position key
1 2 3
3 Stapling key / lamp
1 Press the stapling position key on the stapling control section.

The shutter of the paper exit area is opened and this equipment enters into the manual staple
mode.
5-76
Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple
2 Set the staple position.

Press the stapling position key to select the stapling position
(Back / Front / 2 Points ).
Operation is not possible while the stapling position lamps are blinking. Operate after the
lamps light solidly.
3 Load the paper.

Straighten the edges of the paper well and place
the paper front side down in the shutter opening
of the output unit. B A
If the near side of the paper ( ) will be stapled,
place the paper against the front guide (A).
If the far side of the paper ( ) will be stapled,

place the paper against the back guide (B).
If the edge of the paper ( ) will be stapled at

two points, place the paper with the center
aligned to the center point between the two side
guides (A and B).
CAUTION
Do not insert your hand inside the open shutter.
NOTE
• Press the stapling position key before you place the paper. Once the paper is placed, the
stapling position key cannot be used.
• The stapling lamp lights when the paper is properly placed. If it does not light, replace the
paper.
4 Staple the paper.

Let go of the paper, and then press the stapling key.
Stapling starts. Stapling finishes and the output is delivered to tray.
CAUTION
Be sure that your hands are away from the paper while stapling is in progress.
Finishing the manual staple mode

Press the stapling position key several times until the stapling position lamps turn off. The shutter of the paper exit area
closes. It means that manual stapling is finished.
If no operation is performed for approx. 10 seconds, the manual staple mode will be automatically finished.
NOTE
The time after which manual staple mode is automatically exited can be changed.
Manual Staple (page 8-52)
5-77
6 Using Various Functions
Functions Available on the Machine .............. 6-2 Negative Image ................................. 6-69
About Functions Available on the Mirror Image ...................................... 6-69
Machine .............................................. 6-2 Job Finish Notice .............................. 6-70
Copy ................................................... 6-2 File Name Entry ................................ 6-70
Send ................................................... 6-5 Priority Override ................................ 6-71
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Repeat Copy ..................................... 6-71
Send) .................................................. 6-9 DP Read Action ................................. 6-72
USB Drive (Store File, Printing Detect Multi-fed Originals .................. 6-72
Documents) ...................................... 6-15 Detect Stapled Originals ................... 6-72
Functions .................................................... 6-18 Skip Blank Page ................................ 6-73
Original Size ..................................... 6-19 2-sided/Book Original ........................ 6-73
Paper Selection ................................ 6-20 Sending Size ..................................... 6-74
Mixed Size Originals ......................... 6-22 Long Original ..................................... 6-75
Original Orientation ........................... 6-25 File Format ........................................ 6-75
Fold ................................................... 6-26 File Separation .................................. 6-82
Collate/Offset .................................... 6-28 Scan Resolution ................................ 6-82
Staple/Punch .................................... 6-29 Email Subject/Body ........................... 6-83
Paper Output .................................... 6-33 Send and Print .................................. 6-83
ID Card Copy .................................... 6-34 Send and Store ................................. 6-83
Org. Manual Feed (DP) .................... 6-34 FTP Encrypted TX ............................ 6-84
Density .............................................. 6-34 Email Encrypted TX .......................... 6-84
Original Image .................................. 6-35 Digital Signature Email ...................... 6-84
EcoPrint ............................................ 6-36 File Size Confirmation ....................... 6-85
Color Selection ................................. 6-36 Delete after Printed ........................... 6-85
Sharpness ......................................... 6-37 Delete after Transmitted .................... 6-86
Background Density Adj. Storing Size ....................................... 6-86
(Background Density Adjustment) .... 6-37 Encrypted PDF Password ................. 6-87
Prevent Bleed-thru ............................ 6-38 JPEG/TIFF Print ................................ 6-87
Contrast ............................................ 6-38 XPS Fit to Page ................................ 6-87
Erase Colors ..................................... 6-39
Zoom ................................................. 6-39
Combine ........................................... 6-42
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering ... 6-44
Border Erase, Border Erase/Full
Scan .................................................. 6-45
Erase Shadowed Areas .................... 6-47
Booklet .............................................. 6-47
Duplex ............................................... 6-52
Cover ................................................ 6-55
Form Overlay .................................... 6-56
Page # .............................................. 6-57
Memo Page ...................................... 6-59
Insert Sheets/Chapters ..................... 6-60
Image Repeat ................................... 6-61
Text Stamp ........................................ 6-62
Bates Stamp ..................................... 6-65
Handwriting Enhancement ................ 6-68
Continuous Scan .............................. 6-68
Auto Image Rotation ......................... 6-69
6-1
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Functions Available on the Machine

About Functions Available on the Machine
This machine provides the various functions available.
Copy
Each function is displayed in the Body when Global Navigation is selected.
&RSLHV
4XLFN6HWXS 2ULJLQDO6L]H
$XWR (QHUJ\6DYHU
2UJ3DSHU 3DSHU6HOHFWLRQ
)LQLVKLQJ $XWR
/D\RXW 0L[HG6L]H2ULJLQDOV ,QWHUUXSW
Global Navigation (GLW

2ULJLQDO2ULHQWDWLRQ
2II
,PDJH4XDOLW\
7RS(GJHRQ7RS
$GYDQFHG )ROG
5HVHW
Body
6HWXS 2II
&ROODWH2IIVHW
6WRS
&ROODWH2Q
6WDSOH3XQFK
2II 1XPHULF
3UHYLHZ 6WDUW
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW 3DSHU2XWSXW .H\SDG
For details on each function, see the table below.
Reference
Global Navigation Function Description
page
Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-19
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that page 6-20
contains the required paper size.
Mixed Size Scan the documents of different sizes that are page 6-22
Originals set in the document processor all at once.
Original Select the orientation of the original document page 6-25

Org./Paper/ Orientation top edge to scan correct direction.
Finishing Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-26
Configure the
settings for Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-28
originals, paper, Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-29
and finishing such
as collate and Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-33
staple.
ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's license page 6-34
or an insurance card. When you scan the front
and back of the card, both sides will be combined
and copied onto a single sheet.
Org. Manual Feed Multi-sheet documents such as slips can be read page 6-34
(DP) on the document processor whilst still bound
together. When placing a document on the
document processor, place one copy at a time.
6-2
Reference
page
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-39
Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page 6-42

page.
Margin/Centering Margin: Add margins (white space). In page 6-44

addition, you can set the margin width
and the back page margin.
Centering:Centers the original image on the
paper when copying onto paper
different from the original size.
Border Erase Erases the black border that forms around the page 6-45
image.
Erase Shadowed When scanning with the document processor page 6-47
Areas open, erase the extra shaded area.
Booklet Scan multiple original pages, then print copies so page 6-47
that they can be folded into a single booklet, with
a cover.
Layout/Edit Duplex Produces two-sided copies. page 6-52

Configure the You can also create single-sided copies from two-
settings for duplex sided originals.
printing and stamp.
Cover Adds a cover to the finished documents. page 6-55
Form Overlay Prints the original document overlaid with a form page 6-56
or image.
Page # Adds page numbers to the finished documents. page 6-57
Memo Page Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. page 6-59
Insert Sheets/ Insert a separator sheet, or make the first page of page 6-60
Chapters the chapter the front page when performing
duplex printing.
Image Repeat Tiles the original image on one sheet of paper. page 6-61
Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-62
Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-65
6-3
Reference
page
Density Adjust density. page 6-34
Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-35
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-36
Image Quality Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-37
Configure he
Background Removes dark background from originals, such page 6-37
settings for density,
Density Adj. as newspapers.
quality of copies,
and color balance.
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed- page 6-38
through when scanning thin original.
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and page 6-38
dark areas of the image.
Erase Colors Erases colors in the source document. page 6-39
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate page 6-68

batches and then produce as one job.
Auto Image Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees page 6-69

Rotation when the sizes of the original and the loaded
paper matches but the orientations are different.
Negative Image Inverts black and white portions of the image for page 6-69
printing.
Mirror Image Copies the mirrored image of the original. page 6-69
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-70
File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-70
Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top page 6-71
Advanced Setup priority.
Configure the Repeat Copy Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as page 6-71
settings for necessary after a copy job is completed.
continuous
scanning, mirror DP Read Action When the document processor is used, select page 6-72
image copies, and the scanning operation for the document
Skip Blank Page processor.
function. Detect Multi-fed When reading a document from the document page 6-72
Originals processor, if the multiple feeding of documents is
detected, then the reading stops automatically.
Detect Stapled When reading a document from the document page 6-72
Originals processor, if a stapled document is detected,
then the reading stops automatically.
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned page 6-73
document, this function skips the blank pages
and prints only pages that are not blank.
6-4
Send
'HVWLQDWLRQ 2ULJLQDO6L]H 'HVWLQDWLRQ

$XWR (QHUJ\6DYHU
4XLFN6HWXS 0L[HG6L]H2ULJLQDOV
2II
2UJ6HQG VLGHG%RRN2ULJLQDO
'DWD)RUPDW
Global Navigation 6HQGLQJ6L]H
VLGHG
,PDJH4XDOLW\
6DPHDV2ULJLQDO6L]H
$GYDQFHG 2ULJLQDO2ULHQWDWLRQ 3UHYLHZ
5HVHW
Body
6HWXS 7RS(GJHRQ7RS
2ULJLQDO
/RQJ2ULJLQDO
=RRP 6WRS
6HQG
)LOH)RUPDW
3')
)DYRULWHV
6WDUW
6KRUWFXW
)LOH6HSDUDWLRQ
Reference
page
2-sided/Book Select the type and orientation of the binding page 6-73
Original based on the original.
Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-74

Org./Sending Data Orientation top edge to scan correct direction.
Format
Long Original Reads long-sized original documents using a page 6-75
Configure the
document processor.
settings for original
type and file format. File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level page 6-75
can also be adjusted.
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original page 6-82
data page by specified number of pages, and
sends the files.
document processor, place one copy at a time.
6-5
Reference
page
Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-82
Fax TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to FAX
Operation
Guide.
Image Quality
Color Selection Select the color setting. page 6-36
Configure the
settings for density, Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-37
quality of copies,
and color balance. Background Removes dark background from originals, such page 6-37
6-6
Reference
page
Border Erase/Full Erases the black border that forms around the page 6-45
Scan image.
Fax Delayed Set a send time. Refer to FAX

Transmission Operation
Guide.

Email Subject/ Adds subject and body when sending a page 6-83
Body document.
iFax Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a Refer to FAX
document by i-FAX. Operation
Guide.
Fax Direct Sends FAX directly without reading original data Refer to FAX
Advanced Setup Transmission into memory. Operation
Guide.
Configure the
settings for Centering Centers the original image on the paper when page 6-44
transmission copy, sending onto paper different from the original
encrypted size.
transmission, and
file size Fax Polling RX Dial the destination and receive documents for Refer to FAX
confirmation. Polling Transmission stored in the polling box. Operation
Guide.
Send and Print Prints a copy of the document being sent. page 6-83
Send and Store Stores a copy of the document being sent in a page 6-83
Custom Box.
FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-84
Email Encrypted Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic page 6-84
TX certificate.
Digital Signature Add a digital signature to the email, using the page 6-84
Email electronic certificate.
Handwriting Emphasize the handwriting texts and lines by page 6-68

Enhancement changing their color to specified one.
File Size Checks the file size before sending/storing the page 6-85
Confirmation original.
Fax TX Report Print a report of fax transmission results. Refer to FAX

Operation
Guide.
6-7
Reference
page
Detect Multi-fed When reading a document from the document page 6-72
Advanced Setup Originals processor, if the multiple feeding of documents is
Configure the detected, then the reading stops automatically.
settings for Detect Stapled When reading a document from the document page 6-72
transmission copy, Originals processor, if a stapled document is detected,
encrypted then the reading stops automatically.
transmission, and
file size Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned page 6-73
confirmation. document, this function skips the blank pages
and sends only pages that are not blank.
6-8
Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send)

%DFN
4XLFN6HWXS 2ULJLQDO6L]H )UHH6SDFH
$XWR (QHUJ\6DYHU
Global Navigation )XQFWLRQV 0L[HG6L]H2ULJLQDOV

2II
VLGHG%RRN2ULJLQDO
VLGHG
2ULJLQDO2ULHQWDWLRQ
7RS(GJHRQ7RS
6WRULQJ6L]H 3UHYLHZ
5HVHW
Body
6DPHDV2ULJLQDO6L]H
2ULJLQDO
2UJ0DQXDO)HHG'3
=RRP 6WRS
6WRUH
3UHYHQW%OHHGWKUX
6WDUW
)DYRULWHV 6KRUWFXW 'HQVLW\
Store File
Reference
page

Orientation top edge to scan correct direction.
Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-86
Functions document processor, place one copy at a time.
Configure the Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed- page 6-38
settings when through when scanning thin original.
storing the
document in the Density Adjust density. page 6-34
Custom Box.
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-37

Centering Centers the original image on the paper when page 6-44
storing onto paper different from the original size.
6-9
Reference
page
Scan image.

Functions
Configure the
settings when Detect Multi-fed When reading a document from the document page 6-72
storing the Originals processor, if the multiple feeding of documents is
document in the detected, then the reading stops automatically.
Custom Box.
and stores only pages that are not blank.
6-10
Print
Reference
page
Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-28
Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-33
Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-29
Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page 6-42

page.
Duplex Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, page 6-52

or
2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided.
Margin/Centering Margin: Add margins (white space). In page 6-44

addition, you can set the margin width
and the back page margin.
Centering:Centers the original image on the
paper when copying onto paper
Functions different from the original size.
Configure the Page # Adds page numbers to the finished documents. page 6-57
settings for paper
selection and Booklet Print document so that it can be folded into a page 6-47
duplex printing single booklet, with a cover.
when printing from
the Custom Box. Form Overlay Prints the original document overlaid with a form or page 6-56
image.
Cover Adds a cover to the finished documents. page 6-55
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-36
priority.
Delete after Automatically deletes a document from the box page 6-85
Printed once printing is complete.
Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-26
6-11
Reference
page

Image Quality
Configure the Background Removes dark background from originals, such page 6-37
settings for density, Density Adj. as newspapers.
quality of copies,
and color balance.
6-12
Send
Reference
page
File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level page 6-75
Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-74
sending onto paper different from the original
size.
Fax TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to FAX
Operation
Guide.
Fax Delayed Set a send time. Refer to FAX

Transmission Operation
Guide.
Email Subject/ Adds subject and body when sending a page 6-83
Body document.
Functions
iFax Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a Refer to FAX
Configure the document by i-FAX. Operation
settings for file Guide.
format and FAX
transmission when Delete after Automatically deletes a document from the box page 6-86
sending from the Transmitted once transmission is complete.
Custom Box.
FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-84
Email Encrypted Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic page 6-84
TX certificate.
Digital Signature Add a digital signature to the email, using the page 6-84
Email electronic certificate.
sends the files.
File Size Checks the file size before sending/storing the page 6-85
Confirmation original.
Fax TX Report Print a report of fax transmission results. Refer to FAX

Operation
Guide.
6-13
Reference
page
Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-82
Image Quality Color Selection Select the color setting. page 6-36
Configure the Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-37
settings for density,
quality of copies, Background Removes dark background from originals, such page 6-37
and color balance. Density Adj. as newspapers.
6-14
USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents)

%DFN 5HPRYH86%'ULYH
4XLFN6HWXS 2ULJLQDO6L]H )UHH6SDFH
$XWR (QHUJ\6DYHU
Global Navigation )XQFWLRQV 0L[HG6L]H2ULJLQDOV

2II
VLGHG%RRN2ULJLQDO
VLGHG
2ULJLQDO2ULHQWDWLRQ
7RS(GJHRQ7RS
6WRULQJ6L]H
5HVHW
Body
6DPHDV2ULJLQDO6L]H
2ULJLQDO
2UJ0DQXDO)HHG'3
=RRP 6WRS
6WRUH
3UHYHQW%OHHGWKUX
6WDUW
6KRUWFXW 'HQVLW\
Store File
Reference
page

Orientation top edge to scan correct direction.
Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-86
Functions together. When placing a document on the
Configure the document processor, place one copy at a time.
settings for color Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed- page 6-38
selection and through when scanning thin original.
document name
when storing the Density Adjust density. page 6-34
document in the
USB drive. Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-35

storing onto paper different from the original size.
6-15
Reference
page
Scan image.

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level page 6-75
Functions
sends the files.
Configure the
settings for color Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-62
selection and
document name
when storing the Handwriting Emphasize the handwriting texts and lines by page 6-68
document in the Enhancement changing their color to specified one.
USB drive.
Detect Multi-fed When reading a document from the document page 6-72
Originals processor, if the multiple feeding of documents is
and stores only pages that are not blank.
Long Original Reads long-sized original documents using a page 6-75

document processor.
6-16
Print
Reference
Global Navigation Function key Description
page
Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-28
Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-33
Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-29
Duplex Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets. page 6-52
Margin Add margins (white space). In addition, you can page 6-44
set the margin width and the back page margin.
Functions
Configure the
settings for paper EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-36
selection and
duplex printing
priority.
when printing from
the USB drive. Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-26
Encrypted PDF Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF page 6-87
Password data.
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or page 6-87
TIFF files.
XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the page 6-87
selected paper size when printing XPS file.
6-17
Using Various Functions > Functions
Functions
On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.
Icon Description
Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Org./Paper Example:Select [Org./Paper/Finishing] in the Copy screen to use the function.
Copy
/Finishing

Org./Sending Example:Select [Org./Sending Data Format] in the Send screen to use the function.
Send Data Format

Custom Functions Example:Select [Functions] in the Custom Box screen to use the function.
Box

USB Functions Example:Select [Functions] in the USB Drive screen to use the function.
Drive
6-18
Original Size
Org./Paper Org./Sending
Copy Send Custom Functions USB Functions
/Finishing Data Format Box Drive
Specify the original size to be scanned.

Select [Auto (Document Processor)], [Metric], [Inch], [Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
Item Value Description
Auto — Have the size of original detected automatically.

(Document
Processor)
Metric A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B4, B5-R, B5, Select from the Metric series standard sizes.
B6-R, B6, Folio, 216 x 340 mm
Inch Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Select from the Inch series standard sizes.
Statement, 11" × 15", Oficio II
Others 8K, 16K-R, 16K, Hagaki (Cardstock), Select from special standard sizes and custom
Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Custom 1-4*1 sizes.
Size Entry Metric Enter the size not included in the standard
X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments) sizes.*2
Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments) When you have selected [Size Entry], select [+]
or [-] to set the sizes of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"
Inch (vertical). Select the entry field to use the
X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments) numeric keys for entry.
Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to the following:
Custom Original Size (page 8-12)
*2 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:
NOTE
Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.
6-19
Paper Selection
Org./Paper
Copy Custom Functions USB
Functions
/Finishing Box Drive
Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size.
Select from [1] (Cassette 1) to [5] (Cassette 5) to use the paper contained in that cassette.
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.
NOTE
• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.
• Cassettes after Cassette 2 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
In case of changing the paper size and the media type of the multi purpose tray, select [Change Multipurpose Tray
Settings] and change Paper Size and Media Type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table
below.
Paper Metric A3*1*2, A4-R*1*2, A4*1*2, Select from the Metric standard size.
Size A5-R*1*2, A5*1, A6*1*2, B4*1*2,
B5-R*1*2, B5*1*2, B6*1*2,
Folio*1*2, 216 × 340 mm,
SRA3*1*2
Inch Ledger*1*2, Letter-R*1*2, Select from the Inch standard size.

Letter*1*2, Legal*1*2,
Statement*1*2, 12" × 18"*1*2,
Executive, Oficio II
Others 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO5, Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.
Envelope#10, Envelope#9,
Envelope#6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Envelope C4,
Hagaki (Cardstock), *1*2,
Oufukuhagaki (Return
postcard), Kakugata 2,
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3,
Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4,
Custom 1-4*3
Size Metric Enter the size not included in the standard size.*4
Entry X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm When you have selected [Size Entry], use [+]/[-] or the
increments) numeric keys to set the sizes of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"
Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1 mm (vertical).
increments) Select the entry field to use the numeric keys for entry.
Inch
X: 5.83 to 18" (in 0.01"
increments)
Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01"
increments)
Media type Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*5, Bond, Cardstock,
Color, Prepunched*5, Letterhead*5, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Index Tab
Dividers, Custom 1-8*6
6-20
*1 Paper size automatically detected in the cassette.

*2 Paper size automatically detected in the Multipurpose Tray.
*3 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following:
Custom Paper Settings (page 8-16)
*4 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:
*5 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
*6 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:
NOTE
• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.
• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multipurpose tray, a confirmation screen
appears. Load the required paper in the multipurpose tray and select [Continue] to start copying.
6-21
Mixed Size Originals

Copy Send Custom Functions USB
Functions
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once.
This function cannot be used if platen is used. Different Width is not displayed in inch models.
Copying
Metric Models
Off
Mixed Size Original Width Same Width, Different Width Select options for the width of set original.
Copies
Same Size Original Width Same Width, Different Width Select options for the width of set original.
Copies
Top Page Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left Select the original orientation of the first
Direction page.
Inch Models
Off
Mixed Size Original Width Same Width Originals are detected individually for size
Copies and copied to the same size paper as
originals.
Same Size Original Width Same Width Select the original orientation of the first
Copies page.
Top Page Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left
Direction
Sending/Storing
Mixed Size Originals Off
Same Width Scans and sends/stores multiple sheets of

the same width using the document
processor.
Different Width Scans and sends/stores multiple sheets of

different width using the document
processor.
6-22
Supported Combinations of Originals
Same Width
When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.
• B4 and B5
• Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
• Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
Example: B4 and B5
NOTE
When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original Size" to
[On] for "Folio".
Folio and A4
Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-11)
Different Width (Available for metric models only)

The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
• A3, B4, A4, B5
• B4, A4-R, B5
• A4-R, B5-R, Folio
Example: A3, B4, A4, B5
* *
* Set the originals of A4 and B5 with vertical orientation.
NOTE
• Number of sheet that can be placed in the document processor: up to 30 sheets
• When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original Size" to
[On] for "Folio".
A4-R, B5-R, and Folio
Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-11)
IMPORTANT
When placing originals of different width, arrange the originals so that their left sides and top sides are
aligned, and place the originals in alignment with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned in this
way, they may not be scanned correctly, and skewing or original jams may result.
6-23
Selecting How to Copy Originals

Set the paper size (copy size) when printing scanned document. Select whether you wish to create individual copies on
different size paper matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size paper.
NOTE
This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.
Mixed Size Copies

Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals.
B4 A4-R B5 B4 A4-R B5
Same Size Copies

Originals are all copied to the same size paper.
B4 A4-R B5 B4 B4 B4
6-24
Original Orientation
Functions
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.
• Zoom • Page #
• Duplex • Booklet
• Margin/Centering • Stapling/Punch (optional feature)
• Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan • 2-sided/Book Original
• Combine • Text Stamp
• Memo page • Bates Stamp
NOTE
If [On] is selected in the setting for Original Orientation in System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation
appears when you select any of the above functions.
Orientation Confirmation (page 8-21)
Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left] or [Auto].
Item Image
Top Edge on
Top
Original Original orientation
Top Edge on
Left
Original Original orientation
Auto*1
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
NOTE
The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.
Original Orientation (Copy) (page 8-34)
6-25
Fold
Org./Paper
Functions
Folds the finished documents. Select the fold method.

The following folding options and orientations are available.
Original orientation Orientation: Landscape Orientation: Portrait
Item
Bi-Fold Saddle Stitch*1
Inside*1*2
Outside*1*2
Multi-sheet Fold*1 Set whether or not multiple pages of the printed document are stacked and
folded. This is set to [On] when saddle stitch stapling is set.
Tri-Fold Inside R to L/B to T

*1*2
L to R/T to B
Outside R to L/B to T
*1*2
L to R/T to B
Multi-sheet Fold*1 Set whether or not multiple pages of the printed document are stacked and
folded.
6-26
Original orientation Orientation: Landscape Orientation: Portrait
Item
Z-Fold*2 R to L/B to T
L to R/T to B
Multi-sheet Fold Set whether or not multiple pages of the printed document are stacked and
folded.
Engineering Fold*2
(Half Z-Fold)
*1 Appears when the optional folding unit is installed.

*2 Appears when the optional Z-Fold Unit is installed.
NOTE
• Folding requires the optional 4,000-sheet Finisher or 100-sheet Staple Finisher, and the folding unit or Z-Fold Unit.
• For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be folded, refer to the following.
ZF-7100 "Z-Fold Unit" (Option for TASKalfa 6004i/TASKalfa 7004i) (page 11-4)
• Multi-sheet Fold during copying is performed by the Folding Unit when the Folding Unit and Z-Fold Unit are installed.
6-27
Collate/Offset
Org./Paper
Functions
Offsets the output by page or set.
Item Image Description
Off
Collate On Scans multiple originals and delivers complete sets of

copies as required according to page number.
Offset Each Printed copies are collated and output as individual pages
Page separately.
NOTE
This function requires the optional Document Finisher:
Inner Finisher (page 11-28)
Inner Shift Tray (page 11-34)
Offset Each Printed copies are collated and output as individual set
Set separately.
NOTE
Inner Shift Tray (page 11-34)
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Offset are Legal, Ledger, Oficio II, Letter, A3, A4, B4, B5, 216 × 340 mm and 8K, 16K.
6-28
Staple/Punch
Org./Paper
Copy Custom Functions USB Functions
Staple
Staples the finished documents. The staple position can be selected.
NOTE
Staple Off
Top Left Select the staple position, and then select [Next >].
For details on original orientation and staple position, refer to the
Top Right
following:
2 staples Left Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position (page 6-32)
2 staples Top
2 staples Right
Saddle Stitch Select whether to fold the finished documents in two with staples in the
center.
When placing originals, be sure to place the cover page at the bottom.
For details on saddle stitching, refer to the following:
Booklet (page 6-47)
Original Orientation Top Edge on Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct
Top, Top Edge direction. Select [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the
on Left, Auto*1 originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
6-29
Original Orientation and Staple Position

1,000-sheet Finisher, 4,000-sheet Finisher, 100-sheet Staple Finisher
Original orientation Paper orientation Top Edge on Left
Paper orientation
Cassette paper load

direction
Cassette paper load

direction
Inner Finisher
Original orientation Paper orientation Top Edge on Left
Paper orientation
Cassette paper load

direction
Cassette paper load

direction
NOTE
One position staple is not slanted for the following paper sizes.
B5-R, 16K-R
6-30
Mixed Size Stapling

Even with mixed paper sizes, if the sizes have the same width as shown in the combinations below, the output can be stapled.
• A3 and A4
• B4 and B5
A4 A3
• Ledger and Letter B5 B4
Letter Ledger
• Ledger and Letter-R
• 8K and 16K
A4 A3
B5 B4
Letter Ledger
Letter-R Legal
Letter-R Legal
• A3 and A4 (A3 Z fold and A4)

• B4 and B5 (B4 Z fold and B5)
A4 A3
• Ledger and Letter (Ledger Z fold and Letter) B5 B4
Letter Ledger
• 8K and 16K (8K Z fold and 16K)
NOTE
• Number of sheets that can be stapled: up to 30 sheets.
• When performing Mixed Size Stapling, refer to the following:
Punch
Punches holes in sets of finished documents.
NOTE
• This function requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.
• For details on paper sizes that can be punched, refer to the following:
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) (page 11-28)
Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet/100-sheet Staple Finisher) (page 11-31)
• The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole punching.
6-31

Punch Off
2 holes Left Select the position of punch holes. For details on original
orientation and position of punch holes, refer to the
2 holes Top
following:
2 holes Right Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position (page
3 holes Left 6-32)
3 holes Top
3 holes Right
4 holes Left
4 holes Top
4 holes Right
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Select the orientation of the original document top edge
Orientation Auto*1 to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]
to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].
Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position
Image Original orientation
Original Print results Glass platen Document processor
NOTE
The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole
punching.
6-32
Paper Output
Org./Paper
Functions
Specify the output tray.
with optional Job Separator
Item Description
Inner tray Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine.
Job Separator Tray Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.
with optional 1,000-sheet Finisher
Item Description
Job Separator Tray*1 Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.
Finisher Tray Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document Finisher.
*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: A3, Ledger.
with optional 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher
Item Description
Tray A Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher.
Tray B Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher.

When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and tray B is set for the output
destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.
with optional Mailbox
Item Description
Tray A Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher.
Tray B Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher.

When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and tray B is set for the output
destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.
Tray 1 to 7 Delivery to tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox.
When [Heavy 3] to [Heavy 4] (164 g/m2 - 256 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is
set for the output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray B.
When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is set for the
output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.
6-33
NOTE
• This can be set when the optional Job Separator or Document Finisher (1,000-sheet Finisher, 4,000-sheet Finisher,
or 100-sheet Staple Finisher) is installed. This cannot be set when the optional Inner Finisher is installed.
• The default setting for Paper Output can be changed.
ID Card Copy
Org./Paper
Copy /Finishing
Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card,
both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Org. Manual Feed (DP)

Functions
Multi-sheet documents such as slips can be read on the document processor whilst still bound together. When placing a
document on the document processor, place one copy at a time.
NOTE
• Requires the optional Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed Detection).
• Documents can be placed if the total thickness of the multi-sheet document is 220 g/m2 or less.
Density
Image Image • Functions
Copy Send Custom USB Functions
Quality Quality Box • Image Quality Drive
Adjust density.
Adjust density selecting [-4] (Lighter) to [+4] (Darker).
6-34
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
Copying
Text+Photo*1 Original Type Printer Output Best for mixed text and photo documents printed on this
machine originally.
Book/Magazine Best for mixed text and photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Highlighter Off, On Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and
Enhancement (Normal), On markings made with highlighter pen.
(Bright) If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
Photo Original Type Printer Output Best for photos printed on this machine originally.
Book/Magazine Best for photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Photo Paper Best for photos taken with a camera.
Text Light Text/Fine Off Best for documents that are mostly text and were originally
Line printed on this machine.
On Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Graphic/Map Original Type Printer Output Best for maps and diagrams printed on this machine
originally.
Book/Magazine Best for maps and diagrams printed in a magazine.
*1 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
Sending/Printing/Storing
Text+Photo Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.
6-35
Text Light Text/Fine Off Best for documents that are mostly text and were originally printed
Line on this machine.
On Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Text (for OCR) Scanning produces an image that is suitable for OCR. This
function is only available when Color Selection is set to Black and
White.
EcoPrint
Image
Copy Custom Functions USB Functions
Quality Box Drive
EcoPrint saves toner when printing.

Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not required.
Off
On Toner Save Level [1] (Lower) to [5] Adjust the Toner Save Level.
(Higher)
Color Selection
Select the color setting.
Image • Functions
Send Custom USB Functions
Quality Box • Image Quality Drive
Item Description
Auto (Color/Grayscale) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and scan
color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale.
Auto (Color/B & W) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and scan
color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White.
Full Color Scans the document in full color.
Grayscale Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.
Black & White Scans the document in black and white.
6-36
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.

When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward
"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns
appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".
When [All] is selected, select [-3] to [3] (Blur - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
When [Text/Fine Line] is selected, select [0] to [3] (Normal - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
Less Sharp Original More Sharp
All [+1] to [+3] Emphasizes the image outline.

(Sharpen)
[-1] to [-3] (Blur) Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.
Text/Fine Line [0] to [3] Makes letters and lines appear sharper.
(Normal - Only text and fine lines are emphasized.
Sharpen)
*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Background Density Adj. (Background Density

Adjustment)
Copy Send Custom USB
Functions
Quality Quality Box
• Image Quality Drive
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.

If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the
density of the ground color.
Item Description
Off Does not adjust the ground color.
Auto Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.
Manual Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.
6-37
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.
Contrast
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.
Lower Original Higher
Item Description
[+1] to [+4] (Higher) Increases the sharpness of colors.
[-1] to [-4] (Lower) Creates smoother colors.
6-38
Erase Colors
Erases colors in the source document.
Off
On Yellow, Red, Cyan, Select the colors to erase. You can select up to 6 colors.
Magenta, Green, Blue,
Black
Color Range 1 (Narrower) to 5 Choose a range of colors to erase. For example, if you
(Wider) specify yellow and select [5 (Wider)] from the color range,
greens and reds close to yellow will be erased.
NOTE
If you select only [Black], you cannot set the Color Range.
Zoom
Advanced
Copy Layout/Edit Send Custom Functions USB
Functions
Setup Box Drive
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
Copying
The following zoom options are available.
Auto
Adjusts the image to match the paper size.
A4: 141%
A5
A6: 70%
6-39
Standard Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Metric 400% Max. Inch Models 400% Max.

Models 200% A5 >> A3 200% Statement >>Ledger
141% A4 >> A3 A5 >> A4 154% Statement>>Legal
127% Folio>>A3 129% Letter>>Ledger
106% 11"x15">>A3 121% Legal>>Ledger
100% 100%
90% Folio>>A4 78% Legal>>Letter
75% 11"x15">>A4 77% Ledger>>Letter
70% A3 >> A4 A4 >> A5 64% Ledger>>Letter
50% 50% Ledger>>Statement
25% Min. 25% Min.
Others
Reduces or enlarges at magnifications other than the Standard Zoom.
Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Metric 115% B5>>A4 Inch Models 141% A5>>A4

Models 86% A4>>B5 115% B5>>A4
129% Statement>>Letter 90% Folio>>A4
78% Legal>>Letter 86% A4>>B5
64% Letter>>Statement 70% A4>>A5
Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. Use the numeric keys or
select [+] or [-] to enter the any magnification.
6-40
XY Zoom
Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually. Magnifications can be set in 1% increments between 25% and
400%.
XY Zoom X: 25 to 400% Select vertical and horizontal

(in 1% increments) magnifications individually.
Y: 25 to 400% Select [+] or [-] to change the displayed
(in 1% increments) magnifications of "X" (horizontal) and
"Y" (vertical).
Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys
for entry.
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Select the orientation of the original
Left, Auto*1 document top edge to scan correct
direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose
orientation of the originals, either [Top
Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
Printing/Sending/Storing
Item Description
100% Reproduces the original size.
Auto Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.
NOTE
• To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.
• Some combinations of original size and paper size or sending size may cause the image to be positioned at the
edge of the paper. To center the original vertically and horizontally on the page, use the Centering function.
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering (page 6-44)
6-41
Combine
Copy Layout/Edit Custom
Box
Functions
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.

You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.
The following types of the boundary lines are available.
None Solid Line Dotted Line Positioning Mark
Off
2 in 1 Layout 2 in 1 (Left to Right/Top to Bottom), Select the page layout of scanned originals.
2 in 1 (Right to Left/Bottom to Top)
Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Select the boundary line type.
Positioning Mark Select [Border Line] to select the page
boundary line.
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Select the orientation of the original document
Orientation Left, Auto*1 top edge to scan correct direction.
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
4 in 1 Layout 4 in 1 (Right then Down), Select the page layout of scanned originals.
4 in 1 (Left then Down),
4 in 1 (Down then Right),
4 in 1 (Down then Left)
Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Select the boundary line type.
Positioning Mark Select [Border Line] to select the page
boundary line.
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Select the orientation of the original document
Orientation Left, Auto*1 top edge to scan correct direction.
orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
6-42
Layout image
Item Image
2 in 1 L to R/T to B
R to L/B to T
4 in 1 Right then Down
Left then Down
Down then Right
Down then Left
NOTE
• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode are A4, A5, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,
Oficio II, and 16K.
• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
6-43
Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering

Advanced
Copy Layout/Edit Send Custom Functions USB Functions
Setup Box Drive
Copying/Printing
Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the margin width and the back page margin.
Centering: Centers the original image on the paper when copying onto paper different from the original size.
NOTE
The default setting for margin width can be changed.
Margin Default (page 8-35)
Off
Margin Margin Metric: -18 mm to +18 mm Set the margin width.*1

(in 1 mm increments) Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the margins for
Inch: -0.75 to +0.75" "Left/Right" and "Top/Bottom".
(in 0.01" increments)
Back Page Auto, Manual For duplex copying, select [Back Page] and select
[Auto] or [Manual].
When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is
applied automatically on the rear page depending on a
margin specified for the front page and a binding
orientation.
When [Manual] is set, you can set a different margin
than the front on the back. Set the margin in the screen
that is displayed. The setting selections are the same as
for the front.
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top edge
Orientation Top Edge on Left, to scan correct direction.
Auto*2 Select [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on
Left].
Centering*3 Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top edge
Orientation Top Edge on Left, to scan correct direction.
Auto*2 Select [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on
Left].
*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.

*3 Not displayed when printing from USB drive.
6-44
Sending/Storing
When you have sent/stored the original after specifying the original size and sending size, depending on these sizes, a
margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the Centering function, the image is placed with a
margin equally created for all edges.
Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan

Advanced
Functions
Setup Box Drive
Erases the black border that forms around the image.
Standard
Erase the black frame created in the original. Erasing width is fixed.
Original Finishing
Full Scan
Scan originals without white margins. No border erase.
Original Finishing
Border Erase Sheet

Erase the black frame created in the original. Erasing width can be adjusted.
Original Finishing
Border Erase Book

Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such
as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.
Original Finishing
6-45
Individual Border Erase

You can specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
Original Finishing
NOTE
• [Full Scan] is not displayed when copying.
• The default setting for border erase width can be changed.
Border Erase Default (page 8-33)
• The default width for back page can be changed.
Border Erase to Back Page (page 8-33)
Standard Scan originals with Standard Mode.
Full Scan*1 Scan originals without white margins.
Border Erase Border Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm Set the border erase width.*2

Sheet (in 1 mm increments) Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the value.
Inch: 0.00 to 2.00"
Back Page Same as Front Page, For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page] and then
Do Not Erase select [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
Border Erase Border Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm Set the border erase width around the edges and in
Book (in 1 mm increments) the center of the book.*2
Inch: 0.00 to 2.00" Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the value.
Individual Border Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm Set the border erase width individually for all
Border Erase (in 1 mm increments) edges.*2
Inch: 0.00 to 2.00" Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the value.
Original Top Edge on Top, Top Select the orientation of the original document top
Orientation Edge on Left, Auto*3 edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original
Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,
either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
*1 Not displayed when copying.

6-46
Erase Shadowed Areas

Advanced
Functions
Setup Box Drive
When scanning with the document processor open, erase the extra shaded area.
NOTE
In case the Document processor or the original cover is not opened sufficiently, it might not be able to erase the
shaded area.
Prevent Light Reflection (page 8-12)
Booklet
Box
Functions
The Booklet option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. A
booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.
You can print the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multipurpose
tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette or inserter, refer to the following:
NOTE
Using the optional 4,000-sheet Finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your copies (fold them in two
with staples in the center). Supported paper sizes are A3, A4-R, B4, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal, Oficio II and 8K.
Type of original Original size Paper size
One-sided original, All*1 A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger,
Two-sided original Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Oficio II and 8K
Book Original A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R

and 8K
*1 Except for custom sized originals.
Binding on the left side

The folded copies can be read from left to right.
Original Copy
6-47
Binding on the right side

The folded copies can be read from right to left.
Original Copy
Top binding
The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.
Original Copy
Copying
Off
1-sided >> Binding in Finishing Left, Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.
Booklet
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original
Top Edge on Left, document top edge to scan correct
Auto*1 direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
Cover*2 Off
Cover: Do Not Print, Select whether to add the cover. Select the
Front Cover Front Only, printing method for the cover to be
Print Setting Back Only, Duplex inserted.
Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and
Cover: Do Not Print, specify the print setting for the cover to be
Back Cover Front Only, inserted. Select from [Do Not Print], [Back
Print Setting Back Only, Duplex Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and
press [OK].
Staple/Fold Off, Fold Only, To fold finished copies in half, select

Saddle Stitch [Staple/Fold] and then select [Fold Only].
To use saddle stitching, select [Staple/
Fold] and then select [Saddle Stitch].
6-48
2-sided >> Binding in Original Left/Right, Top Select the binding direction of originals.
Booklet
Binding in Finishing Left, Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original
Top Edge on Left, document top edge to scan correct
Auto*1 direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Then press [OK].
Cover*2 Off
Back Cover Front Only, inserted. Select from [Do Not Print], [Back
press [OK].

Book >> Binding in Original Left, Right Select the binding direction of originals.
Booklet*3
Binding in Finishing Left, Right Select the binding orientation of copies.
Cover Off, On Select whether to add the cover. Select

[Cover] to select [Cover], and select [OK].

*2 Printing is not possible when feeding from the inserter.
*3 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".
6-49
Printing
Off
Booklet Binding Left, Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.
Cover*1 Off
Back Cover Front Only, inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back
press [OK].

NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be folded or Saddle Stitch stapled varies depending on paper weight. For details,
• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to place the originals in page order.
6-50
Binding direction, and Orientation of cover and original

When feeding the cover from the inserter, the setting orientation of the cover and the original differs depending on the
[Binding in Finishing] or [Binding] setting.
1: Front cover 2: Back cover
Item Orientation Image
Inserter Document Processor
Left
1
1 3 57
Right
1
75
31
Top*1
1
1
3
5
7
*1 Set [Top Edge on Left] for Original Orientation.
6-51
Duplex
Copy Layout/Edit Custom Functions USB

Drive
Functions
Box
Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals.
The following modes are available.
One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd
number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
Original Copy
The following binding options are available.

A B
ghi
ghi A Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
def ghi
abc
abc abc B Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
def
def Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation
when turning the pages.
Original Copy
Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets.
Place originals in the document processor.
Original Copy • Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. Place originals in
the document processor.
Original Copy
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Duplex mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Hagaki
(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) and Custom 1 to 4.
6-52
Book to One-sided
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book original.
Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right.
Original Copy Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left.
NOTE
• The original sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K
• The paper sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A4-R, A4, A5, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R and 16K
Book to Two-sided
Book to Book to Produces two-sided copies from an open book original with
2-sided Book facing pages.
Original Copy
NOTE
• The original sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K
• The paper sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A4-R, A4, A5, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R and 16K
6-53
Copying
Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided. Select the binding
orientation for original and finished documents.
1-sided>>1-sided ― Disables the function.
1-sided>>2-sided Finishing Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top
Orientation Top Edge on Left, edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original
Auto*1 Orientation] to choose orientation of the
originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
on Left].
2-sided>>1-sided Original Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of originals.
on Left].
2-sided>>2-sided Original Left/Right, Top Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.
on Left].
Book >> 1-sided*2 Original Left, Right Select the binding direction of originals.
Book >> 2-sided*2 Original Left, Right Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing Book>>2-sided, Select the desired Duplex option.

Book>>Book
When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.
After scanning all originals, select [Finish Scan] to start copying.
Printing
Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets.
1-sided ― Disables the function.
2-sided Finishing Left/Right Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for
binding on the left or right.
Top Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for
binding on the top.
6-54
Cover
Copy Layout/Edit Custom Functions

Box
Adds a cover to the finished documents.

You can print the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper source
than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multipurpose tray.
To feed the cover paper from the cassette or inserter, refer to the following:
The printing method can be set for the covers. Specify a print setting for each cover.
Off
Front Cover Front Cover Print Do Not Print, Front Different paper has to be inserted for the first
Setting*1 Only, Back Only*2, page of the document.
Duplex*2 Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only], [Back
Only], or [Duplex] for the print setting of the
inserted paper.
Front and Back Front Cover Print Do Not Print, Front Different paper has to be inserted for the first
Covers Setting*1 Only, Back Only*2, page and last page of the document.
Duplex*2 Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only], [Back
Back Cover Print Do Not Print, Front Only], or [Duplex] for the print setting of the
Setting*1 Only, Back Only*2, inserted paper.
Duplex*2

*2 [Back Only] and [Duplex] appears when finishing is set to 2-sided in "Duplex".
Duplex (page 6-52)
6-55
Form Overlay
Copy Layout/Edit Custom Functions

Box
Prints the original document overlaid with a form or image.

Once you scan and register the form, the form is overlaid onto the original. You can also use a form that is already
registered in the Document Box.
Place the original for the form on top of the other originals. When using the optional document processor, the first page
of the originals should be placed on the top.
Density:
30%
Form Original Copy
Density:
100%
Off
Select Stored Select Stored Form ― Form must be previously registered in

Form Document Box.
Select the form to be overlaid from Document
Box.
Select [Select Stored Form] to display the
Document Box that store documents which
can be used as a form. Select the desired form
from the list and select [Select].
After you have selected the form, select [Next
>].
Density 10% to 100% Specify the density of the form to be overlaid.

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the
value.
Finishing Transparent The form is overlaid on the document.

Image
Form on Original The form is placed on top of the document.
Image
Original Image on The form is placed under the document.

Form
6-56
Scan New Density 10% to 100% Specify the density of the form to be overlaid.
Form*1 Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the
value.
Finishing Image Transparent The form is overlaid on the document.
Form on Original The form is placed on top of the document.

Image
Original Image on The form is placed under the document.

Form
*1 Not displayed when printing from the custom box.
Page #
Box
Functions
Adds page numbers to the finished documents.

The available formats for numbering are [-1-], [P.1] and [1/n]. The format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the
place of "n".
Original [-1-] [P.1] [1/n]
Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P.1] or [1/n].
6-57
Off
-1-, P.1, 1/ Position Top Left, Top Middle, Select the print position of page number.
n Top Right, Bottom Left, Specify the detailed page number position using
Bottom Middle, numeric values, and to set the page number position
Bottom Right ([Same as Front Page], [Mirror Front Page]) when a
page number is placed on the back side of the paper in
duplex printing.
1st Page 1 to 10 To start page numbering from a page other than the first
page, use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to specify the
starting page.
Start # 1 to 9999 To start the numbering with a number other than 1, use
[+], [-] or the numeric keys to specify the starting
number.
Denominator#*1 Auto, Manual The total number of pages "n" in the format [1/n] can be
(1 to 9999) changed manually. Select [Manual] and use [+], [-] or
the numeric keys to enter the total number of pages.
Last Page Auto, Manual (-10 to 0) If you do not want page numbering through to the last
page, select [Manual]. Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to
specify the final page to be numbered (a negative
number of pages counting backwards from the last
page).
Specify the desired number up to -10.
Font Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of page number.
Size Font sizes registered in Set the font size of page number.
"Font (Page #)" are
displayed.
Font Size (Page #)
(page 8-33)
Color Black, White Set the color of page number.
Style None, Bold, Italic, Set the font style of page number. Select a font style by
Bold/Italic checking the checkbox.
Display Transparent, Clipping, Set the display method of page number.

Pattern Overwrite
Density 10 to 100% Set the density of the color of page number.

(in 10% increments) Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the value.
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top edge
Orientation Top Edge on Left, to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]
Auto*2 to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge
Count Blank Off, On When a scanned document contains blank pages, select
Page*3 [On] if you require blank pages to be numbered. Select
[Off] to skip blank pages.
*1 This item appears when [1/n] is selected.

*3 Not displayed when printing from the custom box.
6-58
Memo Page
Copy Layout/Edit
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes.

You can also print two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page boundaries.
Select [Layout A] or [Layout B] and select the page layout from "Layout".
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Memo mode: A4, A5, B5, Legal, Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Statement, Folio and
16K.
Layout A
Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page,
leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original Copy
Layout B
Reduces images of two original pages for printing onto half of a page,
leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original Copy
Off
Layout A Layout Left/Top, Right/Bottom Select how to lay out the pages of scanned
original.
Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Select the boundary line type. Select [Border
Positioning Mark Line] to select the page boundary line.
Orientation Top Edge on Left, Auto*1 edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original
6-59
Layout B Layout Top Left to Right, Select how to lay out the pages of scanned
Top Right to Left, original.
Top Left to Bottom,
Top Right to Bottom
Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Select the boundary line type. Select [Border
Positioning Mark Line] to select the page boundary line.
Orientation Top Edge on Left, Auto*1 edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original
Insert Sheets/Chapters
Copy Layout/Edit
Insert a separator sheet, or make the first page of the chapter the front page when performing duplex printing.
The configured pages are displayed on the list.
Off
On Add Separator Separator 1 to 998*1 Enter document page numbers where

Sheet separators get inserted. Use [+], [-] or
the numeric keys to enter the page
number.
Paper Cassette 1 to 5, Select the source of the paper for the

Source MP Tray, separator.
Inserter Tray 1*2*3,
Inserter Tray 2*2*3
Chapter Chapter 2 to 998*1 Enter the page numbers of the original

Page document where you want to insert the
chapters. Use [+], [-] or the numeric
keys to enter the page number.
Edit ― Change the configuration of the chapter

page and separator. The method of
operation is the same as that of a new
addition.
Delete ― Delete the page selected in the list.
Next > Sheets Setting Do Not Print, Select [Do Not Print,], [Front Only],
Front Only, Back [Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print
Only*4, Duplex*4 setting of the inserted paper.
*1 If your model is equipped with a hard drive, the number of sheets is 4999.
*2 Displayed when the optional inserter is installed.
*4 [Back Only] and [Duplex] appear when finishing is set to 2-sided in "Duplex".
Duplex (page 6-52)
6-60
Image Repeat
Copy Layout/Edit
Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can also specify the area of the original to repeat.
Zoom Priority
Repeat an image of specified zoom ratio.
Original Copy
Double Copy
Copy two image.
Original Copy

Off
Zoom 25 to 400% (in 1% increments) Set the default screen.
Priority Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to change the displayed
magnification as desired.
To set the area of the original to be repeated, select [Next >].
Specify Off
Repeat
On To set the area of the original to be repeated, select [On] for
Area
"Specify Repeat Area".
Start Metric*1 Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to input the area of the original
X1: 0 to 431 mm to be repeated.
Y1: 0 to 296 mm Y1: Length from top left of
Inch platen to top edge of repeat
X1: 0.00 to 16.99" area
Y1: 0.00 to 11.68"
X1: Length from top left of
Area Metric*1 platen to left edge of repeat
X2: 1 to 432 mm area
Y2: 1 to 297 mm Y2: Height of repeat area
Inch
X2: Width of repeat area
X2: 0.01 to 17.00"
Y2: 0.01 to 11.69"
Double Copy ― Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet.
For example, you can double-copy an A5 original onto an A4
sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies that are
identical to the original.

6-61
Text Stamp
Advanced
Functions
Setup Box Drive
You can add a text stamp on the documents.
Copying/Printing
NOTE
This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.
Printing Jobs (page 8-77)
Off
On Text Stamp Any text string (up to Select the entry field and enter the text string
32 characters), Template 1 to to be printed, or select a text stamp from the
8 displayed templates.
After you have set the stamp, select [Next >].
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear.
Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-33)
Stamp Method Each Print Page, Select the stamp method.

Each Original Page Select [Stamp Method] and set the stamp
method for text stamp.
Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top Set the stamp position to be printed.
Right, Middle Left, Center, Select [Position] and select the text stamp
Middle Right, Bottom Left, position.
Bottom Middle, Bottom Right
Specify the detailed stamp position using
numeric values, and to set the stamp position
and angle when a stamp is placed on the
back side of the paper in duplex printing.
6-62
On Font Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of text stamp.
Size Registered font sizes are Set the font size of text stamp.
displayed. For details on registering font sizes, refer to
the following:
Font Size (Text Stamp) (page 8-33)
Character Off, Circle, Rectangle, Set the character border and underline.
Border Underline
Color Black, White Set the color of text stamp.
Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font
style by checking the checkbox.
Display Transparent, Clipping, Set the display method of text stamp.

Pattern Overwrite
Density 10 to 100% (in 10% Set the density of text stamp color.
increments) Set the value by using [+], [-] or the numeric
keys.
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge Select the orientation of the original document
on Left, Auto*1 top edge to scan correct direction. Select
[Original Orientation] to choose orientation
of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or
[Top Edge on Left].
6-63
Sending/Storing
NOTE
• This cannot be set when Long Original is set.
• This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.
Sending Jobs (page 8-79)
Storing Jobs (page 8-81)

Off
On Text Stamp Any text string (up to Select the entry field and enter the text string
32 characters), Template 1 to to be printed, or select a text stamp from the
8 displayed templates.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear.
Stamp Method Each Print Page, Select the stamp method.
Each Original Page Select [Stamp Method] and set the stamp
method for text stamp.
Right, Middle Left, Center, Select [Position] and select the text stamp
Set the stamp position using numeric values,
and to set the stamp angle.
Font Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of text stamp.
Size Registered font sizes are Set the font size of text stamp.
the following:
Character Off, Circle, Rectangle, Set the character border and underline.
Border Underline
Color Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Set the color of text stamp.
Red, Green, Blue, White
Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font
Display Transparent, Clipping, Set the display method of text stamp.
Pattern Overwrite
Density 10 to 100% Set the density of text stamp color.
(in 10% increments) Set the value by using [+], [-] or the numeric keys.
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document
Top Edge on Left, Auto*1 top edge to scan correct direction. Select
[Top Edge on Left].
6-64
Bates Stamp
Advanced
Functions
Setup Box Drive
You can add a bates stamp on the documents.
Copying/Printing
NOTE
This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.
Printing Jobs (page 8-77)
Off
On Bates Stamp Date, User Name, Serial Set the stamp to be printed.
Number, Numbering, Text 1, When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, select
Text 2 the entry field and enter the text string.
Date Format MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, Set the date format.

YYYY/MM/DD This setting is available when "Date" is set in
"Bates Stamp".
Right, Middle Left, Center, Select [Position] and select the bates stamp
Specify the detailed stamp position using
numeric values, and to set the stamp position
when a stamp is placed on the back side of
the paper in duplex printing.
Numbering Default 1 to 9999999 Set the starting sequence number.

If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On],
you can set the number of digits of the serial
number (1 to 7 digits).
This setting is available when "Numbering" is
set in "Bates Stamp".
6-65
On Font Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of bates stamp.
Size Registered font sizes are Set the font size of bates stamp.
the following:
Font Size (Bates Stamp) (page 8-33)
Color Black, White Set the color of the bates stamp.
Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font
Display Transparent, Clipping, Set the display method of the bates stamp.
Pattern Overwrite
Density 10 to 100% Set the density of bates stamp color.

(in 10% increments) Set the value by using [+], [-] or the numeric
keys.
[Top Edge on Left].
6-66
Sending/Storing
NOTE
• This cannot be set when Long Original is set.
• This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings.
Sending Jobs (page 8-79)
Storing Jobs (page 8-81)

Off
On Bates Stamp Date, User Name, Serial Set the stamp to be printed.
Number, Numbering, Text 1, When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, select
Text 2 the entry field and enter the text string.
Date Format MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, Set the date format.
YYYY/MM/DD This setting is available when "Date" is set in
"Bates Stamp".
Numbering Default 1 to 9999999 Set the starting sequence number.
If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On],
you can set the number of digits of the serial
number (1 to 7 digits).
This setting is available when "Numbering" is
set in "Bates Stamp".
Right, Middle Left, Center, Select [Position] and select the bates stamp position.
Middle Right, Bottom Left,
Specify the stamp position using numeric values.
Font Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of bates stamp.
Size Registered font sizes are Set the font size of bates stamp.
the following:
Color Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Set the color of bates stamp.
Red, Green, Blue, White
Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font
Display Transparent, Clipping, Set the display method of bates stamp.
Pattern Overwrite
Density 10 to 100% Set the density of bates stamp color.
(in 10% increments) Set the value by using [+], [-] or the numeric
keys.
[Top Edge on Left].
6-67
Handwriting Enhancement
Advanced
Send USB
Functions
Setup Drive
Emphasize the handwriting texts and lines by changing their color to specified one.
Off
On Yellow, Red, Cyan, Magenta, Green, Set the color to change.

Blue, Black, Mask with White
NOTE
Depending on the original used, hand writing letter might be wrongly detected.
Example for the hand writing that is difficult to detect:
• Handwritten numbers / figures / lines that are over 1 cm square in size
• Letters that is written by tick pen
Example of recognizing some writing that is not handwritten as handwriting:
• Rounded font
In case of using this function, it might take some time to send.
Continuous Scan
Advanced Advanced
Functions
Setup Setup Box Drive
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.
Originals will be scanned continuously until you select [Finish Scan].
Select [On] to use continuous scanning. To use Job Build, select [Job Build]. You can set the functions that appear on
the screen during scanning.
(Value: [Off] / [On] / [Job Build])
1 11 21 1
1~10 11~20 21~30 1~30
Job Build
When [Job Build] is selected when copying or printing, the binding orientation for finished documents can be selected
from [Binding Left], [Binding Right] or [Binding Top].
The following functions can be selected during scanning.
Item Description
Next Copy: On Back In duplex copying, prints on the back side if the next page is to be printed on the front
side. Select [On Back] to use this function.
Next Copy: On Front In duplex copying, prints on the front side if the next page is to be printed on the back
side. Select [On Front] to use this function.
Sheet Insertion Inserts a blank paper in the next page. Select [Sheet Insertion] to use this function.
6-68
Auto Image Rotation

Advanced
Copy
Setup
Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the
orientations are different.
NOTE
• You can select whether to rotate the image automatically in the default settings.
Auto Image Rotation (Copy) (page 8-35)
• When you have enabled this function, you can select how the images are rotated.
Auto Image Rotation Action (page 8-35)
Negative Image
Advanced
Copy
Setup
Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.

NOTE
This function is only available for black and white copy mode.
Mirror Image
Advanced
Copy
Setup
Copies the mirrored image of the original.

6-69
Job Finish Notice

Advanced Advanced
Functions
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.

It is also available that send a notice when a job is interrupted.
Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the
machine to finish.
NOTE
• PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
Command Center RX (page 2-67)
• E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
• It will be possible to download the scan data in PC from the stored URL described in the text of the notice E-mail of
Job Finish Notice for "Send to Folder (SMB/FTP)" or "Storing Documents to a Custom Box". This is a useful function
in case if it is not possible to send/receive a large amount of scan data due to the restriction of the mail attachment
file size.
Item Description
Off
Address Book Select the notification destination from the address book.
Address Book Select the notification destination on the address book screen, then select [OK].
[ ] (information Information on the selected destination can be viewed.

icon)
Notify when Select [On] if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.
interrupted
Address Entry Enter E-mail address directly. Select the entry field, enter the address (up to 256
characters) and select [OK].
Notify when Select [On] if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.
interrupted
File Name Entry

Advanced Advanced
Functions
Adds a file name.

Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status
using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Enter the file name (up to 32 characters).
To add date and time, select [Date and Time]. To add job number, select [Job No.]. To add both, select [Job No.] &
[Date and Time] or [Date and Time] & [Job No.].
6-70
Priority Override
Advanced
Functions
Setup Box Drive
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.
The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.
NOTE
• This function is not available if current job was an override.
• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage. In this
case, try the interrupt copy.
Interrupt Copy (page 5-22)
Repeat Copy
Advanced
Copy
Setup
Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed.
For confidential documents, you can set up a password for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct
password must be entered to perform Repeat Copy.
To register a password, enter a 4-digit password.
IMPORTANT
• A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the power switch is turned off.
• If you forget the password, Repeat Copy cannot be performed for that document. Make a note of the
password beforehand if necessary.

Repeat Copy is not available when the Data Security Function is active.
When the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is set to 0 (zero), this function cannot be
used.
Repeat Copy Job Retention (page 8-50)
You can select Repeat Copy as the default setting.
Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying.
Repeat Copy
The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Job Box. Refer to Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs to print out the Repeat Copy
jobs.
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs (page 5-68)
6-71
DP Read Action
Advanced
Copy
Setup
When the document processor is used, select the scanning operation for the document processor.
Item Description
Speed Priority Gives priority to scanning speed.
Quality Priority Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.
Detect Multi-fed Originals

Advanced Advanced
Functions
When reading a document from the document processor, if the multiple feeding of documents is detected, then the
reading stops automatically.
Item Description
On In case of detecting that multiple sheets of original are fed at the same time, the
message is displayed and stop scanning the original.
Off It does not detect.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed Detection).
Detect Stapled Originals

Advanced Advanced
Functions
When reading a document from the document processor, if a stapled document is detected, then the reading stops
automatically.
Item Description
On In case of detecting that the original is stapled or the original is fed skewed, the
Off It does not detect.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed Detection).
6-72
Skip Blank Page

Advanced Advanced
Functions
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are
not blank.
Blank pages can be set as pages that include ruled lines and a small number of characters.
The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the
document.
Select [On] > [Detect Item to Skip], and select [Blank Pages + Ruled Lines], [Blank Pages Only] or [Blank Pages +
Some Text].
NOTE
The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.
2-sided/Book Original
Org./Sending
Send Custom Functions USB
Functions
Data Format Box Drive
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.
1-sided ― "2-sided/Book Original" is not set.
2-sided Binding Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of originals.
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
Orientation Top Edge on Left, scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
Auto*1 choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left].
Book*2 Binding Left, Right Select the binding orientation of originals.
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
Orientation Top Edge on Left, scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation] to
Auto*1 choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]
or [Top Edge on Left].
6-73
Sample image
Value Image
2-sided Binding Left/Right
Binding Top
Book Binding Left
Binding Right
Sending Size
Org./Sending
Send Custom Functions
Data Format Box
Select size of image to be sent.

Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the sending size.
Same as Original Size ― Automatically sends the same size as the

original.
Metric A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, Select from the Metric series standard sizes.
216 × 340 mm
Inch Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11" × 15", Select from the Inch series standard sizes.
Oficio II
Others 8K, 16K, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki Select from special standard sizes.
(Return postcard)
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.
Original size and sending size are the same different

Original Size (page 6-19) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.
Sending Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.
Zoom (page 6-39) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send
the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
6-74
Long Original
Org./Sending
Send USB
Functions
Data Format Drive
Reads long-sized original documents using a document processor.

NOTE
• Long originals are sent in black and white.
• Only a single side of a long original can be scanned. Originals of up to 1,900 mm / 74.8" long can be scanned.
• A resolution of 300 × 300 dpi or smaller can be selected.
• This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set.
File Format
Org./Sending
Functions
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.
Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS], [JPEG], [OpenXPS], [High Comp. PDF], [Word], [Excel], and [PowerPoint].
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.
Item Value Color mode

PDF*1*2*3*4 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black
5 High Quality (Low Comp.) and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
TIFF
XPS Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale
JPEG Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black
and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
OpenXPS
High Comp. PDF*1*2*3*4 Compression Ratio Priority, Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Standard, Quality Priority Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale
Word*5 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color,
*5 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Grayscale
Excel
PowerPoint*5
*1 You can create Searchable PDF file by running OCR on the scanned document.
OCR Text Recognition (Option) (page 6-76)
*2 Set the PDF/A. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b] / [PDF/A-2a] / [PDF/A-2b] / [PDF/A-2u]).
*3 Set PDF encryption.
PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-77)
*4 Set Digital Signature to File.
PDF Electronic Signature (page 6-80)
*5 Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.
Scan to Office Function (page 6-79)
6-75
OCR Text Recognition (Option)

When [PDF], [High Comp. PDF], [Word], [Excel], or [PowerPoint] is selected for the file format, you can create
Searchable file by running OCR on the scanned document. Select [OCR Text Recognition], and then [On], select the
language of the document, and select [OK].
Item Description
Off Do not create Searchable file.
On Create Searchable file.

Select the language to extract from the languages that appear on the touch panel.
NOTE
• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-7)
• This function cannot be set when you send from the Custom Box.
• If the proper language is not selected, file creation may take a long time or the creation may fail.
The default language can be changed in System Menu.
Primary OCR Language*2 (page 8-37)
• If you do not set an original in the correct orientation, the text of the document may not be recognized as characters.
In addition, it may take some time to create the file. Check the following:
- The original orientation is correct.
• The accuracy of the text recognition depends on the original condition. The following condition may result in
decreasing the recognition accuracy.
- Repeatedly copied documents (as copied copy)
- Received faxes (with low resolution)
- Originals with the character space too narrow or wide
- Originals with the lines on the text
- Originals with the special fonts
- Binding part of the book
- A handwritten texts
6-76
PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and
editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
Select [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] in [File Format], and select [Encryption].
Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in [Compatibility].
When [Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected
Password to Open Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Document Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters).
Enter the password again for confirmation.
Password to Edit/Print Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Printing Allowed Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.
Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.
Commenting Can only add commenting.
Page Layout except Can change the page layout except extracting the
extracting Pages pages of the PDF file.
Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the
pages of the PDF file.
Copying of Text/ Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF
Images/Others file.
6-77
Printing Allowed Not Allowed Disables the printing of PDF file.
Allowed (Low Resolution Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.
only)
Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.
Inserting/Deleting/Rotating Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the
Pages PDF file.
Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the
pages of the PDF file.
Copying of Text/ Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF
Images/Others file.
6-78
Scan to Office Function

This machine provides the function which converts scanned documents including text, figures and pictures into
searchable and editable Microsoft Office (Word, Excel and PowerPoint) 2007 or later data format, via OCR processing.
NOTE
• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
• The scanned result may not be realized perfectly according to condition of the documents.

1 [Home] key > [Send] > [Org./Sending Data Format] > [File Format]

1 Select [Word], [Excel] or [PowerPoint] as a file format.
2 Select [OCR Text Recognition] > [On].
NOTE
When you select [Off], the documents are converted into the Microsoft Office data
(scanned image).
3 Select the language of the document which you wish to scan > [OK].
4 Select [OCR Output Format] and select an OCR output mode from the table below >
[OK].
Item Description
Text + Graphics Converts the scanned documents into the editable and
searchable Microsoft Office data format.
Text + Graphics with Converts the scanned documents into two types of data: one is
Scanned Image the editable and searchable Microsoft Office data format and
the other one is the Microsoft Office data format with scanned
image. You can edit text and layout of the editable data by
referring the scanned image.
Scanned Image with Converts the scanned documents into the searchable
Searchable Text Microsoft Office data format (scanned image).
6-79
PDF Electronic Signature

If [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] is selected as a file format, electronic signature can be added to the PDF to be sent.
Electronic signature can certify a sender of document and prevent falsification. To use this function, it is required to
register a signing certificate from Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer and enable digital signature to files
from the system menu. In this manual, a procedure to register a signing certificate from Command Center RX is
described as an example.
NOTE
• This function appears when [Specify Each Job] is selected for "Digital Signature to File" in the system menu.
Digital Signature (page 8-39)
• This function can be configured when [OFF], [PDF/A-2a], [PDF/A-2b], or [PDF/A-2u] is selected in PDF/A.
• To register a signing certificate from KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following.
1 Access Command Center RX.

Accessing Command Center RX (page 2-68)
2 Register a signing certificate to be used in the electronic

signature addition setting.
1 Click [Common/Job Default] in the [Function Settings] menu.
2 Click [Settings] from [File Default Settings] > [Signing Certificate] to create, import, or
acquire a device certificate.
3 Click [Restart/Reset] > [Restart Device] to restart the device.
3 Configure the digital signature settings.

1 [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send/Store] > [Digital
Signature to File]
NOTE
6-80
2 Configure the digital signature addition settings.

Configurable items are as follows.
Item Description
Digital Signature Select whether to add a digital signature.

Value:
Off: Does not add a digital signature.
Specify Each Job: Whether to add a digital signature is
selected each time of sending.
On: Always adds a digital signature when
sending.
Digital Signature Select an algorithm used for encryption of digital signature.

Format Value: SHA1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Digital Signature" is set to
[Specify Each Job] or [On].
Password Select whether to confirm password when setting digital

Confirmation on signature.
Signature Permission Value: On, Off
NOTE
[Specify Each Job].
Password Set a password required for setting digital signature. Enter a

new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and
symbols.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Password Confirmation on
Signature Permission" is set to [On].
4 Navigate to display the screen.

[Home] key > [Send] > [Org./Sending Data Format] > [File Format]
5 Enable the function.

1 Select [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] as a file format.
2 From "Digital Signature", select [On] > [OK] in order.
NOTE
If "Password Confirmation on Signature Permission" is set to [On], a password input
screen appears. Enter a password set in the system menu.
6-81
File Separation
Org./Sending
Functions
Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by specified number of pages, and sends the files.
NOTE
A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.
Off
On Set file separation.

Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to specify the number of
pages, and then select [Next >].
Attach File to E-mail All Files in 1 E-mail, Select how to attach the files to the E-mail. Select [All
1 file per E-mail files in 1 E-mail] to attach and send all files in a single
E-mail. Select [1 file per E-mail] to attach and send
1 file per E-mail.
Scan Resolution
Color/Image • Functions
Send Custom USB
Functions
Quality Box
• Color/Image Quality Drive
Select fineness of scanning resolution.

(Value: [600 × 600dpi] / [400 × 400dpi Ultra fine] / [300 × 300dpi] / [200 × 400dpi Super fine] / [200 × 200dpi Fine] /
[200 × 100dpi Normal])
NOTE
The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and
longer send times.
6-82
Email Subject/Body
Advanced
Setup Box
Adds subject and body when sending a document.

Select [Subject] / [Body] to enter the Email subject/body.
NOTE
• The subject can include up to 256 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.
• Select [Body 1], [Body 2], or [Body 3] to enter stored text for the body text. For details on registering templates,
Send and Print

Advanced
Send
Setup
Prints a copy of the document being sent.

Send and Store

Advanced
Send
Setup
Stores a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box.

NOTE
• To use this function, a hard disk must be installed in the machine.
• When [On] is selected, select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored.
If a password entry screen for the Custom Box appears, enter the password.
• You can view information on the selected Custom Box by selecting [ ] (information icon).
Original
Send
Send and Store
6-83
FTP Encrypted TX
Advanced
Setup Box
Encrypts images when sending via FTP.

Encryption secures the document transmission.
NOTE
Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Command Center RX. Be sure that "SSL" of Secure
Protocol Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.
Email Encrypted TX
Advanced
Setup Box
Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic certificate.

Encryption secures the document transmission.
NOTE
To use this function, configure the certificate, protocol and email function in the Command Center RX.
Configuring S/MIME settings in the Command Center RX (page 6-84)
Digital Signature Email

Advanced
Setup Box
Add a digital signature to the email, using the electronic certificate.

By adding a digital signature to an email, you can confirm the identity of the destination and detect tampering during
transmission.
NOTE
To use this function, configure the certificate, protocol and email function in the Command Center RX.
Configuring S/MIME settings in the Command Center RX
1 Access to the Command Center RX

Accessing Command Center RX (page 2-68)
6-84
2 Register the device certificate which is used for S/MIME.

1 From the [Security Settings] menu, click [Certificates].
2 Click [Settings] of [Device Certificate] (1 to 5) to create or import the device certificate.

3 Click [Restart/Reset] and then [Restart Device] to restart the machine.
3 Configure the protocol settings

1 From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].
2 Set [SMTP (E-mail TX)] and [S/MIME] to [On] in Send Protocols.
3 Click [Submit].
4 Configure the E-mail function.

1 From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].
2 Configure the settings in “S/MIME” as necessary.

3 Click [Submit].
5 Link the E-mail address with S/MIME certificates

1 From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].
2 Click the contact's [Number] or [Name] you want to edit.
3 Click [Settings] on “S/MIME Certificate”.
4 Click [Import] on the required certificate to register it, and then click [Submit].
5 Click [OK].
File Size Confirmation

Advanced
Setup Box
Checks the file size before sending the original.

To change the file size, change the settings of each function. When you select [Recalculate], the file size is
recalculated.

Custom
Box
Functions
Automatically deletes a document from the box once printing is complete.

6-85
Delete after Transmitted

Custom
Box
Functions
Automatically deletes a document from the box once transmission is complete.

Storing Size
Custom
Box
Functions USB
Drive Functions
Select size of image to be stored.

Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the storing size.
Same as Original Size ― Automatically sends the same size as the

original.
Metric A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, Select from the Metric series standard sizes.
216 × 340 mm
Inch Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11" × 15", Select from the Inch series standard sizes.
Oficio II
Others 8K, 16K, Hagaki (Cardstock), Select from special standard sizes.
Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard)
Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom

Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.
Original Size and the size you wish to

the same different
store as are
Original Size (page 6-19) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.
Storing Size Select [Same as Original]. Select the desired size.
Zoom (page 6-39) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image
as the actual size (No Zoom).
6-86
Encrypted PDF Password

USB
Drive Functions
Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.

Enter the Password, and select [OK].
NOTE
For details on entering the password, refer to the following:
JPEG/TIFF Print
USB
Drive Functions
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.
Item Description
Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution Prints at resolution of the actual image.
Print Resolution Fits the image size to the print resolution.
XPS Fit to Page

USB
Drive Functions
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
6-87
7 Status/Job Cancel
Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................................................. 7-3
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-8
Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ...................................................................................... 7-10
Sending the Log History ........................................................................................................................ 7-10
Job Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................................................. 7-11
Canceling of Jobs ................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ........................................................................................................... 7-11
Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................................................ 7-12
Device Information ........................................................................................................................................... 7-13
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Supplies/Paper) ......................................................... 7-15
7-1
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing
Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.
The following job statuses are available.
Status Display Job status to be displayed

Print Job Status • Copy
• Printer
• Printing from Document Box
• Fax reception
• iFax reception
• Email reception
• Printing data from USB Drive
• Application
• Job Report/List
Send Job Status • Email

• Folder transmission
• Fax transmission
• iFax transmission
• Sending Job - Fax Server
• Application
• Multiple destination
Store Job Status • Scan

• Fax
• iFax
• Printer
• Join Box Document
• Copy Box Document
Scheduled Job • Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
Displaying Status Screens

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select the job you want to check.

Select either of [Print Jobs], [Send Jobs], or [Store Jobs] to check the status.
Select [Send Jobs] > [Scheduled Job] to check delayed transmission.
Print Jobs Screen (page 7-3)

Send Jobs screen (page 7-5)
Store Jobs screen (page 7-6)
Scheduled Job Screen (page 7-7)
7-2
Details of the Status Screens

NOTE
• You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.
• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.
Print Jobs Screen
11 10 9 8 7
)D[&RPPXQL
6WDWXV 3ULQWLQJ-REV 6HQGLQJ-REV 6WRULQJ-REV FDWLRQ6WDWXV
3DXVH$OO
6WDWXV /RJ &DQFHO
-RE7\SH 7RS3ULRULW\ 0RYH8S 3ULQW-REV (QHUJ\6DYHU
$FFHSW7LPH 7\SH -RE1DPH 8VHU1DPH 6WDWXV
GRF 3URFHVVLQJ
6
1 2 3 4 5
5HVHW
)D[,QFRPLQJ2XWJRLQJ/RJ &ORVH

1 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
2 Type Icons that indicate the job type
Copy job
Printer job
Job from Document Box
Fax reception
iFax reception
Email reception
Data from USB Drive
Application
Report/List
3 Job Name Job Name or file name
4 User Name User Name for the executed job
5 Status Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting to print.
Printing: Printing
Waiting: Print Waiting
Pause: Pausing print job or error
Canceling: Canceling the job
7-3

6 [ ] (information icon) Select the icon of the job whose detailed information you want to
display.
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)
You can select [ ] (information icon) in “Copies” in the detailed
information screen to change the number of copies that are printed.
7 [Pause All Print Jobs] Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing
jobs will be resumed.
8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.
9 [Move Up] In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job queue and
select this key.
Reordering Print Jobs (page 7-12)
10 [Top Priority] Select the job to be overridden, and select this key.
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs (page 7-11)
11 [Job Type] Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
NOTE
The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.
Status (page 8-51)
7-4
Send Jobs screen
9 8 7
)D[&RPPXQL
6WDWXV 6FKHGXOHG /RJ &DQFHO

7RS3ULRULW\ -RE7\SH
(QHUJ\6DYHU
$FFHSW7LPH 7\SH 'HVWLQDWLRQ 8VHU1DPH 6WDWXV
3URFHVVLQJ
6
1 2 3 4 5
5HVHW

Sending Job Email
Sending Job Folder
Sending Job Fax
Sending Job iFax
Sending Job - Fax Server
Sending Job Application
Multi Sending
3 Destination Destination (Either destination name, Fax number, Email address, or

server name)

InProcess: The status before starting sending such as during
scanning originals
Sending: Sending
Waiting: Waiting Sending
Pause: Pausing the job
display.
9 [TOP Priority] Select the job to be overridden, and select this key. Only displayed
when the optional fax kit is installed.
NOTE
The address and user name can be changed to other information if needed.
Status (page 8-51)
7-5
Store Jobs screen
8 7
)D[&RPPXQL
6WDWXV /RJ &DQFHO

-RE7\SH
(QHUJ\6DYHU
3URFHVVLQJ 6
1 2 3 4 5
5HVHW

Storing Job Scan
Storing Job Fax
Storing Job iFax
Storing Job Printer
Join Box Document
Copy Box Document
3 Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.

InProcess: The status before starting to save such as during
scanning originals
Storing: Storing Data
Pause: Pausing the job
display.
NOTE
The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.
Status (page 8-51)
7-6
Scheduled Job Screen
8 7
)D[&RPPXQL
6WDWXV 6FKHGXOHG /RJ 6WDUW1RZ &DQFHO

(QHUJ\6DYHU
$FFHSW7LPH 7\SH 'HVWLQDWLRQ 8VHU1DPH 6WDUW7LPH
6
1 2 3 4 5
5HVHW

Scheduling Job Fax
3 Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, or No. of

broadcast items)
5 Start Time Time to start the scheduled job
display.
8 [Start Now] Select the job you want to send immediately from the list, and select
this key.
7-7
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs

Details of the Status Screens (page 7-3)

1 Select [ ] (information icon) for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.
)D[&RPPXQL
3DXVH$OO
6WDWXV /RJ &DQFHO
-RE7\SH 7RS3ULRULW\ 0RYH8S 3ULQW-REV (QHUJ\6DYHU
GRF 3URFHVVLQJ
5HVHW
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by selecting [ ] (information icon) in "Result/
Destination". Select [ ] (information icon) for the destination to display detailed information.
2 To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].
7-8
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking Job History
NOTE
• Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer.
• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.
• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.
Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs.
The following job histories are available.
Screen Job histories to be displayed

Print Job Log • Copy
• Printer
• Printing from Document Box
• Fax reception
• iFax reception
• Email reception
• Printing data from USB Drive
• Application
• Job Report/List
Send Job Log • Email

• Folder
• Fax
• iFax
• Fax Server
• Application
• Multiple destination
Store Job Log • Scan

• Fax
• iFax
• Printer
• Join Box Document
• Copy Box Document
7-9
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Displaying Job History Screen

2 Select the job to check details.

Select the [Log] tab, and select the job to check details from the list.
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories

Displaying Job History Screen (page 7-10)

1 Select [ ] (information icon) for the job you want to check.
)D[&RPPXQL
6WDWXV /RJ
-RE7\SH
(QHUJ\6DYHU
(QG'DWH 7\SH -RE1DPH 8VHU1DPH 5HVXOW
GRF &RPSOHWHG
GRF &RPSOHWHG
GRF &RPSOHWHG
5HVHW
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
2 To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].
Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
Send Log History (page 8-28)
7-10
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Job Operation
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

2 Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen.
Printing is paused.
When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume All Print Jobs].
Canceling of Jobs
A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.

2 Select the job to be canceled from the list, and select [Cancel].
3 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs

Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.

2 Select the job to be given priority, and select [Top Priority].
3 Select [Print] in the confirmation screen.

The current job in printing is suspended, and the job for override.
7-11
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Reordering Print Jobs

This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.

2 Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and select

[Move Up].

The priority of the selected job is increased by 1.
To further raise the job's priority, select [Move Up] again. Each time you select [Move Up], the
priority increases by 1.
7-12
Status/Job Cancel > Device Information
Device Information
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.

1 Select the [Home] key.
2 Select [Device Information].

The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.
2 Check the Information.

The items you can check are described below.
Identification/Wired Network
You can check ID information such as the model name, serial number, host name and
location, and the IP address of the wired network.
Wi-Fi
You can check the status of Wi-Fi connection, such as the device name, network name and IP
address.
NOTE
Displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
Supplies/Paper
You can check the remaining amount of toner, and paper.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Supplies/Paper) (page 7-15)
Fax
You can check the local fax number, local fax name, local fax ID and other fax information.
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
USB/NFC/Bluetooth
You can check the connection status of USB drive, NFC (Near Field Communication) and
Bluetooth keyboard.
• Select [Format] for "USB Drive" to format external media.
IMPORTANT
When [Format] is selected, all data in the USB drive is erased.
• Select [Remove] for "USB Drive" to safely remove the external media.
• Select "Bluetooth" [Connect] to set the Bluetooth keyboard connection.
Option/Application
You can check information on the options and applications that are used.
Capability/Software Version
You can check the software version and performance.
7-13
Status/Job Cancel > Device Information
Security
You can check the security information on the machine.
Report
You can print various reports and lists.
Remote Operation Status

You can check the situation of remote operation.
7-14
Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Supplies/Paper)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner

and Paper (Supplies/Paper)
Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the touch panel.

1 Select the [Home] key.
2 Select [Device Information].
3 Select [Supplies/Paper].
2 Check the Information.

The items you can check are described below.
Toner Information
The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels. And you can check the status of waste
toner box.
Paper Status
You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper
source. The amount of paper remaining is shown in levels.
Others
You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.
7-15
8 Setup and Registration
(System Menu)
System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-3
Device Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 8-6
Notification/Report ................................................................................................................................. 8-25
Function Settings ................................................................................................................................... 8-33
Network Settings .................................................................................................................................... 8-53
Security Settings .................................................................................................................................... 8-70
Job Accounting/Authentication ............................................................................................................... 8-83
Add/Delete Application ........................................................................................................................... 8-83
Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 8-84
8-1
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System Menu
Configure settings related to overall machine operation.
Operation Method
System Menu is operated as follows:

Select the [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu].
2 Select a function.
1 Displays the System Menu items. Items
1
6\VWHP0HQX
/DQJXDJH6\VWHPRI8QLWV
that are not displayed can be displayed

4XLFN6HWXS
:L]DUG .H\ERDUG
'HYLFH
by swiping the screen up and down.
(QHUJ\6DYHU
6HWWLQJV 1XPHULF.H\SDG
1RWLILFDWLRQ
5HSRUW
'DWH7LPH
2 Returns to the previous screen.
)XQFWLRQ
6HWWLQJV (QHUJ\6DYHU7LPHU
1HWZRUN 5HVHW
6HWWLQJV
3 Displays setting items.
'LVSOD\6HWWLQJV
6HFXULW\
6HWWLQJV 6RXQG
-RE$FFRXQWLQJ
$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ 2ULJLQDO6FDQ6HWWLQJV
Select the key of a function to display
&RXQWHU &ORVH
2 the setting screen.
4 Returns to the previous screen.
/DQJXDJH6\VWHPRI8QLWV &ORVH 4
/DQJXDJH
3 0HDVXUHPHQW
(QJOLVK
PP

1 Returns to the previous screen without
1 &DQFHO 0HDVXUHPHQW 3 making any changes.
2 2 Enter a setting by selecting it and return
to the previous screen.
3 Accepts the settings and exits.
NOTE
• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges or
as a user with privileges to configure this setting. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.
• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to
immediately change the settings.
Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.
8-2
System Menu Settings

This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in
System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.
Reference
Item Description
Page
Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures Fax, Energy Saver, Network, page 2-48
E-mail and Security Setup.
Device Settings Configure overall machine operation. page 8-6
Language/System of Units Set the language to use for the touch panel display, and select page 8-6
inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Keyboard Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter page 8-6
characters.
Numeric Keypad Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad. page 8-6
Date/Time Configures settings related to the date and time. page 8-6
Energy Saver/Timer Configure the Energy Saver settings. page 8-7
Display Settings Configure the touch panel display settings. page 8-10
Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. page 8-11
Original/Scan Settings Configure settings for originals. page 8-11
Paper Feeding Configure the paper and paper source settings. page 8-13
Paper Output Configure settings for paper output. page 8-20
Function Key Assignment Assign a function to each function key. page 8-21
Operation Assist It is possible to configure the settings for the Orientation Selection page 8-21
screen display and the Preset Limit on the number of copies that
can be made at one time.
Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has page 8-22
occurred.
Toner Settings Configure the toner settings. page 8-24
Notification/Report Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. page 8-25
Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
Printing Report/List Print various reports and lists. page 8-25
Result Report Setting Configure settings for notices for sending and receiving. page 8-26
Device Status Notification Configure settings for toner notices. page 8-27
Message Board Settings Configure settings for message board. page 8-27
Fax Communication Configure settings for FAX notices. page 8-28

Report
History Settings Configure settings for printing the history of the machine use. page 8-28
8-3
Reference
Item Description
Page
Function Settings Configures settings for copying, sending and Document Box page 8-33
functions.
Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is page 8-33
completed or the [Reset] key is selected.
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and
sending. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes
subsequent jobs easier.
Copy/Print Configures settings for copying and printing functions. page 8-38
Send/Store Configures settings for sending and storing functions. page 8-38
Email Configure settings for email transmission and receipt. page 8-40
Sending Job - Folder Configures settings for Sending Job Folder functions. page 8-40
Fax/iFax Configures settings for fax functions. —

FAX Operation Guide
WSD Configure settings for WSD Scan and WSD Print. page 8-41
DSM Scan Configure settings for DSM Scan. page 8-41
Address Book Configures Address Book settings. page 8-41
One-Touch Key Configures One Touch Key settings. page 8-42
Send and Forward Select whether to forward the original to another destination when page 8-42
sending images.
RX/Forward Rules/Fax Configures settings for RX/Forward rules and Fax Box. page 8-46
Box
Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the page 8-47
application software screen. However, the following settings are
available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
Document Box Configure settings for Custom Box. page 8-49
Job Box Configure settings for Job Box. page 8-50
Fax Memory RX Box Set whether to perform Print Immediately for the fax documents —
received or to save them in the Fax Memory RX Box.
FAX Operation Guide
Home Configure settings for Home screen. page 8-50
Status Configure settings for Status. page 8-51
Internet Browser Configure settings related to the Internet. page 8-51
Manual Staple Select whether to use Manual Staple. page 8-52
Remote Services Configures remote services settings. page 8-52
Network Settings Configures network settings. page 8-53
8-4
Reference
Item Description
Page
Network Settings Configure the wired network and Wi-Fi settings. page 8-53
Optional Network Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit or page 8-66
Wireless Network Interface Kit.
Connectivity Configure the Connectivity settings of this machine to other page 8-69
devices.
Others Configure other network related settings. page 8-70
Security Settings Configures security settings. page 8-70
Security Quick Setup The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by page 8-70
service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for
customers to use this menu.
Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface page 8-71
with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.
Device Security Settings Configures the device security settings. page 8-72
System Stamp Configure settings for header, footer, and stamp. page 8-77
Authentication Security Configure security settings for User Authentication. page 8-82
Unknown User Settings This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with page 8-83
unknown or unsent login user names or User ID.
Network Configure security settings on the network. page 8-83
Job Accounting/Authentication Configures settings related to machine management. page 8-83

User Login:
Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)
Job Accounting:
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-32)
Add/Delete Application Configure settings for Application. page 8-83
Application Configure settings for applications that help you perform your page 5-14
daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication
feature.
Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. page 11-8
Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. page 8-84
Image Adjustment Perform Image Adjustment. page 8-84
Behavior Adjustment Perform Behavior Adjustment for the machine. page 8-86
Others Adjust Others. page 8-86
8-5
Device Settings
Configures overall machine operation.
Language/System of Units
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Language/System of Units]
Item Description
Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Value: mm, inch
Keyboard
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Keyboard]
Item Description
Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.
Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY
Optional Keyboard Type Select the type of optional keyboard that you want to use.
Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German, UK-English
Numeric Keypad
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Numeric Keypad]
Item Description
Default Copy/Print Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad.

Display from Box Value: Off, On
HyPAS
Application
Layout (HyPAS Application) Select the HyPAS numeric keypad layout to display upon startup.
Value: Floating, Horizontal, On the Right
Date/Time
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Date/Time]
Item Description
Date and Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-
mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (0 to 23), Minute (0 to
59), Second (0 to 59)
NOTE
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer
be able to use the application.
8-6
Item Description
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western
notation.
Value: MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you
select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.
Setting Date and Time (page 2-32)
Energy Saver/Timer
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Energy Saver/Timer]
Item Description
Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to
the default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset, refer to the following:
Panel Reset Timer (page 8-7)
Panel Reset Timer If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto
Panel Reset.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].
Low Power Timer Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.
Value: 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)
Low Power Mode (page 2-45)
Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.

Value: 1 to 120 minutes (10 minutes increments)
Sleep Rules (models for Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:
Europe)*1 • ID Card Reader*2
• Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If the sleep condition is not turned off, the ID card cannot be recognized.
8-7
Item Description
Sleep Level (models except Select the sleep level.

for Europe)*1 Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal
Sleep mode.
Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver
Sleep Rules Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:
• ID Card Reader*2
• Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, the ID card
cannot be recognized.
Weekly Timer Settings Configure settings for switching the machine into Sleep mode and waking it
automatically at a specified time for each day of the week.
Weekly Timer Select whether to use Weekly Timer.

Value: Off, On
Schedule Specify the time for each day of the week at which the machine enters Sleep mode
and recovers.
Retry Set the number of retry to switch the machine into Sleep mode.
Value: Limited Retries, Unlimited Retries
NOTE
• If [Limited Retries] is selected, set the number of retry. The setting range is 0 to
10.
• If [Unlimited Retries] is selected, retry is performed until the machine enters
Sleep mode.
Retry Interval Set the retry interval.

Use [-] / [+] to enter a number.
Value: 10 to 60 seconds (increments of 10 seconds)
Power Off Timer (models Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.
for Europe) Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours,
1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week
8-8
Item Description
Power Off Rule (models for Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function.
Europe) Select [On] to set the Power Off mode.
• Network
• Fax
• USB Cable
• USB Host
• Application
• NIC
• Remote Diagnostics
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if either [Fax] or [NIC] is set to [Off],
the machine does not enter Power Off Mode.
• Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not
communicate with the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.
• [Fax] is Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
• [NIC] is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network
Interface Kit is installed.
Motion Sensor Automatically wake up from low power mode or sleep mode when someone
approaches the device.
Value: Off, 1 (Low), 2, 3 (High)
Energy Saver Recovery Select the method of recovery from energy saver.
Level Value:
Full Recovery: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately.
However, this mode saves less energy.
Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following:
enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling the use of desired functions
only.
If you want to use all functions immediately, select the [Energy Saver] key to execute
recovery.
Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set
to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused.
Ping Timeout Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".
*1 This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery controller is installed.
*2 Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.
8-9
Display Settings
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Display Settings]
Item Description
Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel.

Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4, 5 (Lighter)
Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
Value: Home, Copy, Send, Fax*1, Status, Custom Box, Job Box, USB Drive, Fax Box*1,
Favorite, Home (Accessibility), Accessibility Copy, Accessibility Send, Accessibility
Fax*1, Internet Browser, Application Name*2
Wallpaper Editing the Home Screen (page 2-16)
Show Power Off Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.
Message Value: Off, On
Quick Setup Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen
Registration (Copy) are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Off, Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple/Punch*3, Density, Duplex, Combine, Collate/
Offset,
Original Image, Original Size, Original Orientation, Color Selection, Continuous Scan,
Background Density Adj
Registration (Send) are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Off, Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original, Sending Size, Original Orientation,
File Format, Density, Original Image, Scan Resolution, Fax TX Resolution*1, Color
Selection, Zoom, Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj
Quick Setup FAX Operation Guide

Registration (Fax)
Registration (Storing are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
in Box) Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Off, Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original, Scan
Resolution, Zoom, Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image, Continuous
Scan, Background Density Adj
Registration (Box are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Print) Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Off, Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple/Punch*3, Duplex, Combine, Delete
after Printed, Color Selection
Registration are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
(Sending from Box) Six items in the following options are available.
Value: Off, Sending Size, Fax TX Resolution*1, File Format, Delete after Transmitted,
Color Selection
*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

*2 The running application will be displayed.
*3 Displayed when the optional Document Finisher is installed. When a punching unit is not installed, this item name is
"Staple".
8-10
Sound
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Sound]
Item Description
Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
Tone Set the tone of the buzzer.

Value: Sound1, Beep
Volume Set the buzzer volume level.

Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum), 2, 3 (Medium), 4, 5 (Maximum)
Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are selected.
Value: Off, On
Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.

Value: Off, On, FAX Reception Only*1
Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.

Value: Off, On
Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.

Value: Off, On
Optional Keyboard Emit a sound to confirm key presses with a sound.

Value: Off, On
Fax Speaker Volume*1 FAX Operation Guide
Fax Monitor Volume*1
Original/Scan Settings
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Original/Scan Settings]
Item Description
Auto Detect Original Size Select whether to automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.
System of Units Select [Metric] when automatically detecting the originals in centimeter sizes. Select
[Inch] when detecting the originals in inch sizes.
Value: Metric, Inch
A6/Hagaki*1 As A6 and Hagaki (Cardstock) are similar in size, select either one of them for
automatic detection.
Value: A6, Hagaki
NOTE
If [Hagaki] is set, only the originals placed on the platen are detected.
Folio*1 Select whether to enable automatic detection of Folio.

Value: Off, On
11×15"*1 Select whether to enable automatic detection of 11×15" size.

Value: Off, On
Legal/Oficio II/ Set the original sizes for the device to detect automatically.
216×340 mm*2 Value: Legal, Oficio II, 216×340 mm
8-11
Item Description
Custom Original Size Set up frequently-used custom original size.

The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size.
Select [On] for "Custom 1 (to 4)" and enter the desired size.
Value
Metric
X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical Horizontal
Prevent Light Reflection Prevent light reflection when using the Erase Shadowed Areas feature.
Value: Off, On
Prevent Original Skewing When scanning the originals from the Document Processor, select [On] to prevent
them from skewing.
Same Width Originals
Value: Off, On
Different Width
Originals NOTE
Requires the optional Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed
Detection).
*1 This function is displayed when "System of Units" is set to [Metric].

*2 This function is displayed when "System of Units" is set to [Inch].
8-12
Paper Feeding
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding]
Configure the paper and paper source settings.
Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings]
NOTE
[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder is installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.
[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.
[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.
Item Description
Paper Size*1 Select paper size. Paper size is automatically detected and selected when [Auto
(Metric)] or [Auto (Inch)] is selected.
Value: Auto (Metric), Auto (Inch), A3*2*3, A4*3, A4-R*3, A5*3, A5-R*3, A6*3, B4*2*3,
B5*3, B5-R*3, B6*3, Folio*3, 216×340mm, SRA3*2*3, Ledger, Letter, Letter-R,
Legal, Statement, 12×18", Executive, Oficio II, 8K*2, 16K, 16K-R, ISO B5,
Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Envelope C4*2, Hagaki*3, Oufukuhagaki, Kakugata 2*2, Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Size Entry
If you selected [Size Entry], enter the paper size.
Value
Cassette1
Metric
Inch
Cassette 2 to 4
Metric
X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1mm increments)
Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1mm increments)
Inch
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical Horizontal
Media Type*4 Select the media type.

Value: Plain (60 - 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum (60 - 105 g/m2), Recycled,
Preprinted*5, Hagaki (Cardstock)*6, Bond, Color, Prepunched*5, Letterhead*5,
Envelope*6, Thick (60 - 220 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1 - 8
8-13
*1 When the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) or Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) is used, paper size does
not appear.
*2 Not displayed in Cassette 1.
*4 To change to a media type other than "Plain".
When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.
*5 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.
*6 Not displayed in the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) or Side Feeder (3,000-sheet).
MP Tray Settings
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [MP Tray Settings]
Item Description
Paper Size Select paper size. Paper size is automatically detected and selected when [Auto
(Metric)] or [Auto (Inch)] is selected.
Value: Auto (Metric), Auto (Inch), A3*1, A4*1, A4-R*1, A5*1, A5-R, A6*1, B4*1, B5*1,
B5-R*1, B6*1, Folio*1, 216×340mm, SRA3*1, Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal,
Statement, 12×18", Executive, Oficio II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki*1, Oufukuhagaki, Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Size Entry
Value
Metric
Inch
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical Horizontal
X X
Y Y

Value: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 - 8

NOTE
If the optional FAX Kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.
Plain, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Envelope, Thick, Coated, High Quality and
Custom1-8
8-14
Inserter Tray 1 (2)

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Inserter Tray 1 (2)]
NOTE
[Inserter Tray 1 (2)] is displayed when the optional inserter is installed.
Item Description
Paper Size Select the paper size. When [Auto (A/B)] or [Auto (Inch)] is selected, the paper size
is automatically detected and selected.
Value: Auto (Metric), Auto (Inch), A3*1, A4*1, A4-R*1, A5-R*1, A6, B4*1, B5*1, B5-
R*1, Folio*1, SRA3*1, Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, Statement, 12×18",
Executive, Oficio II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, ISO B5
Value
Metric
Inch
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical Horizontal
X X
Y Y

Value: Plain, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond, Color,
Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 - 8
*1 Paper size that can be automatically detected by the inserter tray.

8-15
Custom Paper Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Custom Paper Settings]
Item Description
Custom Paper Settings Set up frequently-used custom paper size.

The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select paper size in the
multipurpose tray.
To register a custom paper size, select [On] and enter the desired size. Up to four
custom paper sizes can be added.
Select [Next >] to set the media type for each custom paper.
Value
Metric
Inch
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical Horizontal
Media Type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated,
High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8
8-16
Media Type Setting

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Media Type Setting]
Select weight for each media type.
The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.
Paper Weight Weight (g/m2) Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)
Light 52 g/m² to 59 g/m² Heavy 2*1 136 g/m² to 163 g/m²
Normal 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m² Heavy 3*1 164 g/m² to 220 g/m²
Heavy 1*1 106 g/m² to 135 g/m² Extra Heavy*1 Transparencies
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.
Each media type's default weight is indicated.
Media Type Default Media Type Default
Plain Normal 2 Prepunched Normal 2
Rough Normal 3 Letterhead Normal 2
Vellum Heavy 1 Envelope Heavy 3
Labels Heavy 2 Thick Heavy 3
Recycled Normal 2 High Quality Normal 2
Preprinted Normal 2 Coated Heavy 1
Bond Normal 3 Index Tab Dividers Heavy 4
Cardstock Heavy 4 Custom 1 - 8 Normal 2
Color Normal 3
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Item Description
Duplex Print Prohibit Duplex printing allowed.
Permit Duplex printing not allowed.
Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters.
Selecting media type at multipurpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.
8-17
Show Paper Setup Message

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Show Paper Setup Message]
Item Description
Show Paper Setup Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new
Message paper is set for each cassette.
Cassette 1 to 5 Value: Off, On
Multipurpose Tray NOTE

[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] and [Inserter Tray 1 (2)] are displayed when the
Inserter Tray 1 (2) following optional paper feeder is installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder
(1,500-sheet x 2) is installed.
[Inserter Tray 1]:Inserter
Paper Feed Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Paper Feed Settings]
Item Description
Default Paper Source Select the default paper source.

Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), MP Tray
NOTE
[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder
is installed.
Paper Selection Set the default paper selection.

Value: Auto, Default Paper Source
Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when
the zoom changes.
Value
Most Suitable Size: Selects paper size based on the current zoom and the size
of the original.
Same as Original Size: Selects paper that matches the size of the original,
regardless the zoom.
Media for Auto (B & W) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper
Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the
specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind
of paper loaded in the specific size.
Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
8-18
Item Description
Paper Source for Cover Select the paper source in which the cover paper used for the Cover function is
placed.
Paper Source for
Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), MP Tray, Inserter Tray 1 (2)
Front Cover
Paper Source for NOTE

Back Cover [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] and [Inserter Tray 1 (2)] are displayed when the
following optional paper feeder is installed.
Separator Paper Source Select the default paper source for separator sheets.
Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), MP Tray, Inserter Tray 1 (2)
NOTE
[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] and [Inserter Tray 1 (2)] are displayed when the
following optional paper feeder is installed.
Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be
aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are
set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print
Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select
[Speed Priority].
If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
Original Paper Finished Cassette Multipurpose Tray
Original Paper Finished Cassette Multipurpose Tray
Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority
8-19
Paper Output
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Output]
Item Description
Paper Output*1 Copy/Box Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from
Document Box, computers, and Fax RX data.
Printer
Value:
Fax Port 1*2 with optional job separator
Fax Port 2*2 • Inner Tray: Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine
• Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.
with optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher
• Finisher Tray: Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document
Finisher.
with optional 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher
• Tray A: Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher
• Tray B: Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher
with optional Mailbox
• Tray A, Tray B, Tray 1 to 7: Delivery to tray A, tray B, and tray 1 to 7
(tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox
NOTE
Fax RX data output can be specified when the optional FAX Kit is
installed.
Paper Output Offset Documents by Select whether to offset documents by Job.

Behavior Job Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is
installed.
Offset One Page Set whether one-page documents are sorted.

Documents Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is
installed.
*1 This function will not be displayed when the optional Inner Finisher is installed.
*2 This is displayed when the option of two FAX Kits has been installed.
8-20
Function Key Assignment

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]
Item Description
Function Key 1 Assign a function to each function key.

Value: None, Copy, Send, Fax Server, Fax*1, Custom Box, Job Box, USB Drive, Fax
Function Key 2
Box*1, Polling Box*1, Fax Memory RX Box*1, Send to Me (Email), Send to Me from Box
Function Key 3 (Email), Internet Browser, ID Card Copy, Favorites*2, Application*3
NOTE
Select [Filter] to narrow down for [All], [Application], [Favorites] and [Others].

*2 The registered favorite will be displayed.
*3 The running application will be displayed.
Operation Assist
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Operation Assist]
Item Description
Orientation Confirmation Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be
placed on the platen when using the following functions.
• Zoom (XY Zoom) • Page #

• Duplex • Staple/Punch (optional feature)
• Margin/Centering • 2-sided/Book Original
• Border Erase • Text Stamp
• Combine • Bates Stamp
• Memo Page
Value: Off, On
Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.
Value: 1 to 9999 copies
Clear Settings after Job Set whether to reset function settings to their defaults after the job starts.
Started Value: Clear, Do Not Clear
8-21
Error Handling
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Error Handling]
Item Description
Duplexing Error Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and
media types.
Value
1-sided: Printed in 1-sided
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Finishing Error Set alternative actions when finishing (Staple/Punch/Offset) is not available for the
selected paper size or media type.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
No Staple Error Set what to do when staples run out during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher.
Finished Pages Exceeded Set what to do when finishing (stapling or offsetting) capacity is exceeded during
printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without finishing.
NOTE
Punch Waste Full Error Set what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without punching.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.
Paper Mismatch Error Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or
type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by
specifying the cassette or multipurpose tray.
Value
Wrong Size Paper Loaded Set what to do when it is detected that the multipurpose tray paper size setting does
not match the actual paper size that is fed.
Value
8-22
Item Description
Paper Jam before Staple The page from which printing is resumed when a paper jam occurs during a job with
stapling can be selected.
Value
Resume at Top of Page: Resume printing from the first page of the document.
Resume at Jammed Page: Resume printing from the page where the jam occurred.
NOTE
Error Job Skip Set whether a job for which a "Add paper in cassette #" or "Add paper in Multipurpose
Tray" error occurred when the job was started is automatically skipped after a set
period of time elapses.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• When a job is skipped, it is moved to the end of the job queue.
• If [On] is selected, set the time until the job is skipped. The setting range is 5 to 90
(5 second increments).
Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be
taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a
set amount of time elapses.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before
automatically clearing errors. The setting range is 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second
increments).
Continue or Cancel Error Set which users can cancel or continue operations for jobs which were paused due to
Job an error.
Value: All Users, Job Owner Only
NOTE
Administrator can cancel all jobs regardless of this setting.
Image Preview at DP Jam Set whether or not a preview of the scanned document appears when a paper jam
occurs.
Value: Off, On
8-23
Toner Settings
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Device Settings] > [Toner Settings]
Item Description
Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner
when the toner is running low.
This notification is used for event report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to
100% (in 1% increments).
Toner Waste Full Alert Notifies the user or the administrator when the waste toner box is almost full. Set the
notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste toner box.
Notify via Operation Notifies you via the Operation Panel when the waste toner box is almost full.
Panel Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste
toner box. The setting range is 10 to 90% (in 10% increments).
Notify Externally (for Notifies the administrator when the waste toner box is almost full. This notification is
admin. use) used for the Event Report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap (Printer Management System
etc.).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste
toner box. The setting range is 10 to 90% (in 10% increments).
8-24
Notification/Report
Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
Printing Report/List
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "Printing Report/List" [Printing Report/List]
Item Description
Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings,
available memory space, and optional equipment installed.
Status Page
Service Status Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status Page.
Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.
Network Status Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network interface
firmware version, network address and protocol.
Network Status Page
Optional Network Prints the optional network status, allowing you to check the information including optional
Status network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network
Interface Kit is installed.
Print Accounting If job accounting is enabled, the total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed
Report as an accounting report.
ACCOUNT. REPORT
8-25
Item Description
Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.
Outgoing Fax Report FAX Operation Guide
Incoming Fax Report FAX Operation Guide
Fax List (Index) FAX Operation Guide
Fax List (No.) FAX Operation Guide
One Touch List (ALL) Prints One Touch List, allowing you to check the destinations that have been registered on
the One Touch Keys.
One Touch List (Fax) FAX Operation Guide
Fax Box List FAX Operation Guide
Application Status Prints Application Status, allowing you to check the information on the application installed in the machine.
Configuration List Print the system settings as the list.
Data Sanitization Prints the data sanitization report.

Report
Result Report Setting

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "Result Report Setting"
Item Description
Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.
Email/Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when Email or SMB/FTP

transmission is complete.
Value: Off, On, Error Only
Fax*1 FAX Operation Guide
Canceled before Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.
Sending*2 Value: Off, On
Recipient Format*2 Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.
Value: Name or Destination, Name and Destination
RX Result*1
FAX Operation Guide
Job Finish Notice Setting*1

*2 When "Email/Folder" and "Fax" are set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.
8-26
Device Status Notification

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "Device Status Notification"
Item Description
Low Toner Alert Low Toner Alert (page 8-24)
Toner Waste Full Toner Waste Full Alert (page 8-24)

Alert
Message Board Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "Message Board Settings"
Item Description
Message Board Select whether to use the Message Board.

Value: Off, On
Message List Configure settings for the registered message board.
Add Add a new message board.
Title/Body Enter the title and body to display on the message board. The title can include up to
30 characters, and the body can include up to 300 characters.
Device to Show Select where to show the message.

Value
Hide: Displays no message.
Operation Panel: Displays a message on the operation panel.
Embedded Web Server: Displays a message in Command Center RX.
Panel + Web Server: Displays a message in the operation panel and the
Command Center RX.
Place to Show Select where to show the message in the touch panel.
Value
Login Screen: Login screen of user login administration
Home Screen: Home Screen
Login Screen+Home Screen: Login screen and Home screen of user login
administration
Message Type Select the message type.

Value: Normal, Alert, Prohibition
Priority Show Displays the message on the message board.

Value: Off, On
Raise Priority Raise the priority of the message board selected on the list.
Low Priority Lower the priority of the message board selected on the list.
Delete Deletes the message board selected on the list.
[ ] (information Display information on the selected message board.

icon)
8-27
Fax Communication Report

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "Fax Communication Report"
Configure settings for Outgoing Fax report and Incoming Fax report.
FAX Operation Guide
History Settings
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Notification/Report] > "History Settings"
NOTE
For details on the Log History, refer to the following:
History Management (page 8-32)
Item Description
Sending Log History Auto Sending This function automatically sends the log history to the specified
destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting
range is 1 to 1,500.
Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail
address can be set.
Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories
by E-mail.
Value: Up to 256 characters
SSFC Enter the subject of the printed job history with IC card
authentication.
Personal Information Select whether to include personal information in the job log.
Value: Include, Exclude
Send Log History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations
manually.
8-28
Item Description
Login History Login History Select whether to record the Login History.
Settings Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be recorded. The
setting range is 1 to 1,000.
Auto Sending Select whether the login history is automatically sent to the set
address when the number of entries reaches the number set in
"Login History".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].
Destination Set the destination to which login histories are sent. E-mail
address only can be set as destination.
NOTE
Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending login histories
by E-mail.
NOTE
Log Reset Resets the recorded login histories.
8-29
Item Description
Device Log History Device Log History Select whether to record the device log history.
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The
Auto Sending Select whether the device log history is automatically sent to the
set address when the number of entries reaches the number set
in "Device Log History".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to
[On].
Destination Set the destination to which device log histories are sent. E-mail
address only can be set as destination.
NOTE
[On].
Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending device log
histories by E-mail.
NOTE
[On].
8-30
Item Description
Secure Comm. Error Secure Comm. Error Select whether to record the secure communication error log
Log Log history.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The
Auto Sending Select whether the secure communication error log history is
automatically sent to the set address when the number of entries
reaches the number set in "Secure Comm. Error Log".
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error
Log History" is set to [On].
Destination Set the destination to which secure communication error log

histories are sent. E-mail address only can be set as destination.
NOTE
Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending secure

communication error log histories by E-mail.
NOTE
8-31
History Management
It is possible to perform Log Management for the following logs on this machine.
Item Log subject Log information
Jobs Log Copy/Fax/Scan/Send/Print job completion • Event occurrence date

and time
Checking job status/Changing of jobs/Canceling of jobs
• Event type
Login History Login/logout success and failure • Information on users
logged in (or users who
User Account Lockout occurrence and cancellation
attempted to log in)
Device Log History Power on • Event results (Success/
Failure)
Power off
Changing user properties
User information login password registration and change

failure
Changing date and time
Changing security settings
Displaying and deletion of image data stored in Document Box
Secure Communications failure in TLS and IPsec communications

Communication Error
Log
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,
you need to login as an administrator or as a user with privileges to carry out this setting. The factory default login user
name and login password are set as shown below.
8-32
Function Settings
Configures settings for copying, sending and Document Box functions.
Function Defaults
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Function Defaults]
Common
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Function Defaults] > [Common]
Item Description
Clear Settings after Job Clear Settings after Job Started (page 8-21)
Started
File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as
Date and Time and Job No. can also be set.
Value
File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Additional Info: None, Job No., Date and Time, Job No. & Date and Time, Date
and Time & Job No.
Border Erase Default Set the default width to be erased as a border.

Value
Metric: 0 to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch: 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
NOTE
To specify border erase widths around original, set the value in "Border". To specify
border erase widths in the middle of original, set the value in "Gutter".
Border Erase to Back Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet.
Page Value: Same as Front Page, Do Not Erase
Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the
originals set.
Value: 100%, Auto
System Stamp (Basic Configure settings for stamps.

Settings)
Text (Text Stamp) Edit the test string for a template. Up to 8 templates can be registered.
Font Size (Page #) Set the font size for page numbers when printing them.
Value
Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
Font Size (Bates When a bates stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.
Stamp) Value
Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
Font Size (Text Set the font size for stamps when printing them.
Stamp) Value
Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt
DP Read Action Set the operation when a document is scanned from the document processor.
Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority
8-33
Item Description
Detect Multi-fed Originals When reading a document from the document processor, if the multiple feeding of
documents is detected, then the reading stops automatically.
Value:
On: In case of detecting that multiple sheets of original are fed at the same time, the
Off: It does not detect.
Detect Stapled Originals When reading a document from the document processor, if a stapled document is
Value:
On: In case of detecting that the original is stapled or the original is fed skewed, the
Off: It does not detect.
Copy/Print
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Function Defaults] > [Copy/Print]
Item Description
Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults.

(Copy) Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Auto*1
Original Image (Copy) Set the default original document type for copying.
Value: Text+Photo (Printer), Text+Photo (Magazine), Photo (Printer), Photo
(Magazine), Photo (Photo Paper), Text, Text (Fine Line), Graphic/Map (Printer),
Graphic/Map (Magazine)
Background Density Set the default Background Density (Copy).

Adj. (Copy) Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)
Continuous Scan Select the default Continuous Scan (Copy) setting.

(Copy) Value: Off, On
Prevent Bleed- Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy).
through (Copy) Value: Off, On
Skip Blank Page Select the default Skip Blank Page (Copy) settings.
EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.

Value: Off, On
Toner Save Level Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).
(EcoPrint) Value: 1 (Lower) to 5 (Higher)
NOTE
Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
8-34
Item Description
Margin Default Set the default margin.

Value
Metric
Left/Right: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Top/Bottom: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
Left/Right: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Top/Bottom: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Border Erase (Copy) Set the defaults for Border Erase (Copy).
Value: Standard, Border Erase Sheet, Border Erase Book, Individual Border Erase
Collate/Offset Set the defaults for Collate/Offset.

Value: Off, Collate On, Offset Each Page, Offset Each Set
Auto Image Rotation Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.
Repeat Copy Select the Repeat Copy default.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
• This function will not be displayed when the Data Security Function is active.
• This function will not be displayed when Repeat Copy Job Retention is set to 0.
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.
Value: Fit to Paper Size, Image Resolution, Fit to Print Resolution
XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.
Value: Off, On
Reserve Next Priority Specify whether the default screen appears when a subsequent copy job is reserved while
printing is in progress. To have the default screen appear, select [On].
Value: Off, On
Auto Image Rotation Set whether the image is rotated when the orientation of the document to be printed is
Action different from the orientation of the paper.
Value
Unrotated Manual Copy: If a paper source or zoom ratio is specified, the image is not
rotated.
Apply All: Rotates all images.
Follow Image Size: The image is rotated if the rotated image fits on the paper.
Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic
zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.
Value: Off, On
Paper Size for Small Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the original is too small to be detected in
Original the Auto Paper Selection mode.
Value: Default Paper Source, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Letter-R, Letter,
Statement-R
8-35
Item Description
Original Size of Specify the action when original size is not detected.
Undetected Original Value: Default Paper Source, Show Confirmation
Erase Shadowed Select the default Erase Shadowed Areas (Copy) setting.
Areas (Copy) Value: Off, On
Send/Store
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Function Defaults] > [Send/Store]
Item Description
Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults.

(Send/Store) Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Auto*2
Color Selection Select the default color mode for scanning documents.
(Send/Store) Value: Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale, Black
& White
Color Type Set the color type when you send color documents.
Value: RGB(Profile:XXXX), sRGB
Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution.

Value: 600×600dpi, 400×400dpi Ultrafine, 300×300dpi, 200×400dpi Superfine,
200×200dpi Fine, 200×100dpi Normal
Fax TX Resolution*1 FAX Operation Guide
Org. Image (Send/ Set the default original document type for sending/storing.
Store) Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Text (Fine Line), Text (for OCR)
Background Density Set the default Background Density (Send/Store).

Adj. (Send/Store) Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)
Continuous Scan Select the default Continuous Scan (Send/Store) setting.

(Send/Store) Value: Off, On
Continuous Scan
FAX Operation Guide
(Fax)*1
Prevent Bleed- Set the default Prevent Bleed (Send/Store).

through (Send/Store) Value: Off, On
Border Erase/Full Set the defaults for Border Erase/Full Scan (Send/Store).
Scan (Send/Store) Value: Standard, Full Scan, Border Erase Sheet, Border Erase Book, Individual
Border Erase
Border Erase/Full
FAX Operation Guide
Scan (Fax)
Skip Blank Page Select the default Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) settings.
(Send/Store) Value: Off, On
8-36
Item Description
File Format Set the default type of the files.

Value: PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, High Comp. PDF, Word, Excel, PowerPoint
NOTE
If [On] is selected in "Digital Signature", [PDF/A-1a] and [PDF/A-1b] cannot be selected.
Digital Signature to File (page 8-39)
Image Quality (File Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS/OpenXPS/Word/Excel/PowerPoint file quality.

Format) Value: 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
High Comp. PDF Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.
Image Value: Compression Ratio Priority, Standard, Quality Priority
Color TIFF Select the compression method for sending the color documents in the TIFF format.
Compression Value: TIFF V6, TTN2
PDF/A Select the default PDF/A setting.

Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-2a, PDF/A-2b, PDF/A-2u
OCR Text Configure settings for OCR Text Recognition Action.

Recognition Action*2 Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority
OCR Text Set the default OCR Text Recognition.

Recognition*2 Value: Off, On
Primary OCR Set the default language of the text to be extracted. ([English] is selected as a default.)
Language*2 Select the language to extract from the options displayed on the touch panel.
OCR Output Format*2 Set the default OCR output format.

Value: Text + Graphics, Text + Graphics with Scanned Image, Scanned Image with
Searchable Text
File Separation Select the default file separation setting.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
If you select [On], set the number of pages to be divided. The setting range is 1 to 2500
pages.
Attach File to Select how to attach the files to the E-mail.

Email Value
All Files in 1 Email: Attach and send all files in a single E-mail.
1 file per Email: Attach and send 1 file per E-mail.
Email Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the
scanned originals by E-mail. Three body messages can be registered, and the initial
template can be used to choose which body message is used.
Value
Subject: Up to 256 characters can be entered.
Body 1 to 3: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
8-37
Item Description
iFax Subject/Body*3 Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the
scanned originals by i-FAX.
Value
Subject: Up to 256 characters can be entered.
Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
Erase Shadowed Select the default Erase Shadowed Areas (Send) setting.
Areas (Send) Value: Off, On
Erase Shadowed Select the default Erase Shadowed Areas (Store) setting.
Areas (Store) Value: Off, On

*3 Displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit" (page 11-6)
Copy/Print
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Copy/Print]
Item Description
Quick Setup Quick Setup Registration (Copy) (page 8-10)

Registration (Copy)
Send/Store
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send/Store]
Item Description
Default Screen Set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.
Value: Destination, Address Book, One touch Key
Prevent Mis-sending Destination Check Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations
Settings before Send after pressing the [Start] key when performing sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
Entry Check for New When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry
Dest. check screen to check the entered destination.
Value: Off, On
New Destination Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.

Entry Value: Prohibit, Permit
Recall Destination Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.
Value: Prohibit, Permit
Broadcast Set whether to enable broadcast.

Destination History Allow to use the destination history.

Delete Destination Delete the destination history.

History
8-38
Item Description
Quick Setup Registration (Send) Quick Setup Registration (Send) (page 8-10)
Digital Signature to Digital Signature Select whether to add a digital signature.

File Value:
Off: Does not add a digital signature.
Specify Each Job: Whether to add a digital signature is
selected each time of sending.
On: Always adds a digital signature when
sending.
Digital Signature Select an algorithm used for encryption of digital signature.

Format Value: SHA1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512
NOTE
[Specify Each Job] or [On].
Password Select whether to confirm password when setting digital signature.

Confirmation on Value: On, Off
Signature Permission
NOTE
[Specify Each Job].
Password Set a password required for setting digital signature. Enter a new
security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Password Confirmation on
Signature Permission" is set to [On].
8-39
Email
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Email]
Item Description
Email Settings SMTP (Email Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.
TX) Value: Off, On
SMTP Server Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
Name
NOTE
SMTP Port Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port number is 25.
Number Value: 1 to 65535 (Port Number)
Sender Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails, such as the
Address machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 256
characters.
SMTP Auth and When the user login is set to ON, login user name, password and E-mail
Sender address of login user are used for SMTP authentication and e-mail sender
Address address.
Value
Use System Settings: Information set with [Sender Address] is used for
SMTP authentication and E-mail sender address information.
Use Login User Information: Login User information is used for SMTP
authentication and E-mail sender address information.
NOTE
If there is no e-mail address set for the user who logged in, the Sender Address
set with [Sender Address] is used for E-mail sender address information.
POP3 POP3 Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.

Value: Off, On
Remote Remote Printing (page 8-49)

Printing
Sending Job - Folder

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Sending Job - Folder]
Item Description
FTP Settings Select whether to send documents using FTP. To use the FTP Client, set the protocol to
[On] for "Protocol Settings". The default port number is 21.
Value: Off, On, 1 to 65535 (Port Number)
SMB Settings Select whether to send documents using SMB. To use the SMB Client, set the protocol to
[On] for "Protocol Settings". The default port number is 445.
8-40
Fax/iFax
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Fax/iFax]
Configure settings for FAX.
FAX Operation Guide
WSD
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [WSD]
Item Description
WSD Scan Protocol Select whether to use WSD Scan.*1

Available Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and
Network wired.
Value: Disable, Enable
WSD Print Protocol Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and
Settings Network FAX driver use this Enhanced WSD web service.*1
Value: Off, On
Network wired.
*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
DSM Scan
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [DSM Scan]
Item Description
Basic Using DSM Select whether to use DSM scan.*1

Value: Off, On
LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On
Address Book
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book]
Item Description
Add/Edit Machine Address Book Configure settings for address book.

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-38)
8-41
Item Description
Machine Sort Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.
Address Book Value: No., Name
Narrow Down This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination
listed when the address book is displayed.
Value: Off, Email, Folder, Fax*1, iFax*2, Group
Edit Restriction Restrict editing of the address book. If you selected [Administrator Only], you
can only edit the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.
Value: Off, Administrator Only
External Address Book Command Center RX User Guide
Address Book Type*3 Select whether the machine's address book or the External Address Book
appears when the address book is displayed.
Value: Machine Address Book, Ext Address Book

*2 This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
*3 This display appears only if the external address book is available.
One-Touch Key
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key]
Item Description
Add/Edit One Touch Configure settings for One Touch Key.

Key
Edit Restriction Restrict editing of the One Touch Key. If you selected [Administrator Only], you can only
edit the One Touch Key by logging in with administrator privileges.
Value: Off, Administrator Only
Send and Forward

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send and Forward]
Item Description
Forward Settings Select whether to forward the original.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [Email], [Folder (SMB)],
[Folder (FTP)], [Fax]*1, [iFax (Via server-On)]*2, and [iFax (Via server-Off)]*2.
Destination Add Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be
set. Follow the steps below to register the destination.
• Addr. Book
• Email
• SMB
• FTP
8-42
Item Description
Job Settings Color Setting Configure the color settings for forwarded original.
Value: Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color,
Grayscale, Black & White
Scan Select resolution for stored original.

Resolution Value: 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultrafine, 300x300dpi, 200x400dpi
Superfine, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal
File Format Select the file format of forwarded original.

File Format for Send and Forward (page 8-44)
File Separation Set whether originals are divided into multiple files before being forwarded.
Value: Off, Each Page
Email Subject Enter a maximum of 256 characters for the subject of forwarded E-mail.
FTP Encrypted Set whether originals are encrypted before being forwarded.
TX Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when SSL is set to [On] in Security Settings.
Security Settings (page 8-70)
Email Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic certificate.

Encrypted TX Encryption secures the document transmission.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when S/MIME is configured in Command Center RX.
Digital Add a digital signature to the email, using the electronic certificate.
Signature By adding a digital signature to an email, you can confirm the identity of the
Email destination and detect tampering during transmission.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when S/MIME is configured in Command Center RX.
*1 Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.

*2 This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
8-43
File Format for Send and Forward

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send and Forward] > [Job Settings] > [File Format]
Select the file format for forwarded original.
The table below lists the file formats and their details.
File format Adjustable range of image quality Color setting
PDF*1 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
TIFF White
JPEG Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale
XPS Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/

Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and
OpenXPS White
High Comp. PDF*1 Compression Ratio Priority, Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/
Standard, Quality Priority Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale
*1 File format can be selected. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b] / [PDF/A-2a] / [PDF/A-2b] / [PDF/A-2u])
8-44
PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and
editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in "Compatibility".

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send and Forward] > [Job Settings] > [Encryption]
Document Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256
characters) and then select [OK].
Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for
confirmation, and select [OK].
Detail Printing Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.
Allowed
Changes Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Allowed
Page Layout except Can change the page layout except extracting the pages
extracting Pages of the PDF file.
Any except extracting Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of
Pages the PDF file.
Copying of Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Text/Images/
Others
8-45

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Send and Forward] > [Job Settings] > [Encryption]
Detail Printing Not Allowed Disables the printing of PDF file.

Allowed
Allowed Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.
(Low Resolution only)
Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Changes Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Allowed
Inserting/Deleting/ Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF
Rotating Pages file.
Any except extracting Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of
Pages the PDF file.
Copying of Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Text/Images/
Others
RX/Forward Rules/Fax Box

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [RX/Forward Rules/Fax Box]
Configures settings for RX/Forward rules and FAX Box.
FAX Operation Guide
8-46
Printer
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Printer]
Item Description
Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types
of printers.
Value: PCL6, IBM Proprinter, Line Printer, EPSON LQ-850, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)
NOTE
• When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)], set "Alt Emulation", too.
• When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Report", too.
KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or
not the error report is output.
Value: Off, On
Alt Emulation When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between
KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to
the data to print.
Value: PCL6
EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where
faded printing is not a problem.
Value: Off, On
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).
Value: 1 (Lower) to 5 (Higher)
NOTE
Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
Override A4/Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size
when printing.
Value
Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use
whichever size is in the paper source.
Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.

Value: 1-sided, 2-sided (Bind Long Edge), 2-sided (Bind Short Edge)
Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 9999.

Value: 1 to 9999 copies
Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Value: Portrait, Landscape
Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is
no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed.
When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options
are between 5 and 495 seconds.
LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character
code 0AH).
Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF
8-47
Item Description
CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code
(character code 0DH).
Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR
Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No.
& Job Name], or [Job Name & Job No.].
User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source
and type are specified.
Value
Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray
in the paper feed.
Value
Off: The printer driver settings are followed.
Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP
tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray.
Always: If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP
tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.
Auto Cassette Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while
printing.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Add the following paper in cassette
#." (# is a cassette number) or "Add the following paper in the multipurpose tray.",
and stops printing.
• Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.
• To print from the other paper cassette, select [Paper Selection]. Select the
desired paper source.
• When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other
cassette contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.
Message Banner Print Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when
printing multiple banner sheets.
Value: Off, On
Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a
line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at
10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.
Value: Off, On
8-48
Item Description
Resolution Set the resolution used for printing.

Value: 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
NOTE
Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation
panel settings.
KIR Select the default KIR (smoothing) setting.

Value: Off, On
Printing Job Terminator You can select the condition which regarded as a job termination if the print job could
not be processed until the end due to your environment and the other reason.
Value:
EOJ (End of Job): The command recognized as a termination of the job data is
regarded as one job until it is detected.
End of Network Session: The data included in a network session at network
connection is regarded as one job.
UEL (Universal Exit Language): The UEL included in the termination of the job data
is regarded as one job until it is detected.
Remote Printing Select whether to prohibit printing that is performed without operating the machine.
When [Prohibit] is selected, a document that has been stored in the document box
from the printer driver can be printed from the machine. This prevents another person
from seeing that document.
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is selected, printing and storing using Quick Copy and Proof and Hold
functions are disabled. Printing a received FAX (optional) is not prohibited.
Direct Printing from Web Set whether to allow Direct Printing from Command Center RX.
Value: Not Allowed, Allowed
Command Center RX
Document Box
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Document Box]
Item Description
Custom Box - Add/Edit Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-58)
Auto File Deletion Time Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.
Quick Setup Registration Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box) (page 8-10)
(Storing in Box)
Quick Setup Registration Quick Setup Registration (Box Print) (page 8-10)
(Box Print)
Quick Setup Registration Quick Setup Registration (Sending from Box) (page 8-10)
(Sending from Box)
8-49
Job Box
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Job Box]
Item Description
Quick Copy Job To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Retention Value: number between 0 and 300
NOTE
When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.
Repeat Copy Job To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Retention Value: number between 0 and 50
NOTE
• This function will not be displayed when the Data Security Function is activated.
• When 0 is set, Repeat Copy cannot be used.
Deletion of Job This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and
Retention Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have
been saved for a set time.
Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week
NOTE
This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this
function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned off.
Fax Memory RX Box

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Fax Memory RX Box]
Set whether to perform print immediately for the FAX documents received or to save them in the Fax Memory RX Box.
FAX Operation Guide
Home
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Home]
Configure settings for Home screen.
8-50
Status
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Status]
Item Description
Display Settings Set the items that appear in the status screens for printing jobs, sending jobs, and
storing jobs.
Printing Jobs Column Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages, Color/
1 Black & White
Printing Jobs Column Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages, Color/
2 Black & White
Sending Jobs Value: Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Column 1
Sending Jobs Value: Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
Column 2
Storing Jobs Column Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
1
Storing Jobs Column Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White
2
Job Status/Job Logs Set the display method of the Status/Log.

Settings
Display Jobs Detail Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Status
Display Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Display Fax Log*1 Value: Show All, Hide All
Pause/Resume of All Value: Prohibit, Permit

Print Jobs
Internet Browser
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Internet Browser]
Item Description
Internet Browser Select whether to use the Internet browser.

Value: Off, On
Browser This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages
Environment are displayed.
Value:
Home page: (Enter the address for Home page.)
Text Size: Large, Medium, Small
Display Mode: Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering
Cookie: Accept All, Reject All, Prompt before Accepting
NOTE
This setting is not displayed if you selected [Off] for "Internet Browser".
Proxy Proxy (page 8-53)
8-51
Manual Staple
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Manual Staple]
NOTE
Only displayed when the optional 4,000-sheet Finisher or 100-sheet Staple Finisher is installed.
Item Description
Manual Staple Select whether to use Manual Staple.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
If you selected [On], set the time until manual stapling mode is automatically cancelled. The
setting range is 5 to 60 seconds (in 5-second increments).
Staple Position Set the default Staple Position.

Value: A4, Letter
Remote Services
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Remote Services]
When the trouble occurs on this product, it is possible to explain the operational procedure and the troubleshooting
method through the internet from our sales office by accessing the operation panel screen of this product while
operating the screen.
NOTE
When using the remote service settings, it is necessary to make a contract with our company.
Please contact our sales office or our authorized dealer (purchase source) for the details.
8-52
Network Settings
Configures network settings.
Host Name
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Host Name]
Item Description
Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command
Center RX.
Changing Device Information (page 2-70)
Proxy
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Proxy]
Item Description
Proxy Proxy Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.
Value: Off, Use Different Proxy Server, Use the Same Proxy Server
for All Protocols
Proxy Server (HTTP) Set a proxy server (HTTP).

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
Proxy Server (HTTPS) Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when "Proxy" is set
to [Use Different Proxy Server].
Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
Do Not Use Proxy for Set domains for which no proxy is used.
Following Domains Value: (Enter the domain name.)
Wi-Fi Direct Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]
Set Wi-Fi Direct.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service
representatives for detail.
Item Description
Wi-Fi Direct Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On
Device Name Specify the device name.
NOTE
• Up to 32 characters can be entered.
• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
8-53
Item Description
IP Address Check the IP address of the machine.

NOTE
This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Auto Disconnect Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
• If you select [ON], set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.
• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Persistent Group Set whether Wi-Fi Direct connection as Persistent Group (information for the
connection is kept even if the power is turned off).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Password Select whether the Wi-Fi Direct password is automatically generated or created
manually. When [Off] is selected, the Persistent Group setting changes to [On].
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If you selected [On], set a password (8 or more characters).
Frequency band Set the frequency band to be used.

Value: 2.4GHz, 5Ghz
Wi-Fi Settings
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Settings]
Set Wi-Fi.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service
representatives for detail.
Wi-Fi
Item Description
Wi-Fi Select whether to use Wi-Fi.

Value: Off, On
8-54
Setup
Item Description
Available Network Displays access points to which the machine can connect.
Index Select the key index of the access point.

Value: 0 to 3
Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured
using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by
pressing the push button on the access point.
NOTE
The push button method supports only the WPS.
PIN Code Method Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point.
(Device) The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Network Name Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.
(SSID)
NOTE
Network Select network authentication type.

Authentication Value: Open, WPA2/WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA2/WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP
Encryption Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network Authentication
setting.
Network Value
Authentication
Open Value: Disable, WEP
NOTE
If you selected [WEP], set the WEP key (up to 26
characters) and WEP Key Index (0 to 3).
WPA2/WPA-PSK Value: AES, Auto, Preshared Key (Up to 64 characters)
WPA2-PSK Value: Preshared Key (Up to 64 characters)
WPA2/WPA-EAP Value: AES, Auto
WPA2-EAP —
8-55
TCP/IP Setting
Item Description
TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On
IPv4 Settings Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/
IP] is set to [On].
DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On
Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On
IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.
Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
DNS Server Address Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server.
Value: Use DNS Server from DHCP, Use following DNS Server
NOTE
When [Use following DNS Server] is selected, you can enter static DNS server
information in the Primary and Secondary fields provided.
DNS over TLS Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS.
Value: Off, On, Auto
IMPORTANT
• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-56
Item Description
IP] is [On].
IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Addr. (Link Local)] after restarting the
network.
Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP
(IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of
four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-
digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the
network.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the
network.
NOTE
IMPORTANT
8-57
Wired Network Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Wired Network Settings]
Configure wired network settings.
TCP/IP Setting
Item Description
TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On
IP] is set to [On].

Value: Off, On
Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On
IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
Domain Name Enter the domain name.
NOTE
NOTE
IMPORTANT
• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-58
Item Description
IP] is [On].
IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Addr. (Link Local)] after restarting the
network.
Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP
(IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of
four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-
digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
NOTE
To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address 1 to 5 (Stateless)] after restarting
the network.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the network.
Domain Name Enter the domain name.
NOTE
NOTE
IMPORTANT
8-59
Others
Item Description
LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.
Value: Auto, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-TX Half, 100BASE-TX Full,
1000BASE-T
IMPORTANT
Protocol Settings
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Settings]
Configure protocol settings.
Item Description
SMTP (Email TX) Email Settings (page 8-40)
POP3 (Email RX) POP3 (page 8-40)
FTP Client (Transmission) FTP Settings (page 8-40)
FTP Server Protocol Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*1

(Reception) Settings Value: Off, On
Network wired.
SMB Client (Transmission) SMB Settings (page 8-40)
NetBEUI Protocol Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1

Network wired.
WSD Scan WSD Scan (page 8-41)
WSD Print WSD Print (page 8-41)
iFax Select whether to use i-FAX.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.
DSM Scan DSM Scan (page 8-41)
8-60
Item Description
ThinPrint Protocol Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the protocol
Settings to [On]. The default port number is 4000.*1*2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.
Thin Print over To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] and [SSL]
SSL to [On].
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default
certificate is the self-certificate of the machine.
Network wired.
LPD Protocol Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*1

Network wired.
Raw Protocol Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1

Network wired.
IPP Protocol Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, set
Settings [IPP] to [On], and set [SSL] to [Off]. In addition, select [Not Secure
(IPP&IPPS)] on IPP Security under Security Settings from the Command
Center RX. The default port number is 631.*1
Network wired.
IPP over SSL Protocol To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] and [SSL] to [On]. The default port number is
Settings 443.*1*2
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate
is the self-certificate of the machine.
Network wired.
8-61
Item Description
HTTP Protocol Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*1

Network wired.
HTTPS Protocol Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1*2

Network wired.
LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On
SNMPv1/v2c Protocol Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1

Network wired.
SNMPv3 Protocol Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1

Network wired.
Enhanced WSD Protocol Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN, and Network FAX
driver.
Network wired.
Enhanced WSD Protocol Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1*2
over SSL Settings Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX
drivers.
Network wired.
eSCL Protocol Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL.*1

Network wired.
8-62
Item Description
eSCL over SSL Protocol Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL over SSL.*1*2
Network wired.
VNC (RFB) Protocol This is set when starting up a VNC Viewer (E.g. RealVNC) to use the Remote
Settings Operation.*1
The default port number is 9062.
Network wired.
VNC (RFB) over Protocol This is set when starting up a VNC Viewer (E.g. RealVNC) to use Remote
SSL Settings Operation protected by SSL.*1*2
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default
Network wired.
Enhanced VNC Protocol This is set when starting up Command Center RX to use Remote Operation
over SSL Settings protected by SSL.*1*2
NOTE
• The default setting is [On].
• When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default
Network wired.
REST Protocol Select whether to communicate using REST.*1

Settings Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
Network wired.
8-63
Item Description
REST over SSL Protocol Select whether to communicate using REST over SSL.*1*2
Settings Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate
is the self-certificate of the machine.
Network wired.
RESTful API Settings Select whether to communicate using RESTful API.

To use the RESTful API, set [Protocol Setting] on [REST] or
[REST over SSL] to [On].
Value: API for Remote Services, API for Enhanced Services

*2 Set "SSL" to [On] in Security Settings.
SSL (page 8-83)
IMPORTANT
Depending on the protocol, there are models where you need to restart the network or turn the machine OFF
and then ON after changing the setting.
Ping
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Ping]
Item Description
Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP address of the
destination is possible.
NOTE
If [Primary Network (Client)] is set to [Others], this item is not displayed.
Ping Timeout Ping Timeout (page 8-9)
Bonjour
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Bonjour]
Item Description
Bonjour Protocol Select whether to use Bonjour.

Network wired.
8-64
IP Filter (IPv4)
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [IP Filter (IPv4)]
Item Description
IP Filter (IPv4) Configure IP filters. IP filters restrict access to the machine based on the IP addresses and
protocols.
Specify the IP addresses or network addresses of the hosts to which access is granted from
Command Center RX. If nothing is specified on this page, access from all hosts is allowed.
Value: Off, On
IP Filter (IPv6)
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [IP Filter (IPv6)]
Item Description
IP Filter (IPv6) Configure IP filters. IP filters restrict access to the machine based on the IP addresses and
protocols.
Specify the IP addresses or network addresses of the hosts to which access is granted from
Command Center RX. If nothing is specified on this page, access from all hosts is allowed.
Value: Off, On
IPSec
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [IPSec]
Item Description
IPSec Select whether to use IPSec.

Value: Off, On
Restart Network
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Restart Network]
Item Description
Restart Network Restarts the network.
8-65
Optional Network
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Optional Network"
Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit.
NOTE
This menu is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
Host Name
Item Description
Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command
Center RX.
Changing Device Information (page 2-70)
Wireless Network
Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.
Item Description
Connection Status You can check the wireless LAN status.
Setup Available Network Select access points to which the machine can be connected, enter the
Preshared Key and start a connection.
Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings
can be configured using the push button. This setting executes push
button, and the connection is started by pressing the push button on the
access point.
NOTE
The push button method supports only the WPS.
PIN Code Method Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into
(Device) the access point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically
generated.
PIN Code Method Starts connection using the PIN code of the access point. Enter the PIN
(Terminal) code of the access point.
8-66
Item Description
Setup Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Network Name Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the
(SSID) machine connects.
NOTE
Connection Set the connection mode.

Mode Value: Ad Hoc, Infrastructure
NOTE
• Ad Hoc: Directly communicates with the device without going
through an access point. This method cannot be used to connect to
two or more devices.
• Infrastructure: Performs communication through an access point.
Channel Set channel. Use [-] / [+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
Value: 1 to 11
Network Select network authentication type. To select other options, open the
Authentication device home page from a computer.
Value: Open, Shared, WPA-PSK*1, WPA2-PSK*1
Encryption Select encryption method. If the option other than [Disable] is selected,
enter the WEP key or the Preshared key. The setting values vary
depending on the Network Authentication setting. Select [Data
Encryption].
When Network Authentication is set to [Open] or [Shared]:
Value: Disable, WEP
When Network Authentication is set to [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK]:
Value: TKIP*2, AES, Auto*2, Preshared Key
NOTE
• If [WEP] is selected, enter the WEP key. Up to 26 characters can be
entered.
• If [TKIP], [AES] or [Auto] is selected, enter the Preshared key. Enter
the value in 8 to 64 characters.
TCP/IP Setting For details on setting value.

Bonjour (page 8-64)
IPSec (page 8-65)
Others For details on setting value.

NetWare (page 8-68)
AppleTalk (page 8-68)
MAC Address Filter (page 8-68)
*1 Not displayed if you selected [Ad Hoc] for "Connection Mode".

*2 Not displayed if you selected [WPA2-PSK] for "Network Authentication".
8-67
Wired Network Settings
NOTE
This menu is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) is installed.
Item Description
TCP/IP Setting For details on setting value.

Bonjour (page 8-64)
IPSec (page 8-65)
Dynamic DNS Set whether Dynamic DNS is used.

Value: Off, On
Others NetWare Use NetWare to receive documents.

Operation Guide for the optional Network Interface Kit
Value: Off, On
AppleTalk Selects whether to receive documents using AppleTalk.*1

Value: Off, On
LAN Interface Select the LAN Interface type.*1

Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full,
1000BASE-T
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
MAC Address Select whether to use MAC Address Filter.

Filter Operation Guide for the optional Network Interface Kit
Value: Off, On
Restart Network
Item Description
Restart Network Restarts the network.
8-68
Connectivity
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Connectivity"
Item Description
Bluetooth Bluetooth Use Bluetooth keyboard.

Settings Keyboard Value: Off, On
Device Select a keyboard.
Fax Server Fax Server Select whether to use FAX Server.

Value: On, Off
Address This specifies a prefix, suffix, and domain name to be attached to a destination.
Settings
NOTE
For information about the fax server, contact the fax server administrator.
File Format Set the default type of the files.

Value: PDF, TIFF, XPS
NFC Use NFC (Near Field Communication).

Value: Off, On
Remote Operation Configure settings for remote operation.

Value: Off, On
When you set it to [On], set the Use Restriction.
Value: Off, Use Password, Administrator Only
When selecting [Off], users without administrator privileges can also execute
remote operation.
When selecting [Use Password], enter the password, then re-enter it to
confirm.
When selecting [Administrator Only], only administrator can execute remote
operation.
NOTE
When selecting [Administrator Only], the remote operation using VNC
software is unavailable.
8-69
Others
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Others"
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37, IB-
38 or IB-51) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or
service representatives for detail.
Item Description
Primary Network Select the network interface to be used for the send function that this machine functions as
(Client) a client, the network authentication and connecting to external address book.
Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network, Optional Network
• [Wi-Fi] is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37 or IB-38) is installed.
• [Optional Network] is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or
Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.
• You can set and use "[Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi]", and "[Optional Network] (IB-50 or
IB-51)" individually for the e-mail send connection.
Restart Entire Device Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable
operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
Security Settings
Configures security settings.
Security Quick Setup

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > [Security Quick Setup]
Item Description
Security Quick Setup Select a security level close to the your operating environment, and customize the security
functions as necessary.
Value
Level 1: This is the factory default.
Level 2: The security functions of network are changed.
Level 3: All functions that protect the machine are enabled, and functions that are not
protected are disabled.
NOTE
• This function is available when you have logged in as administrator.
• The settings will be enabled when the device or network is restarted after selecting
the level.
• If you change any security settings after selecting the security level, "Custom" is
displayed on Security Quick Setup.
The configuration methods are as follows:
8-70

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > [Security Quick Setup]
NOTE
2 Select a security level according to your operating environment.
3 Configure the security function as necessary.
NOTE
Refer to the following for the settings of each security level.
Functions List of Security Quick Setup (page 11-38)
4 Restart the device or network.

Interface Block Setting

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Interface Block Setting"
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional
interfaces.
Item Description
USB Host This locks and protects the USB port (USB host).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).
USB Drive This locks and protects the USB memory slot.
NOTE
This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].
8-71
Item Description
Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects the optional interface slots.
Optional Interface 2
NOTE
You can set this feature for each slot.
Restart Entire Device Restart the machine without turning the power switch off.
IMPORTANT
After changing "Interface Block Setting", restart the network or turn the machine OFF
and then ON.
Device Security Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Device Security Settings"
Item Description
Unusable Time*1 Set a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes.
FAX Operation Guide
Job Status/Job Logs Job Status/Job Logs Settings (page 8-51)

Settings
Security Level Specify the security level.

Value
Low: This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.
High: This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting normally.
Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine settings to be
changed from external command.
NOTE
This function is available when you have logged in as machine administrator.
Remote Printing Remote Printing (page 8-49)
Software Verification Verify the installed software.

Select [Start Verification] to start verification.
If an error occurs during software verification, contact your dealer or service representative.
Administrator Request administrator to approve when updating firmware.

Authentication on Value: Off, On
Firm Update
8-72
Data Security
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Device Security Settings" [Data Security]
Configure settings for data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and machine's memory.
Item Description
Hard Disk/SSD Initialization Change security functions.
NOTE
• This function is displayed when the Data Security Function is active.
• Enter the security password to change security functions. The default setting is
"000000".
Data Overwrite The method used to overwrite data can be changed.

Method Refer to the following for details.
Value
1-time Overwrite Method: The 1-time overwrite method overwrites unneeded data
areas (in the case of overwriting) or all the data areas (in the case of system
initialization) with specific numbers to prevent data restoration.
3-time Overwrite Method (A): The 3-time overwrite method complies with DoD
5220.22-M, and overwrites unneeded data areas (in the case of overwriting) or all the
data areas (in the case of system initialization) with specific numbers, their
complements, and random numbers to prevent data restoration. Data restoration is
not possible even through a sophisticated restoration technique.
NOTE
The 3-time Overwrite Method (A) may take more time than the 1-time Overwrite
Method.
Security Password Customize the security password so that only the administrator can use the Data
Encryption/Overwrite.
Enter a new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
IMPORTANT
Avoid any easy-to-guess numbers for the security password (e.g. 11111111 or
12345678).
System Initialization Overwrite all the data stored in the hard disk/SSD when disposing of the machine.
IMPORTANT
If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, the hard disk/
SSD might possibly crash or initialization might fail.
NOTE
If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, turn the power switch
on again. Initialization automatically restarts.
8-73
Item Description
Data Sanitization Return the following information registered in the machine to the factory defaults.
• Address Book
• Favorites
• System settings
• Fax transmission and reception / forwarding data
• Transmission histories
• Local FAX Name
• Local FAX Number
• Data saved in Custom Box
• Optional applications
NOTE
• Print the data sanitization report and then confirm that security data is deleted.
Data Sanitization Report (page 8-26)
• Once in progress, the processing cannot canceled.
• Before performing this function, disconnect modular, network, and other cables.
• Before performing this function, set all interface block settings to [Unblock].
Interface Block Setting (page 8-71)
• Do not turn the power off while sanitizing the data. If the power is turned off during
data erasing, erasing will be executed automatically when the power is restored,
however, complete erasure cannot be guaranteed.
8-74
Item Description
Run Immediately Data Sanitization will be performed.
Reserve a Completely erase address and image data saved in the device at the scheduled time.
Sanitization Time Value: Off, On
If [On] is selected, set the date and time that sanitization is to be performed. The
setting range is Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (0 to 23).
Device Use After The device use restriction after the data sanitization is completed.
Sanitization The device cannot be used if [Prohibit] is selected.
Value: Permit, Prohibit
Data Overwrite Data Overwrite Method

Method The method used to overwrite data can be changed.
Refer to the following for details.
Value:
5220.22-M, and overwrites unneeded data areas (in the case of overwriting) or all the
data areas (in the case of system initialization) with specific numbers, their
complements, and random numbers to prevent data restoration. Data restoration is
not possible even through a sophisticated restoration technique.
5220.22-M, and overwrites unneeded data areas (in the case of overwriting) with
specific numbers, their complements, and random numbers to prevent data
restoration. Data restoration is not possible even through a sophisticated restoration
technique.
7-time Overwrite Method (B): The 7-time overwrite method complies with BSI/
VSITR, and overwrites unneeded data areas (in the case of overwriting) with specific
numbers, their complements, and random numbers to prevent data restoration. Data
restoration is not possible even through a sophisticated restoration technique.
NOTE
The 7-time Overwrite Method (A) or 7-time Overwrite Method (B) may take more time
than the 3-time Overwrite Method (A).
Data Sanitization Print the data sanitization report.

Report
8-75
Information erased
Category Data erased
Devices/jobs • Job settings configured by users

• Network settings
• Image data saved in Document Box, etc.
• Data registered in One Touch keys
• Job histories
• User information (user list, address book, Document Box registered by the user,
etc.)
• Account information of job accounting
• Network certificates
• Initial screen on machine changed by service representative
FAX (Option) • Fax settings configured by users

• Communication restriction settings
• Encryption key settings
• Transmission histories
• Scheduled jobs
• Conditional reception/forwarding settings
Application/favorite • Application/favorite added by a user or service representative

• Trial functions
8-76
System Stamp
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "System Stamp"
Printing Jobs
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "System Stamp" [Printing Jobs]
Configure settings for stamps when a document is printed.
After configuring the setting, return to the Copying Functions or Custom Box (Printing a Document) screen from System
Menu, and select the [Reset] key.
Item Description
Text Stamp Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all printing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when
printing.
Edit Text Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or enter a maximum of
32 characters for the text string.
NOTE
Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates,
Stamp Method Select the stamp method for the text stamp.
Value: Each Print Page, Each Original Page
Position Set the text stamp position.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,
Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right
NOTE
Specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set the stamp
position and angle when a stamp is placed on the back side of the paper in
duplex printing.
Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value
Font: Courier, Letter Gothic
Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.
Color: Black, White
Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic
Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite
Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)
8-77
Item Description
Bates Stamp Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all printing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when
printing.
Edit Text Set the default Bates Stamp. (Max.: 6)

Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2
NOTE
To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string.
Date Format Set the date display format.

Value: MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year), DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year),
YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)
Numbering Set the starting sequence number. If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On],
Default you can set the number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).
Value
Start #: 1 to 9999999
Fixed Digit Number: Off, On
Position Set the stamp position to be printed.

NOTE
position when a stamp is placed on the back side of the paper in duplex
printing.

Value
Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline
Color: Black, White
8-78
Sending Jobs
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "System Stamp" [Sending Jobs]
Configure stamp settings for sending documents.
After configuring the setting, return to the Sending Functions or Custom Box (Sending Documents) screen from System
Menu, and select the [Reset] key.
Item Description
Text Stamp Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
sending.
Edit Text Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or enter a maximum of
32 characters for the text string.
NOTE

NOTE
angle.

Value
Color: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, Blue, White
8-79
Item Description
Bates Stamp Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
printing.

NOTE

Value
Start #: 1 to 9999999

NOTE
Specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values.

Value
8-80
Storing Jobs
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "System Stamp" [Storing Jobs]
Configure stamp settings for storing documents in USB drive.
After configuring the setting, return to the Custom Box (Storing Documents) screen from System Menu, and select the
[Reset] key.
Item Description
Text Stamp Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all storing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
storing.
Edit Text Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or enter a maximum of 32
characters for the text string.
NOTE

NOTE
Specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values.

Value
8-81
Item Description
Bates Stamp Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all storing jobs.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
storing.

NOTE

Value
Start #: 1 to 9999999

NOTE
angle.

Value
Authentication Security
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Authentication Security"
If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.
Authentication Security (page 9-4)
8-82
Unknown User Settings

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Unknown User Settings"
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID.
NOTE
This function is displayed in case if User login administration or Job accounting is enabled.
Unknown ID Job (page 9-51)
Network
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security Settings] > "Network"
Item Description
SSL Select whether to use SSL for communication.
Value: Off, On
Network Access Select whether to communicate using SNMP and IPSec.
SNMPv1/v2c (page 8-62)
SNMPv3 (page 8-62)
IPSec (page 8-65)
Job Accounting/Authentication
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
Configure settings related to machine management.
Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)
Add/Delete Application
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application]
Configure settings for Application.
Applications (page 11-8)
8-83
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
Image Adjustment
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment"
Item Description
Density Adjust density.
Copy Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Send/Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment
can be made in 7 levels.
Fax*1 FAX Operation Guide
Background Density Adj. Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.
Copy (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying.
Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Send/Box (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them
in the Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Sharpness Adjustment Adjust the sharpness of the image outline.
Copy All Sharpen or blur overall image outlines during copying. Adjustment can be made in 7
levels.
Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)
Text/Fine Sharpen text/fine line during copying. Adjustment can be made in 4 levels.
Line Value: 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Sharpen)
Send/Box All Sharpen or blur overall image outlines when sending or storing them in the Document
Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)
Text/Fine Adjust sharpness of the text/fine line when during sending or storing them in the
Line Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 4 levels.
Value: 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Sharpen)
Contrast You can increase or decrease the overall contrast.
Copy Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies.

Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
Send/Box Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a
document box.
Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine
whether the original is color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting
a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value
will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white.
Value: 1 (Color), 2, 3, 4, 5 (B & W)
8-84
Item Description
Correcting Black Lines Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the
image, when the document processor is used.
Value
Off: No correction performed.
On (Low): Correction performed. The reproduction of fine lines on the original
may become lighter than when using [Off].
On (High): Select this item if a streak remains after using [On (Low)]. The
reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using
[On (Low)].
Calibration Cycle Set the calibration cycle.

Value:
Auto: Automatically sets the cycle for calibration.
Short: Priority is given to image quality.
Standard: Balances image quality and print speed.
Long: Priority is given to print speed.
NOTE
When [Custom] is displayed as setting item, the setting cannot be changed.
Calibration Calibrate the device to ensure correct toner overlapping and consistency with the
original tone.
NOTE
Perform Color Registration when correct toner overlapping is not ensured even after
performing Calibration, and perform Tone Curve Adjustment if consistency with the
original tone is not ensured.
Tone Curve Adjustment After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the
printed output tone may differ from the original. Perform this function to ensure
consistency with the original tone.
Developer Refresh Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough
toner.
NOTE
Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
Auto Drum Refresh This specifies the Auto Drum Refresh execution time.
Value:
Off: Auto Drum Refresh not performed.
Short: Short Auto Drum Refresh execution time.
Standard: Standard Auto Drum Refresh execution time.
Long: Long Auto Drum Refresh execution time.
8-85
Item Description
Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. It takes about 1 minute and
20 seconds. The time required may vary depending on the operating environment.
Drum Refresh (page 10-54)
NOTE
Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the
printing is done.
Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout.
Behavior Adjustment
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Behavior Adjustment"
Item Description
Silent Mode Set the Silent Mode. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When [On] is selected, it may take time for the next print job to start.
Drum Heater Set the drum heater.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
This setting does not appear in some regions.
Others
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Others"
Item Description
Diagnostics Memory Perform this function to check the machine memory.

Diagnostics
Software Software Verification (page 8-72)

Verification
8-86
Item Description
Restart/ Restart Restart Network (page 8-65)

Initialization Network
Restart Restart Network (page 8-68)

Network
(Optional
Network)
Restart Entire Restart Entire Device (page 8-70)

Device
Format SSD Format the SSD.
Format SD Format the SD card. To use an SD card, it is necessary to format the SD card
Card on this machine first.
When the formatting is complete, data can be written to the SD card.
System System Initialization (page 8-73)

Initialization
8-87
9 User Authentication and
Accounting (User Login,
Job Accounting)
Overview of User Login Administration ......... 9-2 Job Accounting (Local) ................................ 9-34
Managing the Job Account from PC ... 9-2 Adding an Account ............................ 9-34
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN Restricting the Use of the Machine ... 9-35
for Scanning ........................................ 9-2 Editing an Account ............................ 9-36
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Deleting an Account .......................... 9-37
Scanning ............................................. 9-2 Job Accounting for Printing ............... 9-38
Managing the Users to Send Faxes Job Accounting for Scan Using
from a PC ............................................ 9-2 TWAIN .............................................. 9-39
Enabling User Login Administration .............. 9-3 Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA .... 9-40
Setting User Login Administration ................. 9-4 Job Accounting for the FAX
Authentication Security ....................... 9-4 Transmitted from a Computer ........... 9-41
Adding a User (Local User List) .......... 9-6 Configuring Job Accounting ........................ 9-42
Changing User Properties ................ 9-10 Default Counter Limit ........................ 9-42
User Login Administration for Printing ... 9-12 Count by Paper Size ......................... 9-44
Managing the Users to Scan Using Counting the Number of Pages
TWAIN .............................................. 9-13 Printed .............................................. 9-45
Managing the Users to Scan Using Print Accounting Report .................... 9-47
WIA ................................................... 9-14 Using Job Accounting ................................. 9-48
Managing the Users that Send Faxes Login/Logout ..................................... 9-48
from a PC .......................................... 9-15 Apply Limit .................................................. 9-49
Local Authorization ........................... 9-16 Copier/Printer Count ................................... 9-50
Server Settings ................................. 9-17 Unknown User Settings .............................. 9-51
Group Authorization Settings ............ 9-18 Unknown ID Job ............................... 9-51
Guest Authorization Settings ............ 9-20 Registering Information for a User
Obtain NW User Property ................. 9-23 whose ID is Unknown ....................... 9-52
Simple Login Settings ....................... 9-25
ID Card Settings ............................... 9-28
PIN Login .......................................... 9-30
Using User Login Administration ................. 9-31
Login/Logout ..................................... 9-31
Overview of Job Accounting ........................ 9-32
To Manage the Number of Sheets
Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ...... 9-32
Managing the Scan Job Account by
Using TWAIN .................................... 9-32
Managing the Scan Job Account by
Using WIA ......................................... 9-32
Managing the FAX Job Transmitted
from a PC .......................................... 9-32
Enabling Job Accounting ............................. 9-33
9-1
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration
Overview of User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user
name and password for user authentication to login.
1 Enable User Login 2 Set the user 3 Enter the login user name and
Administration (page 9-6) password and execute the job
(page 9-3) (page 9-31)
UserA
Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified
only by the "Machine Administrator".
Managing the Job Account from PC

In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.
To Manage the Users to Print from PCs

Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.
1 Set the User Login 2 Print

Administration on the printer
driver (page 9-12)
User A
User B
User C
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning

TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning.
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-13)
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning

WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning.
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 9-14)
Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC

FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 9-15)
9-2
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration
Enabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Item Descriptions
Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine.
Network User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in
Authentication Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.

1 [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name
and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a
user with privileges to carry out this setting.
2 Select "User Login Setting" [User Login].

Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authentication].
Select [Off] to disable user login administration.
If you select [Local Authentication], set [Local Authorization].
If you select [Network Authentication], set [Server Settings].
Server Settings (page 9-17)
NOTE
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator
registered in the local user list and correct the settings.
9-3
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Setting User Login Administration

This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.
Authentication Security
If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.
User Account Lockout Setting

You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication] > "Authentication
Security" [User Account Lockout Settings]
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login as an administrator or as a user
with privileges to carry out this setting.

The following settings can be selected.
Item Descriptions
Lockout Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.

Value: Off, On
Lockout Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout
is applied.
Value
Number of Retries until Locked:
Specify how many login retries are allowed
until the account is locked out.
(1 to 10 times)
Lockout Duration:Specify how long the account is to be
locked out until it is unlocked.
(1 to 60 minutes)
Lockout Target: Specify the extent to which the account
lockout is applied. You can select from [All]
or [Remote Login Only]. Remote Login Only
locks out all operations from outside the
operation panel.
Locked out Users Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by
List selecting the user in the list, and selecting [Unlock].
NOTE
This function is displayed when account lockout policy is enabled.
9-4
Password Policy Settings

You can prohibit the setting and use of passwords that do not comply with the password policy.
Setting the Password Policy makes it more difficult to break the password.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication] > "Authentication
Security" [Password Policy Settings]
NOTE

The following settings can be selected.
Item Descriptions
Password Policy Select whether or not password policy is enabled.

Value: Off, On
Minimum Password Set the minimum password length of characters for password.
Length Value: Off, On (1 to 64 characters)
Password Set the password complexity.

Complexity Value
No more than two consecutive identical char: Off, On
At least one uppercase letter (A-Z): Off, On
At least one lowercase letter (a-z): Off, On
At least one number (0-9): Off, On
At least one symbol: Off, On
Maximum Password Set the maximum password age.

Age Value: Off, On (1 to 180 days)
Policy Violated User List of users do not meet password policy requirements.
List
9-5
Adding a User (Local User List)

You can add up to 1000 users (including the default login user name).
NOTE
By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.
Each user's properties are:
Machine Administrator
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Access Level: Machine Administrator
Administrator
User Name: Admin
Access Level: Administrator
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [Add/Edit Local User].
2 Enter the user information.

[Add] > Enter the user information
Item Descriptions
User Name*1 Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User Name*1 Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same
login user name cannot be registered.
Login Password*1 Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters). Reenter the same
password for confirmation.
9-6
Item Descriptions
Access Level Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.

Settings*1
Access Select [Administrator] or [User] for user access privileges.

Level
System If the user privileges set in the [Access Level] are [User], select the
Admin privileges that can be set from the following.
Permission • Original/Paper Settings
• Address Book
• User/Job Account Information
• Basic Network Settings
• Basic Device Settings
• Advanced Device/Network Settings
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered
his/her account name, can login without entering the account ID.
NOTE
• Search by account ID or account name. Select either [Search
(No.)] or [Search (Name)] to switch between [Search (No.)] and
[Search (Name)].
• Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account list.
Email Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address
will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need
any E-mail function.
ID Card Info Register ID card information.

Place the ID card on the ID card reader.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication
Kit is activated.
9-7
Item Descriptions
Local Set usage authority for each user.

Authorization*2
Print Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is
Restriction prohibited.
Applicable print functions are as follows:
• Print from Box
• Print from USB Drive
• Print Report
• Print from PC
Copy Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.
Restriction
Duplex Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Restriction
Combine Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

Restriction
EcoPrint Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Restriction
Send Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.

Restriction
Fax TX Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
Restriction*3
Storing Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.
Restriction
in Box
Storing Select whether or not use of the USB Drive store function is
Restr. in prohibited.
USB
My Panel You can register the language selection, initial screen, and shortcut
settings for each user. Settings registered here can be applied simply
by logging in.
*1 Be sure to enter the items.

*2 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled.
NOTE
• For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
• If you selected [Send] or [Fax] in the Default Screen for "My Panel", select the screen to
display from [Destination], [Machine Address Book], or [Ext Address Book].
9-8
3 Select [Save].
A new user is added on the local user list.
NOTE
If simple login is enabled, a confirmation screen appears when new registration is finished
asking if you will configure simple login settings. To configure simple login settings, select
[Yes]. If you select [No], you will return to the user list screen.
For the procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to the following:
Simple Login Settings (page 9-25)
9-9
Changing User Properties

Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege.
NOTE
To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.
You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [Add/Edit Local User].
2 Change the user properties.

Changing user properties
1 Select [ ] (information icon) for the user whose properties you wish to change.
NOTE
• Select [User Name] or [Login User ID] to sort the user list.
• Search by name or login user name. Select either [Search (Login)] or [Search
(Name)] to switch between [Search (Login)] and [Search (Name)].
9-10
Item
User Name
Login User Name*1
Login Password
Access Level Settings*1
Account Name*1
Email Address
ID Card Information*1
Local Authorization*1*2
My Panel
*1 You can change only when you log in with machine administrator authority.
*2 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled.
For details on each items, refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a
user property.
3 Select [Save].
The user information is changed.
Deleting a user
1 Select the user to delete.

The selected user will be deleted.
NOTE
The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted.
9-11
User Login Administration for Printing

It is possible to manage the users that print on this machine from a PC.
Setting Printer Driver

To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.
Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1 Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel],
NOTE
and then [Devices and Printers].
the printer driver.
3 Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

1 Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.
2 Set the User Login Administration.

[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use
the same User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to
type the name and password for each print job.
[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed
when attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a
printing is attempted.
[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will
be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the Login
user name list needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each
time a printing is attempted.
[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the
Windows user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the
name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with
only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user
name and password will appear.
9-12
3 Click [OK].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN

It is possible to manage the users that scan using TWAIN.

To manage the users that scan using TWAIN, the following settings are necessary in the TWAIN driver. Instructions are
based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1 Click the search box in the taskbar, and type "TWAIN Driver Setting" in there. Select
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. TWAIN Driver screen is displayed.
NOTE
In Windows 8.1, select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the
search box. Click [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver
Setting screen appears.
2 Select the machine, and click [Edit].

1 Click [User Authentication Settings].
2 Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.
3 Click [OK].
9-13
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA

It is possible to manage the users that scan using WIA.
Setting WIA Driver

To manage the users that scan using WIA, the following settings are necessary in the WIA driver. Instructions are based
on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1 Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel].
Click the search box in the Control Panel, and type "Scanner" in there. Select [View
scanners and cameras] in the search list. The Scanners and Cameras screen is
displayed.
NOTE
In Windows 8.1, click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click
[View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen
appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
1
2

1 Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User
Name and Password.
1 2
2 Click [OK].
9-14
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC

It is possible to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.
Setting Fax Driver

To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are
based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

NOTE
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printing preferences]
menu of the printer driver.
3 Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] window.

1 Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.
2 Set the User Login Administration.

[Use Specific Login User Name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and
password to use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user
does not have to type the name and password for each FAX job.
[Prompt for Login User Name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be
displayed when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered
each time a transmission is attempted.
3 Click [OK].
9-15
Local Authorization
Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.
NOTE
When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authentication].

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [Local Authorization].

Select [Off] or [On].
9-16
Server Settings
Set the server type when network authentication is enabled.

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [User Login] > [Network Authentication]

1 Select [NTLM], [Kerberos] or [Ext.] as the server type and enter the host name (256
characters or less) for the Authentication Server.
When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.
NOTE
• Selecting [Add/Edit/Delete Domain] displays the domain registration list. In the
domain registration list screen, select [Add/Edit], and enter the domain name. Up to
10 domain names can be registered.
• If two or more domains are registered, select [Default Domain] and select the default
domain.
2 Select [OK].
NOTE
If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
9-17
Group Authorization Settings

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.
NOTE
To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method in
"Enabling User Login Administration". Select [On] for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".
Group Authorization

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [Group Authorization].

Select [On] or [Off].
Group List (Up to 20)

Register the groups that are restricted the machine usage. Other users and groups belong to "Others".

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [Group List].
9-18

[Add] > Add information on each item
Item Descriptions
Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).
Group ID*1 Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and
4294967295).
Access Level Select [Administrator] or [User] for group access privileges.
Print Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the
printer.
• Print from Box
• Print Report
• Print from PC
Copy Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Duplex Restriction Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restriction Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
Fax TX Restriction*2 Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing Restriction in Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document
Box boxes.
Storing Restr. in USB Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the USB drive.
*1 For "Group ID", specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by Active Directory of Windows.

NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
3 Register the group.

Select [Save].
A new group is added on the group list.
9-19
Guest Authorization Settings

When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are
allowed to use.
NOTE
To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".
Enabling Guest Authorization

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [Guest Authorization Set.].

NOTE
• If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Logout] key must be selected when
logging in.
• In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to
use a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings
in the guest properties.
9-20
Configuring Guest Property

Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [Guest Property].

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.
Item Descriptions
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
The default setting is "GuestUser".
Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.

If the user does not belong to any account, select [Other Account].
9-21
Item Descriptions
Authorization Set usage authority for each user.

Rules The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Print Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is
prohibited.
• Print from Box
Copy Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.
Duplex Restriction:
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restrict.:
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction:
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.
Fax TX Restriction:*1
Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
Storing Restriction in Box:
Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in USB:
Select whether or not use of the USB Drive store function is
prohibited.
3 Register the guest user information.

Select [OK].
9-22
Obtain NW User Property

Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and E-mail
address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of
E-mail.
NOTE
To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the
authentication method in "Enabling User Login Administration". Select [On] for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [Obtain NW User Property].

Select [On] for "Obtain NW User Property" and add information on each item
Item Descriptions
LDAP Server Information
Server Name*1 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to
64 characters). If a server name is not entered, user
information will be acquired from the server set for Network
Authentication.
Port Port number for LDAP server. The default port number is
389.
Acquisition of User Information
Name 1*2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be
displayed from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
Name 2*3 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be
displayed from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
Email Address*4 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address from
the LDAP server (up to 256 characters).
Authentic at Type*5 Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL].

After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the
power off and then on.
9-23
Item Descriptions
Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds
(from 5 to 255 seconds).
LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of

security employed by the LDAP server. The value is [Off],
[SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server
name entered in the network authentication.
*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, display Name of Attribute may be used as "Name 1".
*3 "Name 2" can be left out. When you assign display Name in "Name 1" and department in
"Name 2", and if the value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is
"Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as "Mike Smith Sales".
*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.
*5 Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".
3 Select [OK].
9-24
Simple Login Settings

The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to
use this functionality.
NOTE
• For user registration, refer to the following:
• To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".
• When the guest authorization setting is enabled, the Simple Login screen is not displayed.
Enabling Simple Login

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [Simple Login].

9-25
Simple Login Key

Register users to use simple login. You can add up to 20 users.

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [Simple Login Key].

1 Select the key to which you want to register a user.
2 Enter the user name to be displayed.
NOTE
3 Select [Select user].
4 To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users,
select [Network User].
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
Specifying the user from local users

Select the user to be set for simple login.
NOTE
• Search by login user name or name. Select either [Search (Login)] or [Search (Name)] to
switch between [Search (Login)] and [Search (Name)].
• Select [User Name] or [Login User Name] to sort the user list.
9-26
Specifying the user from network users
&DQFHO 6LPSOH/RJLQ.H\V 8VHU 2.
/RJLQ8VHU1DPH
(QWHUDXVHUQDPH
/RJLQ3DVVZRUG
(QWHUDSDVVZRUG
Select the entry field for "Login User Name" and "Login Password", enter the information of
the user to be registered, and select [OK].
If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, select the
"Domain" and select the domain where the user is registered.
NOTE
5 Select [On] or [Off] for "Password".
6 Select the user icon to be displayed.
3 Register the user.

Select [Save].
9-27
ID Card Settings
If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.
NOTE
This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated.
Keyboard Login
When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by keyboard is allowed.

NOTE
2 Select "ID Card Settings" [Keyboard Login].

Select [Permit] or [Prohibit].
9-28
Additional Authentication
Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by ID card.
NOTE
This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in "Network Authentication".

NOTE
2 Select "ID Card Settings" [Additional Authentication].

Select [Off], [Use Password] or [Use PIN Code].
NOTE
[Use PIN Code] is displayed only when using PIN Code Authorization.
PIN Login (page 9-30)
9-29
PIN Login
NOTE
When using PIN Code Authorization, the network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected for
server type.
Server Settings (page 9-17)

NOTE
2 Select "User Login Setting" [PIN Login].

9-30
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration
Using User Login Administration

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use
this machine.
Use the procedure below to login and logout.
Login
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:
Login (page 2-30)
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Logout] key to return to the login user name and login password entry
screen.
9-31
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting
Overview of Job Accounting

Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each
account.
1 Enable job 2 Setting an 3 Enter the assigned 4 Count the number of

accounting. (page account. (page account ID when pages copied, printed,
9-33) 9-34) performing the job. scanned and faxed.
(page 9-31)
A: 00000001
100 400 200
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs

Printed from a PC
To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the
printer driver on the PC.
1 Set Job Accounting for the PC 2 Execute printing. 3 Count the number of
on the network by using the pages printed.
printer driver. (page 9-38)
A: 00000001
100 400 200

B: 00000002
C: 00000003
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN

To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer
connected to the machine.
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-39)
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA

To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer
connected to the machine.
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 9-40)
Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver
on the PC.
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 9-41)
9-32
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting
Enabling Job Accounting

NOTE
2 Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting].

Select [Local] or [Network].
Select [Off] to disable job accounting.
NOTE
When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed
and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the
Account ID.
9-33
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Job Accounting (Local)

You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.
Adding an Account
Up to 1000 individual accounts can be added.

NOTE
2 Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Add/Edit Job Accounting].
2 Enter the account information.

1 [Add] > Add information on each item
Item Descriptions
Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and

99999999).
Restriction This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of

sheets to load.
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-35)
NOTE
• For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
• Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account
ID.
2 Select [Redister].
A new account is added on the Account List.
9-34
Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Print Count".
Copier/Printer Count (page 9-50)
Restriction Items
[Individual] selected for "Copy/Printer Count"
Item Descriptions
Copy Restriction (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for copying.
Print Restriction (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for printing.
• Print from Box
• Print Report
• Print from PC
Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
Fax TX Restriction*1 Limits the number of sheets sent by fax.
Fax Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX Kits are
installed.
*1 This is displayed when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item Descriptions
Print Restriction (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
Fax TX Restriction*1 Limits the number of sheets sent by fax.
Fax Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX Kits are
installed.
*1 This is displayed when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
IMPORTANT
Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the "Fax Port Restriction" setting.
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in the following modes:
Item Descriptions
Off No restriction is applied.
Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage Restriction is applied.
9-35
Editing an Account
NOTE
2 Edit an account.
1 Select [ ] (information icon) for the account name you wish to edit.
NOTE
• Search by account ID or account name. Select either [Search (ID)] or [Search
(Name)] to switch between [Search (ID)] and [Search (Name)].
• Select [Account Name] or [ Account ID] to sort the account list.
2 Change the account information.
3 Select [Save].
The account information is changed.
9-36
Deleting an Account
NOTE
2 Delete an account.
1 Select the account name you wish to delete.
NOTE
• Select [Account Name] or [ Account ID] to sort the account list.

The account is deleted.
9-37
Job Accounting for Printing

The number of jobs to be printed from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting Printer Driver

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by
using the printer driver on the PC. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

NOTE
the printer driver.
3 Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

1 Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.
2 Set the Account ID.

[Use specific account ID]: Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the
entered Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID
for each print job.
[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when
attempting a printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be
displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to
be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID
to be used needs to be selected from the list.
[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID]: When printing, the Windows
user name is searched in the "Account IDs" and printing is possible if the name is
registered. If the Account ID is not registered, the screen for entering the Account ID will
appear.
9-38
3 Click [OK].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN

The number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN can be managed by Job Accounting.

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the
TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1 Click the search box in the taskbar, and type "TWAIN Driver Setting" in there. Select
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. TWAIN Driver screen is displayed.
NOTE
In Windows 8.1, select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the
search box. Click [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver
Setting screen appears.
2 Select the machine, click [Edit].

1 Click [User Authentication Settings].
2 Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.
3 Click [OK].
9-39
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA

The number of jobs scanned by using WIA can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting WIA Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA
Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

1 Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then select [Windows System], [Control Panel].
Click the search box in the Control Panel, and type "Scanner" in there. Select [View
scanners and cameras] in the search list. The Scanners and Cameras screen is
displayed.
NOTE
In Windows 8.1, click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click
[View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen
appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
1
2
2 Configure WIA Driver.

1 Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.
2 Click [OK].
9-40
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a

Computer
The number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.
NOTE
FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.
Setting FAX Driver

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using
the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.

NOTE
2 Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select
[Printing preferences] from the resulting pull-down menu.
3 Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.

1 Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.
2 Set the Job Accounting.

[Use Specific Account ID]: This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the
same Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to
enter the Account ID for each FAX job.
[Prompt for Account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when
attempting a transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is
attempted.
3 Click [OK].
9-41
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Configuring Job Accounting

Default Counter Limit
When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any
number from 1 to 9,999,999.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Individual] or [Total] is selected for "Copy/Print Count".
Copier/Printer Count (page 9-50)

NOTE
2 Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting Setting].

Select the item for "Default Counter Limit" > use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the default
restriction on the number of sheets > [OK]
[Individual] selected for "Copy/Printer Count"
Item Description
Copy Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
copying.
Print Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
printing.
• Print from Box
• Print Report
• Print from PC
Scan Restriction (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
scanning (excludes copying).
Fax TX Restriction*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
sending faxes.
*1 This function is displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
9-42
[Total] selected for "Copy/Printer Count"
Item Description
Print Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets
used for copying and printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
scanning (excludes copying).
Fax TX Restriction*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
sending faxes.
*1 This function is displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
9-43
Count by Paper Size

This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).
NOTE
Paper size is available in five types, 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports.
In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If you do not
specify the media type, the number of used sheets will be counted for the specified sheet size, regardless of the media
type.

NOTE
2 Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting Setting].

1 "Count by Paper Size" [Paper Size 1 (to 5)] > [On]
2 Select [Paper Size].
3 Select the paper size.
4 Select [Media Type] to specify media type.
5 Select the media type.
6 Select [OK].
9-44
Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A
new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
The table below lists the item you can view.
Item Descriptions
Printed Pages Displays the number of pages used in printing for each of the following item.
Count by Function Displays the number of pages used to copy, print, FAX and their total.
Count by Paper Size Displays the number of pages used in the selected paper size as well as the number
of pages used in other paper sizes.
Count by Paper Size (page 9-44)
Count by Duplex Displays the number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode, Duplex (2-sided) mode
and the total for both.
Count by Combine Displays the number of pages used in Combine (None) mode, Combine (2 in 1)
mode, Combine (4 in 1) mode and the total for all three.
Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing, printing and other
functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned.
Fax Transmission Pages Displays the number of pages faxed. This function is displayed only when the optional
FAX Kit is installed.
Fax Transmission Time Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions. This function is displayed only when
the optional FAX Kit is installed.
Counter Reset Resets the counter.

Select [Reset] in the confirmation screen.

NOTE
2 Select "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting Counter].
9-45
2 Check the number of pages.

Total Accounting
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts
together at the same time.
1 Select [Total] to check the count.

Select [Counter Reset] to reset the counter.
2 Confirm the count and select [Close].
Each Job Account

This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When
checking Each Job Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.
1 Select the account.
NOTE
• Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account list.
• To display an account other than your own account, select [Other Account].
2 Check the count.

Select [Counter Reset] to reset the counter.
3 Confirm the count and select [Close].
9-46
Print Accounting Report

The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
When "Individual" is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count.
ACCOUNT. REPORT
If count by paper size is being performed, then the report will be printed per size.
Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.
1 Prepare paper.
Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE
3 Print the report.

"Job Accounting Setting" [Print Accounting Report] > [Print]
Accounting report is printed.
9-47
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting
Using Job Accounting

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Login
1 Enter the account ID using the numeric keys > [Login]
NOTE
• If you entered a wrong character, select [C] (Clear) and enter the account ID again.
• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and
login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.
• By selecting [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the
number of pages scanned.
When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password
appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the
account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.
2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.
9-48
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Apply Limit
Apply Limit
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below
describes the action taken.
Item Descriptions
Immediately*1 Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.
Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will
be rejected.
Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message.
*1 The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.

NOTE
2 "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting Setting] > "Default Setting" [Apply Limit]

Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert Only].
9-49
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Copier/Printer Count
Copier/Printer Count
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and
printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. For details, refer to the
following:
Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-35)
Counting the Number of Pages Printed (page 9-45)

NOTE
2 "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting Setting] > "Default Setting" [Copy/Printer
Count]

Select [Total] or [Individual].
9-50
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings
Unknown User Settings

Unknown ID Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User
Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.
The setting items are as follows.
Item Descriptions
Permit The job is permitted to be printed.
Reject The job is rejected (not printed).

NOTE
2 Select "Unknown User Settings" [Unknown ID Job].

Select [Permit] or [Reject].
9-51
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings
Registering Information for a User whose ID is

Unknown
If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job
History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].
Unknown ID Job (page 9-51)

NOTE
2 Select "Unknown User Settings" [User Property].

Enter the user information > [OK]
Item Descriptions
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Account Name Register an account for a user whose ID is unknown.
NOTE
• Search by account ID or account name. Select either [Search
(ID)] or [Search (Name)] to switch between [Search (ID)] and
[Search (Name)].
• Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account
list.
Authorization Rules Set usage authority.
The following restriction items are available:
Print Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is
prohibited.
• Print from PC
9-52
10 Troubleshooting
Regular Maintenance .................................. 10-2 Remove any jammed paper in Right
Cleaning ............................................ 10-2 Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) ................. 10-81
Cleaning Glass Platen ...................... 10-2 Remove any jammed paper in the
Cleaning inside of the Document Bridge Unit ...................................... 10-83
Processor .......................................... 10-2 Remove any jammed paper in the
Cleaning Slit Glass ........................... 10-3 Mailbox ........................................... 10-84
Toner Container Replacement .......... 10-4 Remove any jammed paper in the
Replace the Waste Toner Box .......... 10-7 Inner Finisher .................................. 10-85
Loading Paper .................................. 10-8 Remove any jammed paper in the
Replacing Staples (Inner Finisher) ...... 10-9 Document Processor (Reverse
Automatic) ....................................... 10-86
Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet
Finisher) ........................................... 10-11 Remove any jammed paper in the
Document Processor (Dual Scan) ... 10-88
Replacing Staples
(4,000-Sheet Finisher) .................... 10-12 Remove any jammed paper in the
Inserter ............................................ 10-90
Replacing Staples
(100-sheet Staple Finisher) ............ 10-14 Remove any jammed paper in the
Replacing Staples (Folding Unit) .... 10-15 Z-fold unit ........................................ 10-95
Disposing of the Staple Waste ........ 10-17 Remove any jammed paper in the
1,000-Sheet Finisher ..................... 10-117
Disposing of the Punch Waste ........ 10-19
Remove any jammed paper in the
Troubleshooting ........................................ 10-25 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet
Solving Malfunctions ....................... 10-25 Staple Finisher (Inner) .................. 10-120
Machine Operation Trouble ............ 10-25 Remove any jammed paper in the
Printed Image Trouble .................... 10-30 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple
Remote Operation .......................... 10-32 Finisher (Tray A) ........................... 10-121
Responding to Messages ............... 10-34 Remove any jammed paper in the
Adjustment/Maintenance .......................... 10-52 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple
Overview of Adjustment/ Finisher (Tray B) ........................... 10-125
Maintenance ................................... 10-52 Remove any jammed paper in
Tone Curve Adjustment ................... 10-53 the Folding Unit (4,000-sheet
Drum Refresh ................................. 10-54 Finisher) ........................................ 10-128
Calibration ....................................... 10-55 Remove any jammed paper in
Laser Scanner Cleaning ................. 10-55 the Folding Tray (4,000-sheet
Developer Refresh .......................... 10-55 Finisher) ........................................ 10-133
Clearing Paper Jams ................................ 10-56 Remove any jammed paper in
Jam Location Indicators .................. 10-56 the Folding Unit (100-sheet
Staple Finisher) ............................. 10-137
Remove any jammed paper in
Cassette 1 ....................................... 10-59 Remove any jammed paper in
the Folding Tray (100-sheet
Staple Finisher) ............................. 10-143
Cassette 2 ....................................... 10-62
Clearing a Staple Jam ............................. 10-147
Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) ..... 10-65 Clearing a staple jam of the Inner
Finisher ......................................... 10-147
Clearing a staple jam of the
Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) ............ 10-67
1,000-Sheet Finisher .................... 10-149
Remove any jammed paper in Clearing a staple jam of the
Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) ............ 10-69 4,000-sheet Finisher ..................... 10-152
Remove any jammed paper in Clearing a Staple Jam of the
Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) ................ 10-72 100-sheet Staple Finisher ............. 10-154
Remove any jammed paper in the Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding
Multipurpose Tray ........................... 10-74 Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) ........... 10-157
Remove any jammed paper in Right Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding
Cover 1 ........................................... 10-75 Unit (100-sheet Staple Finisher) ... 10-162
Remove any jammed paper in Right
Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) .................... 10-80
10-1
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Regular Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.
CAUTION
For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Cleaning Glass Platen

Wipe the backside of the original cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth
dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
IMPORTANT
Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
Cleaning inside of the Document Processor

When using the document processor that features dual scanning, clean the dual scanning unit with the supplied
cleaning cloth.
IMPORTANT
Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
1 Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment and

open the document processor cover.
10-2
2 Clean inside of the document processor.
Cleaning Slit Glass

When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the supplied cleaning cloth.
IMPORTANT
Clean the slit glass surface with the supplied cleaning cloth.
NOTE
Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
1 Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment.
2 Clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide.
10-3
Toner Container Replacement

When toner is empty, the following message will be displayed. Replace the toner container.
"Toner is empty."
When toner runs low, the following message will be displayed. Make sure you have a new toner container available for
replacement.
"Toner is low. (Replace when empty.)"
NOTE
• For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine may
cause image defects and product failure.
• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer
convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new
products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is
only used anonymously for the above purposes.
CAUTION
1 Open the front cover.
NOTE
If you close the toner container cover before replacing the container, select [Open Toner
Container Cover].
2 Remove the toner container.
10-4
3 Put used toner container into the plastic waste bag.
4 Remove the new toner container from the box.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the points shown below.
5 Tap the toner container.
5~6 5~6
6 Shake the toner container.
5~6 5~6
5~6
10-5
7 Install the toner container.
CLICK!
IMPORTANT
Insert the toner container all the way.
8 Close the toner container cover.
9 Close the front cover.
NOTE
• If the toner container cover or front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.
• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
10-6
Replace the Waste Toner Box

When the waste toner box is full, the following message will be displayed. Immediately replace the waste toner box.
"Replace the waste toner box."
CAUTION
1 Open the waste toner box cover.
2 Remove the Waste Toner Box.
3 Put used Waste Toner Box into the plastic waste bag.
4 Remove the new Waste Toner Box.
10-7
5 Install the Waste Toner Box.
CLICK!
6 Close the waste toner box cover.
NOTE
Return the exhausted waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected waste toner box will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Loading Paper
When Cassette # runs out of paper, the following messages will be displayed.
"Add paper in cassette #"
"Add paper in Multipurpose tray"
Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder (page 3-14)
Loading in the Side Feeder (page 3-16)
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-6)
NOTE
If [Show Paper Setup Message] is set to [On], the confirmation screen for the paper setting will be displayed when a
new paper is set. If a paper is changed, change the settings of the paper.
10-8
Replacing Staples (Inner Finisher)

When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to
be replenished with staples.
"Staple is empty."
NOTE
If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.
1 Open the inner finisher unit.
2 Open the staple cover.
3 Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.
10-9
4 Replace the staples.
1 2
5 Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.
6 Return the staple cover to the original position.
7 Return the unit to the original position.
10-10
Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet Finisher)

"Staple is empty"
NOTE
1 Open the finisher front cover.
1 2
10-11
5 Close the cover.
Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher)

"Staple is empty."
NOTE
1 Open the finisher front cover 1.
10-12
2 Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).
2
1
4 Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).
5 Close the cover.
10-13
Replacing Staples (100-sheet Staple Finisher)

"Staple is empty."
NOTE
2
1
10-14
5 Close the cover.
Replacing Staples (Folding Unit)

"Staple is empty."
NOTE
1 Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.
10-15
2 Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).
C
B

2 2
1
1
1 1
4 Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).
5 Close the covers.
10-16
Disposing of the Staple Waste

When the staple waste box is full, the following messages will be displayed. Empty the staple waste box.
"Check the staple waste box."
Leave the power switch on the machine switched ON while performing this procedure.
2 Remove the Staple Waste Box.
NOTE
Take care not to spill the staple waste when removing the box.
3 Empty the Staple Waste Box.
10-17
4 Install the Staple Waste Box.
5 Close the cover.
10-18
Disposing of the Punch Waste

When the waste punch box is full, the following messages will be displayed. Empty the punch waste box.
"Empty the punch waste box"
Leave the power switch on the machine switched ON while performing this procedure.
Inner Finisher
2 Remove the Punch Waste Box.
NOTE
Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.
10-19
3 Empty the Punch Waste Box.
4 Install the Punch Waste Box.
10-20
NOTE
10-21
5 Close the cover.
4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher
10-22
NOTE
10-23
5 Close the cover.
10-24
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following
pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.
To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Display for Device Information (page 2-22)
Machine Operation Trouble

When the following machine operation troubles occur, implement appropriate procedures.
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
An application does not Is the Auto Panel Reset time short? Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30 page 8-7
start. seconds or more.
The screen does not Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC ―
respond when the power outlet.
switch is turned on.
The touch panel is not Is the touch panel operated with wet Dry your hands to operate the touch ―
responsive or hands? panel.
malfunctions.
Are you operating with gloves on? Use your bare hands or a stylus pen ―
to operate the touch panel.
Is the machine installed near a Install the machine away from ―

device that generates electrical devices that generate electrical
noise (generator, air conditioner, noise.
etc.)?
Pressing the [Start] key Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response page 10-34
does not produce copies. to the message and respond
accordingly.
Is the machine in Sleep mode? Select any key on the operation page 2-46
panel to recover the machine from
Sleep mode.
Blank sheets are ejected. Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the page 5-2
platen, place them face-down and
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
When placing originals in the page 5-3

document processor, place them
face-up.
― Check that the settings of the ―

application software.
10-25
Reference
Page
Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4
― Turn the orientation 180 degrees page 3-4

around in which the paper is
positioned.
Is the paper of the supported type? Remove the paper, turn it over, and page 3-4
Is it in good condition? reload it.
Is the paper curled, folded or Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4
wrinkled?
Are there any loose scraps or Remove any jammed paper. page 10-56
jammed paper in the machine?
2 or more sheets are ― Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

overlaps when ejected.
(multi feed)
Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4
― Turn the orientation 180 degrees page 3-4

positioned.
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4
Printouts are curled. ― Turn the orientation 180 degrees page 3-4
positioned.
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4
Printer driver cannot be Is the driver installed with the host Specify the IP address instead of page 2-51
installed. name while Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct the host name.
function is available?
10-26
Reference
Page
Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC ―
outlet.
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the power switch. page 2-10
Are the USB cable and network Connect the correct USB cable and page 2-8
cable connected? network cable securely.
Is the print job paused? Resume printing. page 7-11
When the wired or Wi-Fi network is The number of host name and ―
configured using the name domain name which can be used
resolution, does the IP address with the machine is one
(private address) of the other respectively. Configure the network
network which can not access under this restriction.
coexists?
Change the settings of name Command
resolution such as NetBEUI and Center RX
DNS, or network environment User
settings. Guide
Select Wi-Fi, Wired Network or page 8-70

Optional Network as an
unlimited-use network on Primary
Network (Client).
Set to [Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi] page 8-60

either one of [On], and set the other
setting to [Off].
Cannot print with USB Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host page 8-71
drive. settings.
USB drive not ― Check that the USB drive is ―
recognized. securely plugged into the machine.
While "Auto-IP" is already Is a value other than "0.0.0.0" Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of page 2-33
set to [On], the IP entered for the link local address of TCP/IP(v4).
address is not assigned TCP/IP(v4)?
automatically.
10-27
Reference
Page
Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable page 2-8
securely.
Have the network settings for the Configure the TCP/IP settings page 8-58
equipment been configured properly.
properly?
Have the folder sharing settings Check sharing settings and access page 3-25
been configured properly? privileges under the folder
properties.
Is the selected interface selected as Specify the host name or IP address page 8-70
the Primary Network? of the interface selected as the
Primary Network, or set the
interface to be used again.
Has the SMB protocol been set to Set the SMB protocol setting to page 8-60
[On]? [On].
Has [Host Name] been entered Check the name of the computer to page 5-26
properly? *1 which data is being sent.
Has [Path] been entered properly? Check the share name for the page 5-26
shared folder.
Has [Login User Name] been Check the domain name and login page 5-26
entered properly? *1 *2 user name.
Has the same domain name been Delete the domain name and page 5-26
used for [Host Name] and [Login backslash
User Name]? ("/") from [Login User Name].
Has [Login Password] been Check the login password. page 5-26
entered properly?
Have exceptions for Windows Configure exceptions for Windows page 3-29
Firewall been configured properly? Firewall properly.
Do the time settings for the Set the equipment, domain server, ―
equipment, domain server, and data and data destination computer to
destination computer differ? the same time.
Is the screen displaying Send error? Refer to Responding to Send Error. page 10-48
Cannot send via the Is the E-mail send size limit set in Check the limit value is entered to page 2-71
e-mail. the SMTP server registered on the "E-mail Size Limit" of [E-mail]
machine? setting in Command Center RX and
change the value as necessary.
The machine is emitting Check the room temperature to see Depending on the printing ―
steam in the area around if it is low, or if damp paper was environment and the paper's
the paper ejection slot. used. condition, the heat generated during
printing will cause the moisture in
the paper to evaporate, and the
steam emitted may look like smoke.
This is not a problem, and you can
continue printing. If the steam
concerns you, raise the room
temperature, or replace the paper
with a newer, dryer paper.
10-28
Reference
Page
Cannot create Is the proper language selected? Check the language to extract. page 6-76
Searchable PDF file.
Can the texts on the original not be Check the following: page 6-76
recognized as texts, or is the PDF • The original orientation is correct.
creation time taken?
• When setting the originals with the
mixed orientation at once, [On] is
selected for [Auto Image Rotation].
Cannot search a text that Have you set [OCR Text Set [OCR Text Recognition] in page 6-76
you want to search on the Recognition] in [File Format]? [File Format].
PDF file.
Are the texts of the scanned original Set [Density] to darker level. page 6-34
fainted or too light?
Is the background of the scanned Set [Background Density Adj.] to page 6-34
original too dark and the texts are [Auto] or [Manual] and manually page 6-37
difficult to recognize? adjust the density lighter. Otherwise,
set [Density] to darker level.
Is the text or image on the back of Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to page 6-38
the original visible on the front? [On].
Cannot find the machine Did you search by specifying the For security reasons, [HTTP] ―
with WSD. machine’s IP address or host protocol is set to [Off], and therefore
name? you cannot search by IP address or
host name.
*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).
*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
10-29
Printed Image Trouble

When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.
Reference
Page
Printouts are totally too Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2
light.
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-34
page 8-84
Is there a message on the screen Replace the toner container. page 10-4
about adding the toner?
Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable [EcoPrint] mode. page 8-34
― Run [Developer Refresh]. page 10-55
― Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-55
― Make sure the paper type setting is page 8-17

correct for the paper being used.
White background parts Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-34
of the image appear to page 8-84
have a slight overall
coloration. ― Run [Calibration]. page 10-55
― Perform the drum refresh, and then page 8-86

set [Drum Heater] to [On].
Copies have a moire Is the original a printed photograph? When making copies page 6-35
pattern (dots grouped Set the original image to
together in patterns and [Printer Output] or [Book/
not aligned uniformly). Magazine] in [Photo].
Texts are not clearly Did you choose appropriate image Select appropriate image quality. page 6-35
printed. quality for the original?
Black or color dots appear Is the original holder or the glass Clean the original holder or the page 10-2
on the white background. platen dirty? glass platen.
10-30
Reference
Page
Printed images are fuzzy. Is the device used in an Use in an environment that has ―
Printed images are cut environment with high humidity or suitable humidity.
off. where the temperature or humidity
changes suddenly?
― Run [Drum Refresh]. page 10-54
Printed images are Are the originals placed correctly? When placing originals on the platen, page 5-2
skewed. align them with the original size
indicator plates.
When placing originals in the page 5-3

document processor, align the
original width guides securely before
placing the originals.
Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper page 3-4
width guides.
Printed images have Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. page 10-3
vertical lines.
― Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-55
Dirt on the top edge or Is the interior of the machine dirty? Open the right cover. If the machine page 10-2
back of the paper. interior is dirty with toner, clean it
using soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
Part of the image is ― Open and then close the right cover. ―
periodically faint or shows
white lines. ― Run [Drum Refresh]. page 10-54
Print on the back of the ― Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to page 6-38

sheet is visible on the [On]. page 8-34
front.
10-31
Remote Operation
This function enables the system administrator to explain how to operate the panel and troubleshoot to user, by
accessing operation panel of the machine at remote using browser and VNC software.
Executing Remote Operation from Browser

The supported Browser is as follows. We recommend the latest version of browser to use Remote Operation.
• Google Chrome (Version 21.0 or later)
• Internet Explorer (Version 9.0 or later)
• Microsoft Edge
• Mozilla Firefox (Version 14.0 or later)
• Safari (Version 5.0 or later)
This procedure explains how to execute Remote Operation from Command Center RX using Google Chrome.
NOTE
To execute Remote Operation using other browsers, refer to the following:

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol
Settings]
2 Set "Enhanced VNC over SSL" to [On].

NOTE
You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX.
3 Configure settings for remote operation.

1 [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Connectivity" [Remote
Operation] > [On]
2 Select [Off], [Use Password], or [Administrator Only].

When you select [Use Password], enter the password in "Password" and "Confirm Password", then
select [OK].
Remote Operation (page 8-69)
NOTE
You can configure settings for remote operation using Command Center RX
4 Restart the machine.

10-32
5 Start up the browser.

Enter "https://" and host name of the machine to access the Command Center RX
Accessing Command Center RX (page 2-68).
6 Select [Device Information/Remote Operation] > [Remote

Operation].
7 Click [Start] button.
NOTE
• If the user is logged in to the device, the permission confirmation screen will be displayed
on the operation panel. Select [Yes].
• If pop-up blocking of the browser occurs during connection of the Remote Operation,
select Always allow pop-ups from https:// [host name], and click Done. Perform Remote
Operation after waiting 1 minute or more.
When the Remote Operation is started up, the operation panel screen will be displayed on the
system administrator's or user's PC screen.
Executing Remote Operation from VNC Software

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network Settings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol
Settings]
2 Set "Enhanced VNC (RFB)" to [On].

NOTE
• When setting "VNC (RFB) over SSL" to [On], the communication is encrypted.
• You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX.
3 Startup the remote operation.

1 Start up the VNC software.
2 Enter the following format separated by a colon to start up the remote operation.
"IP address: port number"
NOTE
When setting "VNC (RFB)" to [On] in step 2, the default port number is 9062. When
setting "VNC (RFB) over SSL " to [On], the default port number is 9063.
10-33
Responding to Messages
If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Display for Device Information (page 2-22)
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Acceptable staple Is the acceptable number of Select [Continue] to print —

count exceeded.*1 sheets exceeded? without using Staple. Select
[Cancel] to cancel the job.
Access point was not ― Check if the access point has ―

detected. been set correctly.
Add paper in cassette Is the indicated cassette out of Load paper. page 3-2
#. paper? Select the available paper.
Select [Continue] to print.
Are five or less envelopes Pull the cassette and loosen the ―
loaded in the cassette? paper length and width guides
slightly.
Add paper in Is the paper of the selected size Load paper. page 5-6
Multipurpose tray. loaded in the multipurpose tray? Select the available paper.
Adjusting Scanner. — The machine is under the —

adjustment to maintain its
quality. Please wait.
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
10-34
Reference
Page
Box is not found. — The specified box cannot be —

found. Job is canceled. Select
[End].
Box limit exceeded.*1 Is [End] displayed on the The specified box is full, and no —
screen? further storage is available. Job
is canceled. Select [End]. Try to
perform the job again after
printing or deleting data from the
box.
— Repeat Copy box is full, and no —

further repeat copy is available.
Select [Continue] to print
scanned pages. Select [Cancel]
to cancel the job.
Broadcast error — An error has occurred during —

broadcast transmission. The job
is canceled. Select [End].
Reference
Page
Calibrating... ― The machine is under the ―

Cannot Banner Print. ― System stamp is set up. ―

Banner print cannot be carried
out.
Job is canceled. Select [End].
Cannot connect to — Set machine time to match the page 2-32

Authentication server’s time.
Server.*1
— Check the domain name. page 9-2
— Check the host name. page 9-2
— Check the connection status —

with the server.
Cannot connect to — Check the connection status —

Server. with the server.
Cannot connect. — This appears when the Wi-Fi or page 8-53

Wi-Fi Direct connection did not page 8-54
complete. Check the settings,
and check the signal conditions.
10-35
Reference
Page
Cannot duplex print Did you select a paper size/type If the selected paper is not page 6-52
on this paper.*1 that cannot be duplex printed? changed and [Continue] is
selected, duplex is released.
Cannot duplex print Select the available paper.
on this paper size.*1 Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot duplex print
on this paper type.*1
Cannot fold this Did you select a paper size/type If the selected paper is not page 6-26
paper. that cannot be folded? changed and [Continue] is
selected, fold is released.
Cannot fold this paper
Select the available paper.
size.
Cannot fold this paper
type.
Cannot offset this Did you select a paper size/type If the selected paper is not page 6-28
paper.*1 that cannot be offset? changed and [Continue] is
selected, offset is released.
Cannot offset this
paper size.*1
Cannot offset this
paper type.*1
Cannot output this Is the cassette you selected Select the available paper. —
paper to the tray. correct? Select [Continue] to print.
Cannot perform — Remote printing is prohibited. page 8-49

remote printing. The job is canceled. Select
[End].
Cannot print the — Only one copy is available. —

specified number of Select [Continue] to continue
copies.*1 printing. Select [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
Cannot process this ― Restricted by Authorization ―

job.*1 settings. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
― Restricted by Job Accounting. page 9-33

The job is canceled. Select
[End].
Cannot punch at the Have you selected a position If the selected paper is not page 6-31
specified position. that cannot be punched? changed and [Continue] is
selected, punch is released.
Cannot punch this Did you select a paper size/type If the selected paper is not page 6-31
paper. that cannot be punched? changed and [Continue] is
selected, punch is released.
Cannot punch this
paper size. Select the available paper.
Cannot punch this
paper type.
10-36
Reference
Page
Cannot read data in ― In registration process, the ID ―

this ID card. card information was not read
correctly. Hold again the ID card
over the ID card reading part.
If the same message still
appears, the
ID card may not be compatible
with this product. Change it to
another ID card.
Cannot recognize. ― Make sure your ID card has ―

been registered.
Cannot staple at the Have you selected a position If the selected paper is not page 6-29
specified position. that cannot be stapled? changed and [Continue] is
selected, staple is released.
Cannot staple this Did you select a paper size/type If the selected paper is not page 6-29
paper.*1 that cannot be stapled? changed and [Continue] is
selected, staple is released.
Cannot staple this
paper size.*1
Cannot staple this
paper type.*1
Cannot use ##### due ― Call service. ―

to a failure.
Cannot use following ― Scanner of this machine has ―

functions due to failed. Contact your service
scanner failure. representative. You can use the
>> Copy, Send, Fax, print function.
Storing in Box
Cannot use this — Call service. —

function due to a hard
disk failure.
Check the document Is the top cover of the document Close the document processor ―
processor. processor open? cover.
Is the document processor Close the document processor. ―

open?
Check the paper in the — The paper size is different. Set page 5-6
multipurpose tray. selected size paper and select
[Continue].
Check the side feeder. — The side feeder is not installed ―

correctly. Attach the side feeder.
Check the staple Is the staple waste box full? Follow the instructions on the page 10-17
waste box. screen, and empty the staple
waste box.
— The staple waste box is not page 10-17

installed correctly. Set it
correctly.
10-37
Reference
Page
Check the toner — Open the main unit front cover ―

container. and remove the toner container.
Shake carefully and replace.
NOTE
If you select [Open Toner
Container Cover], you can
open the Toner Container Cover
that you closed accidentally.
Confidential — The machine detects the ―

document was document guard pattern. Job is
detected. canceled. Select [End].
Reference
Page
Empty the punch Is the punch waste box full? Follow the instructions on the page 10-19
waste box. screen. and empty the punch
waste box.
Encrypted PDF Is the password you input Password is not entered or is —

Password error. correct? incorrect.
Error occurred at ― Open the cassette. Check inside ―

cassette #. the machine and remove the
paper.
Reference
Page
Failed to activate. ― Failed to activate the ―
application. Contact
administrator.
― Expansion Authentication is ―
disabled. Turn the power switch
off and on. If the error exists,
contact administrator.
10-38
Reference
Page
Failed to send via Is the machine and the PC to Check the network and SMB page 2-7
SMB. which the scanned image is to settings.
be sent connected to the • The network cable is
network? connected.
• The hub is not operating
properly.
• The server is not operating
properly.
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
Is the account information (user Check the following settings of —
ID, password) used to access the PC to which the scanned
the shared folder to which the image is to be sent.
scanned image is to be sent • Host name
incorrect?
• Path
• Login user name
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user,
specify the domain name.
[Login User ID]@[Domain
Name]
Example: sa720XXXX@km
• Login password
• Folder share permissions of
the recipient
Failed to specify Job — Failed to specify Job Accounting —
Accounting.*1 when processing the job
externally. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
Failed to store job — The job is canceled. Select —
retention data. [End].
FAX box limit — Follow the instructions on the FAX
exceeded. screen and delete documents Operation
from the FAX box to make room Guide
for FAX reception.
To check the canceled job,
select the [Status/Job Cancel]
key and then [Printing Jobs] to
check receipt result.
Finisher tray is full of Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper. Printing then —
paper. capacity exceeded? resumes.
Folding tray is full of Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper. Printing then —
paper. capacity exceeded? resumes.
Folding Unit is ― Close the folding unit. ―
detached.
10-39
Reference
Page
Hard Disk error. — An error has occurred on the —

hard disk. Job is canceled.
Select [End].
The error cords are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can
be saved at once has been
exceeded. Restart the system or
turn the power OFF/ON. If the
error still occurs, divide the file
into smaller files.
If the error occurs after the file is
divided, the hard disk is
damaged. Execute [System
Initialization].
04: Insufficient space on the
hard disk to complete this
operation. Move data or delete
unneeded data.
Reference
Page
Incorrect account — The account ID was incorrect —

ID.*1 when processing the job
Select [End].
Incorrect box — The box password was incorrect —

password. when processing the job
Select [End].
Incorrect Login User — The login user name or —

Name or Password.*1 password was incorrect when
processing the job externally.
[End].
Install the punch — Follow the instructions on the page 10-19

waste box. screen. and install the punch
waste box.
Install the waste toner — The waste toner box is not page 10-7
box. installed correctly. Set it
correctly.
10-40
Reference
Page
Job Accounting Is the acceptable printing count The printing count exceeded the —
restriction restricted by Job Accounting acceptable count restricted by
exceeded.*1 exceeded? Job Accounting. Cannot print
any more. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
Job separator tray is Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper and select —
full of paper. capacity exceeded? [Continue]. Printing then
resumes.
Reference
Page
KPDL error. *1 ― PostScript error has occurred. ―

[End].
Reference
Page
Machine failure. ― Internal error has occurred. ―
Make a note of the error code
displayed on the screen. Call
service.
Mailbox tray # is full Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper. Printing then —
of paper. capacity exceeded? resumes.
Main unit inner tray is Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper. Printing then —
full of paper. capacity exceeded? resumes.
Maximum number of Is the acceptable scanning Cannot scan pages any more. —
scanned pages. count exceeded? Follow the instructions on the
screen.
10-41
Reference
Page
Memory is full.*1 — The memory is full and the job —
cannot be continued. Select
[Continue] to print the scanned
pages. The print job cannot be
processed completely. Select
[Cancel] to cancel the job.
— The process cannot be —
performed due to insufficient
memory. If only [End] is
available, select [End]. The job
will be canceled.
When insufficient memory
occurred frequently, contact
your dealer or service
representative.
Reference
Page
Paper jam. ― If a paper jam occurs, the page 10-56

machine will stop and the
location of the jam will be
indicated on the screen. Leave
the machine on and follow the
instructions to remove the
jammed paper.
Paper left. — Remove paper from the finisher —

tray.
— Remove the paper from the —

folding tray of the finisher.
— Remove paper from the —

document finisher.
Perform Tone Curve Over long periods of use, the Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. page 10-53
Adjustment in the effects of the ambient
System Menu. temperature and humidity can
cause output hues to vary
slightly.
Performing Drum — The machine is under the —

Refresh… adjustment to maintain its
Preparing to print. — The machine is under the —

10-42
Reference
Page
Regulating the ― The machine is under the ―
temperature… adjustment to maintain its
Remove originals in Are there any originals left in the Remove originals from the ―
the document document processor? document processor.
processor.
Replace all originals — Remove originals from the —
and press [Continue]. document processor, put them
back in their original order, and
place them again. Select
[Continue] to resume printing.
Select [Cancel] to cancel the
job.
Running security — Running security function. —
function... Please wait.
Reference
Page
Scanner memory is — Scanning cannot be performed —
full.*1 due to insufficient memory of the
scanner. Follow the instructions
on the screen.
Scheduled sending — The number of jobs has —
jobs exceeded. exceeded the limit set for
delayed transmission. Select
[End]. The job is canceled.
Wait until the delayed
transmission is executed, or
cancel the delayed transmission
and then perform the job again.
Select another Is the cassette you selected The specified cassette is a fax —
cassette. correct? special stage.
Select another valid cassette.
Send Error.*1 — An error has occurred during page 10-48
transmission. The job is
canceled. Select [End]. Refer to
Responding to Send Error for
the error code and corrective
actions.
Skewed originals or — See the caution attached on the —
multi originals fed at document processor and check
once. the originals. If the originals are
jammed, follow the instructions
on the screen to remove the
originals.
10-43
Reference
Page
SSD error. — An error has occurred on the —
SSD. Job is canceled. Select
[End].
The error cords are as follows.
error still occurs, divide the file
into smaller files. If the error
occurs after the file is divided,
the SSD is damaged. Execute
[System Initialization].
04: Insufficient space on the
SSD to complete this operation.
Move data or delete unneeded
data.
NOTE
Please be aware that when you
carry out initialization of the
system, the data saved in SSD
will be erased.
Staple is empty. *1 Has the staple cartridge holder If the staples are depleted, the page 10-9
run out of staples? machine will stop and the page 10-11
location of staple depletion will
page 10-12
be indicated on the screen.
Leave the machine on and page 10-14
follow the instructions to replace page 10-15
the staple case. Select
[Continue] to print without
stapling. Select [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
Staple is empty. Has staple cartridge holder A Add staples to staple cartridge page 10-12
(Manual Staple) run out of staples? holder A.
Staple jam. — If a staple jam occurs, the page
machine will stop and the 10-147
location of the jam will be
indicated on the screen. Leave
the machine on and follow the
instructions to remove the
jammed staple.
System error. — System error has occurred. —
Follow the instructions on the
screen.
10-44
Reference
Page
The cover is open. Is there any cover which is Close the cover indicated on the ―
open? screen.
The device cannot be Are ten handheld devices Cancel a connection to a page 8-54
connected because connected simultaneously? portable device that is not being
allowed connections used, or set the machine's auto
would be exceeded. disconnect time to break
portable device connections.
The password does Is the password expired? Change the login password. page 9-5
not meet password The job is canceled. Select page 9-6
policy. [End].
Is the password policy Confirm the password policy page 9-5

requirement (such as password requirements and change the page 9-6
length or required characters) login password.
changed? The job is canceled. Select
[End].
The phone receiver is ― Put down the receiver. ―

off the hook.
The slit glass requires — Clean the slit glass using the page 10-3
cleaning. cleaning cloth supplied with the
document processor.
The toner container is — The toner container is —

improperly installed. improperly installed or not
installed.
Open the front cover and set the
toner container correctly.
This ID card is already — Your ID card has already been —

registered to another registered. Change it to another
user. ID card.
This user account is — Contact administrator. ―

locked out. The job is canceled. Select
[End].
Time for maintenance — Call service. —

soon. #####
Toner is empty. — Replace the toner container to page 10-4

our specified toner container.
Toner is low. (Replace — It is almost time to replace the —

when empty.) toner container. Obtain a new
toner container.
Toner type mismatch. Does the type of toner you have Please install correct toner. —
match the model?
Tray # is full of paper. Is the acceptable storage Remove the paper. Printing then —
capacity exceeded? resumes.
10-45
Reference
Page
USB Drive error.*1 Is writing to a USB drive An error occurred in the USB ―
prohibited? drive. The job stopped. Select
[End].
The error cord is as follows.
01: Connect a USB drive that
can be written to.
― An error occurred in the USB page 5-70

drive. The job stopped. Select
[End].
The error cord is as follows.
error still occurs, the USB drive
is not compatible with the
machine. Use the USB drive
formatted by this machine. If the
USB drive cannot be formatted,
it is damaged. Connect a
compatible USB drive.
USB Drive is full.*1 ― The job is canceled. Select ―

[End].
Insufficient free space in the
USB drive. Delete unneeded
files.
USB Drive is not Is the USB drive formatted by Perform [Format] on this ―
formatted. this machine? machine.
Reference
Page
Warning for high ― Print quality may be ―

temperature. Adjust deteriorated. Adjust the
the room temperature. temperature and the humidity of
your room.
Warning for low — Print quality may be —

temperature. Adjust deteriorated. Adjust the
the room temperature. temperature and the humidity of
your room.
Warning low memory. — Cannot start the job. Try again —

later.
10-46
Reference
Page
Waste toner box — It is almost time to replace the —

almost full. waste toner box. Obtain a new
waste toner box.
Waste toner box is Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. page 10-7
full.
Reference
Page
You cannot use this — You cannot use the specified —

box. box. Job is canceled. Select
[End].
10-47
Responding to Send Error
Error Reference
Message Corrective Actions
Code Page
1101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the host name of the SMTP server on the page 2-71
Failed to send i-FAX. Command Center RX.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. page 5-29
Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. page 5-26
1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. page 5-26
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the
domain name.
• Host name
• Path
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following on the Command Center page 2-71
RX.
• SMTP login user name and login password
• POP3 login user name and login password
• E-mail size limit
Failed to send i-FAX. Check the following on the Command Center Refer to
RX. FAX
• SMTP login user name and login password Operation
Guide
• POP3 login user name and login password
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings. page 5-29
NOTE
domain name.
• Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. page 5-26
NOTE
domain name.
• Path
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings. page 5-29
• Path
10-48
Error Reference
Code Page
1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address. page 5-24
NOTE
If the address is rejected by the domain, you
cannot send the email.
Failed to send i-FAX. Check the i-FAX address. Refer to

FAX
NOTE Operation
If the address is rejected by the domain, you Guide
cannot send the email.
1105 Failed to send via SMB. Check the following settings. page 8-58
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network
Settings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Detail]
>
[SMB Client (Transmission)]
Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the page 2-71
Command Center RX.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the following settings. page 8-58
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Network
Settings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Detail]
>
[FTP Client (Transmission)]
Failed to send i-FAX. Select [On] of the i-FAX settings on the Refer to
Command Center RX. FAX
Operation
Guide
1106 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the sender address of SMTP on the page 2-71
Failed to send i-FAX. Command Center RX.
1131 Failed to send via FTP. Enable the SSL. page 8-83
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Security
Settings] > "Network" [SSL]
1132 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following of the SMTP server. Refer to the
• Is SMTP over SSL available? Command
Center RX
• Is the encryption available?
User
Guide.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP server. —
• Is FTPS available?
• Is the encryption available?
1133 Job is canceled. Press [End]. Server certificate has expired. —

Check the network and FTP settings.
• Check time/date setting of the machine.
• Make sure server is using a valid certificate.
1134 Job is canceled. Press [End]. Check the network and Command Center RX. —
• Network Settings : Protocol, FTP
Client(Transimssion):Hash
10-49
Error Reference
Code Page
2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings. —
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• Port number
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings. —
• Port number
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network and Command Center RX. page 2-71
Failed to send i-FAX. • The network cable is connected.
• POP3 server name of the POP3 user
• SMTP server name
2102 Failed to send via FTP. Check the network. —

2103 • The network cable is connected.
Check the following of the FTP server. —

• Is FTP available?
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network. —

Failed to send i-FAX. • The network cable is connected.
2201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network. —

2202 Failed to send via FTP. • The network cable is connected.
2203 Failed to send via SMB. • The hub is not operating properly.
2231 Failed to send i-FAX. • The server is not operating properly.
2204 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings page 2-71
Failed to send i-FAX. on the Command Center RX.
3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of both the —
Failed to send i-FAX. sender and the recipient.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network. —

3201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the SMTP user authentication method of —
Failed to send i-FAX. the recipient.
10-50
Error Reference
Code Page
4801 Job is canceled. Press [End]. Turn the power switch off and back on. If this —
error occurs several times, make a note of the
displayed error code and contact your service
representative.
4802 Failed to send the email. Turn the power switch off and back on. If this —
Check the encryption certificate error occurs several times, make a note of the
of each destination by the displayed error code and contact your service
Command Center RX.
representative.
Job is canceled. Press [End].
4803 Job is canceled. Press [End]. Server certificate has expired. —

Check the network and SMTP settings.
• Check time/date setting of the machine.
• Make sure server is using a valid certificate.
4804 Job is canceled. Press [End]. Check the network and Command Center RX. —
• Network Settings : Protocol, SMTP(E-mail
TX):Hash
0007 — Turn the power switch off and back on. If this page 2-10
4201 error occurs several times, make a note of the
displayed error code and contact your service
4701
representative.
5101
5102
5103
5104
7101
7102
7103
720f
9181 — The scanned original exceeds the acceptable —

number of pages of 999. Send the excess pages
separately.
10-51
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance
If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/
Maintenance in the system menu.
The table below lists the item you can carry out.
Item Description Reference Page
Tone Curve Adjustment The printed output tone may differ from the original. Perform this page 10-53
function to ensure consistency with the original tone.
Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. page 10-54
Calibration Calibrate the device to ensure correct toner overlapping and page 10-55
consistency with the original tone.
Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout. page 10-55
Developer Refresh Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even page 10-55
though there is enough toner.
10-52
Tone Curve Adjustment

After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the printed output tone may differ from
the original. Perform this function to ensure consistency with the original tone. Before executing Tone Curve Adjustment,
execute calibration.
If calibration does not improve the tones, perform Tone Curve Adjustment.
A total of 3 pattern pages (No. 1 to 3) are printed during adjustment. The printed patterns are read sequentially during
the adjustment.
1 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
cassettes.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).

1 [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment"
[Tone Curve Adjustment]
2 Select [Copy/Print (600dpi)] or [Print (1200dpi)].
NOTE
Select [Print (1200dpi)] if you want to adjust the printed output tone in printer resolution
1200 dpi.
10-53
3 Adjust the tone curve.

1 Select [Start]. A pattern is printed.
Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the pattern.
2 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with
the arrows toward the back.
3 Select [Start]. The pattern is read and adjustment begins.

The second pattern is output.
4 Check that the number "2" (to "3") is printed at the bottom of the pattern and repeat steps 2
to 3 twice to read patterns 2 and 3 in sequence.
5 Select [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.
Drum Refresh
Remove image blur and white dots from the printout.
NOTE
Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.

[Drum Refresh]
2 Perform the drum refresh.

Select [Start]. "Drum Refresh" begins.
10-54
Calibration
Calibrate the device to ensure correct toner overlapping and consistency with the original tone.

[Calibration]
2 Perform the calibration.

Select [Start]. "Calibration" begins.
NOTE
When consistency with the original tone is not ensured even after performing calibration,
Laser Scanner Cleaning

Remove vertical white lines from the printout.

[Laser Scanner Cleaning]
2 Perform the laser scanner cleaning.

Select [Start]. "Laser Scanner Cleaning" begins.
Developer Refresh
Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner.

[Developer Refresh]
2 Perform the Developer Refresh.

Select [Start]. "Developer Refresh" begins.
NOTE
Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
10-55
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, printing stops and the location at which the paper jam has occurred and the following message
appear on the touch panel.
"Paper Jam."
Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper.
Jam Location Indicators

3DSHUMDP +ROG 3DSHUMDP +ROG
1 (QHUJ\6DYHU
2SHQIXVHUFRYHU$DQG
UHPRYHWKHSDSHU
8 (QHUJ\6DYHU
&OHDUWKHSDSHUMDPPHGLQ5LJKW&RYHU
3UHVV>6WDUW+HOS@WRIROORZWKHLQVWUXFWLRQV
7
3
2
5HVHW 5HVHW
6WDUW+HOS
-$0
&ORVH+HOS 5HWXUQWR7RS 6
4 5
1 Shows the location of a paper jam.
2 Shows the Help screen. The Help screen shows the procedure to clear the jam.
3 Returns to the previous step.
4 Closes the Help screen and returns to the original screen.
5 Shows the selected step.
6 Returns to step 1.
7 Advances to the next step.
8 Shows the removal procedure.
10-56
If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.
3DSHUMDP +ROG
(QHUJ\6DYHU
&OHDUWKHSDSHUMDPPHGLQ5LJKW&RYHU
L
3UHVV>6WDUW+HOS@WRIROORZWKHLQVWUXFWLRQV

5HVHW
6WDUW+HOS
-$0
K
M
S O1
Q O12 J H P
R R O2 O11 H P
P P
R R H
O3 O10 H
H G
O4 O9 A
H
O5 O8 B F
O7
O6 E C
T I
U D
N3
N2
N4
N1
10-57
Paper Jam Location Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference Page
A Cassette 1 page 10-59
B Cassette 2 page 10-62
C Cassette 3 (500-sheet×2) page 10-65
Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×1) page 10-67
D Cassette 4 (500-sheet×2) page 10-65
E Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) page 10-69
F Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) page 10-72
G Multipurpose Tray page 10-74
H Right Cover 1 page 10-75
I Right Cover 2 page 10-80
J Bridge Unit page 10-83
K Mailbox page 10-84
L Inner Finisher page 10-85
M Document Processor page 10-86

page 10-88
N1 Inserter page 10-90
N2 page 10-91
N3 page 10-93
N4 page 10-94
O1 Z fold unit page 10-95
O2 page 10-97
O3 page 10-98
O4 page 10-100
O5 page 10-102
O6 page 10-104
O7 page 10-106
O8 page 10-108
O9 page 10-110
O10 page 10-111
O11 page 10-113
O12 page 10-115
P 1,000-sheet Finisher page 10-117
Q 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple page 10-120

Finisher (Inner)
R 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple page 10-121

Finisher (Tray A)
10-58
Paper Jam Location Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference Page
S 4,000-sheet Finisher/100-sheet Staple page 10-125

Finisher (Tray B)
T Folding Unit page 10-128

page 10-137
U Folding Tray page 10-133

page 10-143
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes
with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1

Here, we'll explain the procedures for cassette 1, as an example.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.
2 Open Right Cover 1.
10-59
3 Open the cover (A3).
A3
4 Remove any jammed paper.
5 Return the cover to the original position.
6 Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.
10-60
NOTE
To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.
8 Push Cassette 1 back in.
9 If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.
10-61
CAUTION
3 Close the duplex unit (A5).
A5
10-62
10-63
NOTE
8 Push Cassette 2 back in.

10-64
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 and 4

(500-sheet×2)
See the explanation for Cassette 3 below.
CAUTION
10-65
NOTE
6 Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.
10-66


(1,500-sheet×2)
CAUTION
10-67
6 Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.
10-68


(1,500-sheet×2)
CAUTION
10-69
6 Pull out paper feed unit (B1).
B1
10-70
7 Open cover (B2).
B2
9 Push paper feed unit, Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 back in.
10-71
11 Ifthethe optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

original position.
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 5 (Side

Feeder)
CAUTION
1 Detach the side feeder.
10-72
5 Return the Cassette 5 and side feeder to the original position.
10-73
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray
CAUTION
2 Remove all the paper.
3 Reload the paper.
10-74
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1
CAUTION
The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting
burned.
3 Close the duplex unit (A5).
A5
10-75
5 Open the paper feed unit cover (A1).
A1
HOT SURFACE
(A1) should not be touched until one minutes passes after open the right cover.
7 Open the fuser cover (A2).
A2
10-76
9 Open the cover (A3).
A3
11 Lift the cover (A4).
A4
10-77
13 Lift the duplex unit (A5).
A5
15 Remove the paper from the paper ejector.
10-78
17 Ifthethe optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

original position.
10-79

(500-sheet×2)
CAUTION
10-80


(1,500-sheet×2)
CAUTION
10-81

10-82
Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit
CAUTION
1 Open the bridge unit cover.
3 Close the cover.
10-83
Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox
CAUTION
1 Open the mailbox cover.
3 Close the cover.
10-84
Remove any jammed paper in the Inner Finisher
CAUTION
10-85
Remove any jammed paper in the Document

Processor (Reverse Automatic)
CAUTION
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
1 Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2 Open the document processor cover.
10-86
3 Turn dial (C1) to remove any jammed paper.
C1
4 Open reverse unit (C2) and remove any jammed paper.
C2
5 Turn dial (C1) to remove any jammed paper.
C1
10-87
Remove any jammed paper in the Document

Processor (Dual Scan)
CAUTION
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
1 Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2 Open the document processor cover.
3 Turn dial (C) to remove any jammed paper.
4 Turn dial (C) to remove any jammed paper.
10-88
10-89
Remove any jammed paper in the Inserter
CAUTION
Straight pass
2 Open the transport guide (E1).
10-90
4 Return the transport guide (E1) to the original position.
Vertical transport section
1 Open the front cover and right cover.
10-91
2 Open the transport guides (E1) and (E2).
4 Return the transport guides (E1) and (E2) to the original

position.
10-92
Tray 1 lift error
1 Load paper in tray 1.
2 Open the right cover.
10-93
3 Close the right cover.
Tray 2 lift error
1 Load paper in tray 2.
2 Open the right cover.
3 Close the right cover.
10-94
Remove any jammed paper in the Z-fold unit
CAUTION
Folding machine tray output
2 Open the transport guide (N12).
10-95
4 Return the transport guide (N12) to the original position.
10-96
Relay transport guide plate
10-97
Paper transport roller knob
10-98
3 Turn knob (N10).
4 Take out the jammed paper.
10-99
Additional folding guide plate
10-100
10-101
Post-folding transport guide plate
10-102
10-103
Folding roller knob
2 Open the transport guides (N8).
3 Turn knob (N7).
10-104
4 Take out the jammed paper.
10-105
Registration roller knob
3 Turn knob (N6).
10-106
10-107
Paper stack roller knob
3 Turn knob (N5).
10-108
10-109
Resist transfer guide plate
10-110
Pre-registration transport guide plate
10-111
3 Turn knob (N2).
10-112
Z-fold unit Clear paper jam
10-113
3 Turn knob (N2).
10-114
Entrance guide plate
10-115
10-116
Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-Sheet

Finisher
CAUTION
2 Open the finisher top cover.
10-117
3 Open the conveyor guide (D2).
D2
5 Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.
10-118
D1
10 Return the covers to the original position.
10-119
Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet

Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher (Inner)
CAUTION
D1
10-120

Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray A)
CAUTION
10-121
D6
10-122
D4
7 Turn knob (D5).
D5
10-123
D1
10-124

Finisher/100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray B)
CAUTION
D2
10-125
4 Turn knob (D3).
D3
D1
10-126
10-127
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit

(4,000-sheet Finisher)
CAUTION
D7
10-128
D8
10-129
8 Remove paper from inside the finisher.
10 Lift the folding tray.
10-130
12 Press the release lever to pull the folding unit out.
13 Open the folding unit left cover.
14 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-131
16 Return the folding unit left cover to the original position.
17 Open the folding unit top cover.
18 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-132
20 Return the folding unit top cover to the original position.
21 Return the folding unit to the original position.
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray

(4,000-sheet Finisher)
CAUTION
10-133
5 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-134
9 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-135
10-136
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit

(100-sheet Staple Finisher)
CAUTION
10-137
D7
D8
10-138
10-139
10 Lift the release lever to pull the folding unit out.
12 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-140
14 Open the folding unit conveyor guide.
15 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-141
10-142
Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray

(100-sheet Staple Finisher)
CAUTION
3 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-143
6 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-144
10-145
10-146
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
Clearing a Staple Jam

Clearing a staple jam of the Inner Finisher
3 Open the staple cover.
10-147
5 Remove the jammed staple.
7 Return the staple cover to the original position.
10-148
Clearing a staple jam of the 1,000-Sheet Finisher
1 Open the finisher top cover.
D2
10-149
D1
10-150
10-151
Clearing a staple jam of the 4,000-sheet Finisher
D4
3 Turn knob (D5).
D5
10-152
10-153
Clearing a Staple Jam of the 100-sheet Staple

Finisher
D4
10-154
3 Turn knob (D5).
D5
10-155
10-156
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit (4,000-sheet

Finisher)
C
B
10-157
10-158
11 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-159
15 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-160
10-161
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit (100-sheet

Staple Finisher)
10-162
10-163
9 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-164
12 Turn dial (D9).
D9
10-165
10-166
11 Appendix
Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2
Applications ............................................................................................................................................ 11-8
Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................. 11-10
Entry Screens ....................................................................................................................................... 11-10
Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-12
Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-13
Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-13
Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................................................... 11-14
Special Paper ....................................................................................................................................... 11-17
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-21
Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-21
Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 11-23
Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-24
Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-25
Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-26
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................................................ 11-26
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................................................... 11-27
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) .................................................................................................................... 11-27
Inner Finisher ........................................................................................................................................ 11-28
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) ............................................................................................................ 11-28
1,000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................. 11-29
4,000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................. 11-30
100-sheet Staple Finisher ..................................................................................................................... 11-31
Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet/100-sheet Staple Finisher) ................................................. 11-31
Mailbox (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ....................................................................................................... 11-32
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) ................................................................................................ 11-32
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) ........................................................................................ 11-33
Job Separator Tray ............................................................................................................................... 11-34
Inner Shift Tray ..................................................................................................................................... 11-34
Banner Tray .......................................................................................................................................... 11-35
Inserter Tray .......................................................................................................................................... 11-35
Z Fold Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 11-36
Backing up your data ...................................................................................................................................... 11-37
Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer .............................................................................. 11-37
Backing up your data using Command Center RX ............................................................................... 11-37
Backing up your date using USB Drive ................................................................................................. 11-37
Functions List of Security Quick Setup ........................................................................................................... 11-38
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-42
11-1
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
(1) PLATEN COVER

(1) DP-7170 (1) DP-7160 (1) DP-7150 TYPE E
(2) MT-730(B)
(18) PH-7A, (17) PH-7100,

PH-7C, PH-7D PH-7120, PH-7130 (16) DF-7100
(15) JS-7100
(3) DF-7140 (4) DF-7150
(14) JS-7110
(13) Banner Guide 10
(5) DF-7120
(12) PF-7120*
(6) BF-730
(7) BF-9100 (8) ZF-7100* (9) IS-7100

(10) PF-7140* (11) PF-7150*
* If the following option is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed: PF-7140, PF-7150, PF-7120
11-2
(21) Keyboard Holder 10
(19) NK-7120 (20) DT-730(B) (22) FAX System 12 (27) Card

Authentication Kit(B)
(23) IB-50
(25) IB-37/IB-38
(24) IB-51
Software option
(28) Internet FAX Kit(A) (26) HD-15/HD-16

(29) UG-33
(30) UG-34
(31) Scan Extension Kit(A)
(32) Data Security Kit 10
(33) USB Keyboard
11-3
(1) DP-7170 "Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed, Multifeed and Staple Detection)"
DP-7160 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7150 "Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)"
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover"
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
For document processor operation, refer to the following:
Loading Originals in the Document Processor (page 5-3)
When the document processor is not used, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.
(2) MT-730 (B) "Mailbox"

Makes it easy to sort output into separate trays. Installing this option adds 7 output trays. When multiple computer users
share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the 4,000-sheet Finisher.
NOTE
To deliver output to the mail box, change the Paper Output selection on the operation panel or in the printer driver, or
change in the default settings.
(3) DF-7140 "4,000-sheet Finisher"

This is a large-capacity 4,000-sheet Finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple
copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
(4) DF-7150 "100-sheet Staple Finisher"

This is a large-capacity 4,000-sheet Finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple
copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
(5) DF-7120 "1,000-sheet Finisher"

This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a
printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
(6) BF-730 "Folding Unit"

Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 4,000-sheet
Finisher.
(7) BF-9100 "Folding Unit"

Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 100-sheet Staple
Finisher.
(8) ZF-7100 "Z-Fold Unit" (Option for TASKalfa 6004i/TASKalfa 7004i)

This device can fold the output paper into a Z shape. The device can be installed when a 4,000-sheet Finisher or a 100-
sheet Staple Finisher is installed. It cannot be used when an Inserter is installed.
(9) IS-7100 "Inserter" (Option for TASKalfa 6004i/TASKalfa 7004i)

This device can automatically insert index tab paper or previously printed-on paper. It can be installed when a 4,000-
sheet Finisher or 100-sheet Staple Finisher is installed. It cannot be used when a Z-Fold Unit or a Mailbox is installed.
11-4
(10) PF-7140 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2)"

Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassette can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as the standard cassettes.
(11) PF-7150 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet×2) capable of
holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder (page 3-14)
(12) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional side feeder (3,000-sheet) capable of holding up to
3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
Loading in the Side Feeder (page 3-16)
(13) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"

This tray enables continuous feeding of banner paper. Up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be loaded. To attach the tray
and load paper, refer to the following:
Using the Banner Tray (Option) (page 4-12)
(14) JS-7110 "Inner Shift Tray"

This device can shift and sort each set of output.
(15) JS-7100 "Job Separator"

Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as
the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the
received fax data.
NOTE
To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job Separator, select the output destination or change the default setting.
(16) DF-7100 "Inner Finisher" (Option for TASKalfa 5004i/TASKalfa 6004i)

This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a
printout into individual copies. It can also staple the offset printouts.
(17) PH-7100, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the Inner Finisher and is used to punch holes.
(18) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the Document Finisher and is used to punch holes.
(19) NK-7120 "Optional Numeric Keypad"

The numeric keypad is added to the operation panel. If the optional numeric keypad is installed, numeric keys do not
appear on the touch panel.
11-5
(20) DT-730 (B) "Document Table"

Place original or other documents when using the machine.
(21) Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder"

A USB keyboard connected to the machine can be placed here.
(22) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a
computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable
quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving, the busy line time
can be reduced.
FAX Operation Guide
(23) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. This kit supports
traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.
It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.
IB-50 User's Manual
(24) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and
11 g/b. This supports traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.
It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.
The IB-51 Steup utility supports Windows OS and Mac OS X.
IB-51 User's Manual
(25) IB-37/IB-38 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (max. 150 Mbps) and
IEEE802.11 g/b/ac. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct
is supported.
(26) HD-15/HD-16 "Hard Disk"

With Hard Disk installed in the machine, received data can be rasterized and stored on this Hard Disk. This enables
high-speed printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, you can use the Document Box functions.HD-
15 is standard in South America and North America.
Printing Documents in Custom Box (page 5-61)
(27) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the
following:
Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide
(28) Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit"

Activating the Internet FAX Kit sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can only be added
when the FAX Kit is installed.
11-6
(29) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(30) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"

Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables IBM
Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.
(31) Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit"

This option enables the use of the OCR Text Recognition function in the applications of the machine.
(32) Data Security Kit 10 "Data Security Kit"

If you use IPsec protocol (required by the U.S. Department of Defense), you will be able to perform encryption using the
FIPS140-2 compliant encryption module.
(33) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also
available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on
keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.
11-7
Applications
Overview of the Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
Item Application Name
Data Encryption/Overwrite Data Encryption/Overwrite
INTERNET FAXKIT(A) Internet FAX Kit
UG-33 ThinPrint Option*1
UG-34 Emulation Upgrade Kit
Scan extension kit(A) OCR Scan Activation Kit*1
CARD AUTHENTICATIONKIT(B) Card Authentication Kit
Data Security Kit 10 Data Security Kit
*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
CAUTION
When starting [Data Encryption/Overwrite] and after that replacing the main board by service personnel, the
box files and fax received data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and machine's memory are deleted and can not
be restored.
NOTE
• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Starting Application Use

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application] > "Optional Function"
[Optional Function List]
NOTE
2 Select the desired application > [Activate]

icon).
11-8
3 Enter the license key > [Official]

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen
does not appear, go to Step 5.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
NOTE
• If you started the Data Encryption/Overwrite or Thin Print option and entered the license
key, turn the power OFF/ON.
• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
Checking Details of Application

[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Add/Delete Application] > "Optional Function"
[Optional Function List]
NOTE
2 Select [ ] (information icon) for the application whose

detailed information you want to check.
You can view detailed information on the selected application.
The table below lists the item you can view.
Item
Function Name
License
Remaining Counts
Expiration Date
Status
Extend the trial period.

Select [Extend].
11-9
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Character Entry Method

To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.
NOTE
Keyboard Layout
"QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Select the
[System Menu/Counter] key, [Device Settings], [Keyboard] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose the desired
layout. "QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
1 11
6\VWHP0HQX &DQFHO 6DYH
1HZ8VHU
4XLFN6HWXS
:L]DUG 8VHU1DPH
2
'HYLFH Enter a name
6HWWLQJV
1RWLILFDWLRQ /RJLQ8VHU1DPH
5HSRUW
)XQFWLRQ Enter a user name
6HWWLQJV
10
HQWHU
9
3
4 6SDFH
5 6 7 8
No. Display/Key Description
1 Keyboard Select the character to enter.
2 Input box Enter characters in the selected box.
3 Tab key Select to move to the next input box.
4 Shift key Select to switch between upper case and lower case.
5 [?123] / [Character] Select the characters that are entered.
6 Space key Select to insert a space.
7 Cursor key Select to move the cursor on the display.
8 Close key Select to close the entry screen.
9 Enter key Select to finalize entry and return to the screen before the
entry.
10 Backspace key Select to delete a character to the left of the cursor.
8 Input / Limit display Displays maximum number of characters and the number of
characters entered.
11-10
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen

Select the Shift key.

1HZ8VHU
4XLFN6HWXS
:L]DUG 8VHU1DPH
'HYLFH Enter a name
6HWWLQJV
5HSRUW
6HWWLQJV
HQWHU
6SDFH
Number/Symbol Entry Screen

Select [?123].
6\VWHP0HQX &DQFHO 6DYH 6\VWHP0HQX &DQFHO 6DYH

1HZ8VHU 1HZ8VHU
:L]DUG 8VHU1DPH :L]DUG 8VHU1DPH
'HYLFH Enter a name 'HYLFH Enter a name
6HWWLQJV 6HWWLQJV
1RWLILFDWLRQ /RJLQ8VHU1DPH 1RWLILFDWLRQ /RJLQ8VHU1DPH
5HSRUW 5HSRUW
)XQFWLRQ Enter a user name )XQFWLRQ Enter a user name
6HWWLQJV 6HWWLQJV
HQWHU HQWHU
6SDFH 6SDFH
11-11
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below to enter 'List #1' for an example.
1 Enter 'List', (space).

1HZ8VHU 6\VWHP0HQX &DQFHO 1HZ8VHU 6DYH
4XLFN6HWXS
8VHU1DPH 4XLFN6HWXS
:L]DUG 8VHU1DPH
:L]DUG
'HYLFH
'HYLFH
6HWWLQJV
6HWWLQJV
5HSRUW 1RWLILFDWLRQ /RJLQ8VHU1DPH
5HSRUW
6HWWLQJV
6HWWLQJV
6 4
1, 3 2 HQWHU
5 HQWHU
7
6SDFH
6SDFH
To switch between upper case and lower case, select the Shift key.
2 Enter '#' and '1'.
6\VWHP0HQX &DQFHO 6DYH 6\VWHP0HQX &DQFHO 6DYH

1HZ8VHU 1HZ8VHU
:L]DUG 8VHU1DPH :L]DUG 8VHU1DPH
'HYLFH 'HYLFH
6HWWLQJV 6HWWLQJV
1RWLILFDWLRQ /RJLQ8VHU1DPH 1RWLILFDWLRQ
5HSRUW 5HSRUW /RJLQ8VHU1DPH
)XQFWLRQ
6HWWLQJV
Enter a user name
3
)XQFWLRQ
6HWWLQJV
Enter a user name
2
HQWHU HQWHU
1
6SDFH 6SDFH
To enter numbers or symbols, select [#123].
3 Check that the entry is correct.

1HZ8VHU
4XLFN6HWXS
6\VWHP0HQX &DQFHO 1HZ8VHU 6DYH
:L]DUG 8VHU1DPH
4XLFN6HWXS
'HYLFH
:L]DUG 8VHU1DPH
6HWWLQJV
'HYLFH
1RWLILFDWLRQ
6HWWLQJV
5HSRUW /RJLQ8VHU1DPH
1RWLILFDWLRQ
5HSRUW
)XQFWLRQ /RJLQ8VHU1DPH
Enter a user name
6HWWLQJV
6HWWLQJV
HQWHU
HQWHU
6SDFH
6SDFH
Check that the entry is correct. Select [enter].
11-12
Appendix > Paper
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the
following:
Specifications (page 11-21)
Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as
laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.
Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections
for further details.
Criteria Specifications
Weight Cassettes: 52 to 300 g/m2
Multipurpose tray: 52 to 300 g/m2, 136 to 163g/m2 (Banner sheet)
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Moisture content 4 to 6%
Pulp content 80% or more
NOTE
Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications
shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of
recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and
contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
11-13
Appendix > Paper
Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper
fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may
also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,
avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those
types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content
consists of cotton or other fibers.
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several
sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in
area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard
size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause
paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several
sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to
adhere correctly.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is
supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to
become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,
making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for
a while.
• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.
Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.
• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
11-14
Appendix > Paper
Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls
upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be
discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,
sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you
cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have
been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the
basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.
• Glossy paper
• Watermarked paper
• Paper with an uneven surface
• Perforated paper
11-15
Appendix > Paper
Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must
be 90° ± 0.2°.
• A3 (297 × 420 mm) *1 • ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)
• A4 (297 × 210 mm) • Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2")
• A5 (210 × 148 mm) • Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8")
• A6 (148 × 105 mm) • Envelope #6 3/4 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2")
• B4 (257 × 364 mm) *1 • Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2")
• B5 (257 × 182 mm) • Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)
• B6 (182 × 128 mm) • Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)
• 216×340 mm • Envelope C4 (229 × 324 mm) *1
*1
• SRA3 (320 × 450 mm) • Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm)
*1
• Ledger • Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm)
• Letter • Kakugata 2 (240 × 332 mm)*1
• Legal • Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)
• Statement • Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)
• Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2") • Younaga 3 (235 × 120 mm)
*1
• 12×18" (304.8 × 457 mm) • Nagagata 3 (120 × 235 mm)
• Oficio II • Nagagata 4 (90 × 205 mm)
• Folio (210 × 330 mm) • Custom
• 8K (273 × 394 mm) *1 Cassette 1: 98 × 148 to 297 × 356 mm
Cassette 2 to 4: 98 × 148 to 320 × 457 mm*2
• 16K (273 × 197 mm)
Multipurpose Tray: 98 × 148 to 320 × 457 mm
*1 This paper cannot be used in cassette 1.
*2 The Paper Feeder (500-sheets×2) can only be used for cassettes 3 and 4.
11-16
Appendix > Paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
The following paper and media can be used.
• Transparencies
• Preprinted paper
• Bond paper
• Recycled paper
• Thin paper
• Letterhead
• Colored paper
• Prepunched paper
• Envelopes
• Hagaki (Cardstock)
• Thick paper
• Labels
• Coated
• High-quality paper
• Index tab dividers (136 to 256 g/m2)
When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as
laser printers). Use the multipurpose tray for transparencies, cardstocks, labels, coated paper and index tab dividers.
Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary
considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than
regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the
print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not
responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multipurpose tray for special paper.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material Polyester
Dimensional ±0.7 mm
accuracy
Squareness of 90° ±0.2°

corners
To avoid problems, use the multipurpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the
machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
11-17
Appendix > Paper
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the multipurpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine
and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled
labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Top sheet
Adhesive
Carrier sheet
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected
by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of
labels may cause more problems.
The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,
resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the
carrier sheet before completing output.
Allowed Not allowed
Top sheet
Carrier
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight 104 to 151 g/m²

(overall paper weight)
Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)
11-18
Appendix > Paper
Hagaki (Cardstock)
Burrs
Burrs
Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock) into the multipurpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)
paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.
Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough
edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)
on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the
print-side up.
NOTE
Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide of the cassette and the optional paper
feeder.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin
envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing
envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are
ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is
exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes
off in the machine.
• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a
string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a
paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a
flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE
If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few
millimeters.
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-13)
In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
11-19
Appendix > Paper
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.
The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use
paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.
NOTE
Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
Coated Paper
Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than
plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.
The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making
the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated
side appears slightly glossy.
IMPORTANT
When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture
may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid
environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.
11-20
Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
IMPORTANT
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE
For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
Machine
Item Description
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette 52 to 300 g/m2
Multipurpose 52 to 300 g/m2

Tray
Paper Type Cassette Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
(Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multipurpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,
Tray Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High
Quality, Coated, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,
Folio, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki
(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom (98 × 148 mm to
297 × 356 mm)
Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom (98 × 148 mm to
320 × 457 mm)
Multipurpose A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Tray Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Custom
(98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Banner sheet (210 × 488.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm/8.26" × 19.22" to
12" × 48.03")
Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm or less
11-21
Item Description
Warm-up Time Power on 17 seconds or less

(23°C/73.4°F,
60%) Low Power 14.4 seconds or less
Sleep 14.4 seconds or less
Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
Multipurpose 150 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2),

Tray 50 sheets (larger than A4/Letter) (80 g/m2)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 488.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm/8.26" × 19.22" to
12" × 48.03")) (136 to 163 g/m2)
Output Tray Inner tray 500 sheets (80 g/m2)

Capacity
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography

Memory 4.0 GB
Large Capacity Storage SSD 64 GB (SSD 32 GB/Hard Disk 320 GB*2)
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Super-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4,
IPSec), 802.3a supported)
USB Port: 4 (Hi-Speed USB)
Option eKUIO: 2*3

Fax: 2*4
Wireless LAN: 1
Operating Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Environment
Humidity 10 to 80%
Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H) 23.71 " × 26.19" × 31.11"

(without Document Processor) 602 × 665 × 790 mm
Weight Approx. 183.0 lb/Approx. 83 kg (without toner container)
Space Required (W × D) 36.23" × 26.19"

(Using multipurpose tray) 920 × 665 mm
Power Source TASKalfa 5004i/TASKalfa 6004i/TASKalfa 7004i:

120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 12 A
230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 7.2 A
The power consumption of the The information is available at the website below.
product in networked standby (If (https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/en/about-us/our-brand/
all network ports are connected.) environmental-policy.html)
Options Optional Equipment (page 11-2)
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

*2 This is standard in South and North America.
*3 When two optional interface are installed, a fax line can not be installed.
*4 When IB-50 or IB-51 is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
11-22
Copy Functions
Item Description
Copy Speed TASKalfa 5004i A4/Letter 50 sheets/min

A4-R/Letter-R 35 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 25 sheets/min
B4 30 sheets/min
Legal 30 sheets/min
B5 50 sheets/min
B5-R 35 sheets/min
A5-R 40 sheets/min
A6-R 25 sheets/min
TASKalfa 6004i A4/Letter 60 sheets/min

B4 36 sheets/min
Legal 36 sheets/min
B5 60 sheets/min
B5-R 42 sheets/min
A5-R 48 sheets/min
A6-R 30 sheets/min
TASKalfa 7004i A4/Letter 79 sheets/min

B4 42 sheets/min
Legal 42 sheets/min
B5 70 sheets/min
B5-R 49 sheets/min
A5-R 48 sheets/min
A6-R 30 sheets/min
First Copy Time (A4, place on the TASKalfa 5004i 3.7 seconds or less
platen, feed from Cassette) TASKalfa 6004i 3.4 seconds or less
TASKalfa 7004i 3.3 seconds or less
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Continuous Copying 1 to 9,999 sheets
Resolution 1200 × 1200 dpi (multi-bit)
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
Original Feed System Fixed
11-23
Printer Functions
Item Description
Printing TASKalfa 5004i 12×18"/SRA3 25 sheets/min

Speed
TASKalfa 6004i 12×18"/SRA3 30 sheets/min
TASKalfa 7004i 12×18"/SRA3 35 sheets/min
Other than the above size, specifications are the same as those of Copy
Speed.
First Print Time (A4, feed from TASKalfa 5004i 4.3 seconds or less
Cassette) TASKalfa 6004i 3.8 seconds or less
TASKalfa 7004i 3.8 seconds or less
Resolution 4800 dpi equivalent × 1200 dpi
Operating System Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016,
Windows Server 2019, Mac OS 10.9 or later
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Super-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4,
IPSec), 802.3a supported)
Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)
Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-37/38 mounting)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL-5e), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS,

OpenXPS
11-24
Scanner Functions
Item Description
Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200×400 dpi, 200 dpi, 200×100 dpi
File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), High
compressive PDF, OCR Text Recognition (Option), MS Office file (Option),
OOXML (Option), OOXML (OCR) (Option)
Scanning Speed*1 (A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
TASKalfa 5004i 1-sided B/W 137 Images/min Color 137 Images/min

2-sided B/W 274 Images/min Color 274 Images/min


Interface Ethernet (1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T)
Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*2, WIA*2, DFS, DSM
*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Multifeed Detection) (except TWAIN and WIA
scanning)
*2 Available Operating System: Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows
Server 2016/Windows Server 2019
11-25
Document Processor
Description
Item
Document Processor Document Processor
(Automatic 2-Sided) (Dual scan DP)
Type DP-7150 DP-7160

DP-7170
(Skewed, Multifeed and Staple
Detection)
Original Feed Method Automatic feed
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: A3/Ledger

11.69" × 17"/297 × 432 mm (Long-sized 11.69" × 74.8"/297 × 1,900 mm)
Minimum: A6-R/Statement-R Minimum: A6-R/Statement-R

4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm 4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm
Paper Weight 1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m2 1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m2

2
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m 2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m2
Loading Capacity 140 sheets 270 sheets

(50 to 80 g/m2)*1 maximum (50 to 80 g/m2)*1 maximum
Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.35" × 20.95" × 5.75" 23.63" × 21.23" × 7.29"

593 × 532 × 146 mm 600 × 539 × 185 mm
Weight Approx. 18.52 lbs./Approx. 8.4 kg Approx. 29.33 lbs./Approx. 13.3 kg
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2)

Item Description
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes
Paper Size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Custom (98 × 148 mm to
320 × 457 mm)
Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper
Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.63" × 26.19" × 12.73"

600 × 665 × 323.2 mm
Weight Approx. 50.8 lbs. / Approx. 23 kg
11-26
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)

Item Description
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

No. Sheets: 1,500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes
Paper Size A4,B5, Letter

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.63" × 26.19" × 12.73"

600 × 665 × 323.2 mm
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)

Item Description
Paper Supply Method Feed & reverse roller method

No. Sheets: 3,000, 80 g/m2
Paper Size A4,B5, Letter

Dimensions (W × D × H) 13.82" × 23.04" × 18.47"

351 × 585 × 469 mm
Weight Approx. 58.5 lbs. / Approx. 26.5 kg
11-27
Inner Finisher
Item Description
Number of Trays 1 tray
Paper Size (80 g/m2) A3, B4, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,
Finisher tray (no stapling) Envelope C4: 250 sheets
A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5-R, B5, B6, Letter-R, Letter, Statement, Executive,
16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku
hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 500 sheets
Stapling Number of A3, B4, 216×340 mm, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
Sheets Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
8K
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

Letter, 16K 40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Media types Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom
Dimensions (W × D × H) 26.47" × 20.99" × 10.9"

(When pulling the tray) 672.3 × 533.1 × 276.8 mm
Weight 25.4 lbs. or less / 11.5 kg or less
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher)

Item Description
Paper Inch 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Size Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
3 Hole A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K
cm 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Paper Weight 52 - 300 g/m2
Media types Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High
Quality, Custom 1 to 8
11-28
Item Description
Paper Size Finisher tray A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,
(80 g/m2) (Non-stapling) Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500 sheets
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Supported Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less
Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
Sheets 216×340 mm, Ledger, 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Legal, 12×18", Oficio II,
16K-R, 8K
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
Letter, 16K 40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Media types Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions (W × D × H) 21.58" × 24.36" × 41.34"
548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm
Weight Approx. 66.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 30 kg or less
(When pulling the tray) 666 × 618.5 mm
11-29
Item Description
Number of Trays 2 trays
Paper Tray A (Non-Stapling) A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12×18",
Size Oficio II, Folio, 8K: 1,500 sheets
(80 g/m2) A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R, 16K: 4,000 sheets
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II,
Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope C4, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki
(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 200 sheets
Stapling Maximum Number A3, B4, 216×340 mm, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
Ledger, Legal, 12×18", 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Oficio II, 8K
A4-R, A4, B5-R, B5, 65 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R, 55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
16K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Media types Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.91" × 26.32" × 41.79"
607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm
Weight Approx. 88.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 40 kg or less
(When pulling the tray) 725 × 668.5 mm
11-30
100-sheet Staple Finisher

Item Description
Paper Tray A (Non-Stapling) A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12×18",
Size Oficio II, Folio, 8K: Height 227 mm (Equivalent to 1,500 sheets)
(80 g/m2) A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R, 16K: Height 512 mm (Equivalent to
4,000 sheets)
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: Height 91 mm (Equivalent to 500 sheets)
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II,
Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki
(Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Kakugata 2, Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4: Height 45 mm (Equivalent
to 200 sheets)
Stapling Maximum Number A3, B4, 216×340 mm, 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
Ledger, Legal, 12×18", 35 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
Oficio II, 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
A4-R, A4, B5-R, B5, 100 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R, 70 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
16K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Media types Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions (W × D × H) 29.55" × 27.03" × 43.68"
(When storing the tray) 750.5 × 686.4 × 1109.5 mm
Weight Approx. 125.7 lbs. or less / Approx. 57 kg
(When pulling the tray) 867.6 × 686.4 mm
Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet/100-sheet

Staple Finisher)
Item Description
Paper Inch 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Size Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
cm 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Paper Weight 45 - 300 g/m2
Media types Plain, Rough, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
11-31
Mailbox (For 4,000-sheet Finisher)

Item Description
Paper Size A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 50 sheets

2
(80 g/m ) A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R,
Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K: 100 sheets
Dimensions (W × D × H) 20.08" × 15.75" × 18.51"

510 × 400 × 470 mm
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher)

Item Description
Sizes Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal, Oficio II, 8K
Tri-Fold A4-R, Letter-R
Number of Sheets Bi-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
1 sheet (121 to 256 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch 20 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 or heavier)
Tri-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

Maximum Number for Storage Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets
2
(80 g/m )
Saddle Stitch 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets
Tri-Fold 1 sheet per set: 30 sets

Media types Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,
Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Tri-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
11-32
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher)

Item Description
Sizes Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R,

Oficio II, 8K, 12×18"
Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, SRA3, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal,

Oficio II, 8K, 12×18"
Tri-Fold A4-R, Letter-R
Number of Sheets Bi-Fold 5 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

1 sheet (106 to 256 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch 20 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 or heavier)
Tri-Fold 5 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

Maximum Number for Storage Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 20 sets
(80 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch 5 sheets or less per set: 20 sets
Tri-Fold 1 sheet per set: 50 sets

Media types Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Tri-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
11-33
Job Separator Tray

Item Description
Maximum Sheets 100 Sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio,
8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to
304.8 × 1,220 mm)
Paper Type Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
Dimensions (W × D × H) 18.78" × 16.52" × 2.52"
477 × 419.6 × 64 mm
Inner Shift Tray

Item Description
Maximum Sheets 250 Sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio,
8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Kakugata 2, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3,
Nagagata 4, Younaga 3, Custom (98 × 148 to 320 × 1,220 mm)
Dimensions (W × D × H) 17.33" × 15.75" × 5.24"
440 × 400 × 133 mm
11-34
Banner Tray
Item Description
Max. number of sheets 10 sheets (Multipurpose tray)
Paper length 210 to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")
Paper width Max. 1,220.0 mm (48.03")
Paper type: Heavy 2
Dimensions (W × D × H) 15.78" × 15.67" × 7.63"
400.6 × 397.8 × 193.6 mm
Inserter Tray
Item Description
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, SRA3, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter,
Legal, Statement, 12×18", Executive, Oficio II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, ISO B5,
Custom 1~4 (148 × 210 ~ 320 × 457 mm)
Paper Type Plain, Thin, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
High Quality, Custom 1-8
Dimensions (W × D × H) 27.69" × 24.22" × 52.43"
703.2 × 615 × 1331.7 mm
11-35
Z Fold Unit
Item Description
Sizes Z-Fold A3, B4, A4R, 11×17, 8.5×14, 8.5×11R, 8K
Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5R, 11×17, 8.5×14, 8.5×11,

8.5×11R, 8K, 12×18, 13×19, SRA3
Saddle Stitch A3, A4R, 11×17, 8.5×14, 8.5×11R
Tri-Fold A3, A4R, B4, 11×17, 8.5×14, 8.5×11R
Number of Sheets Z-Fold 1 sheet (106 to 256 g/m2)
Bi-Fold 1 sheet (106 to 256 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch 64~74 g/m2, A4R/8.5×11R: 3 sheets, Others: 1 sheet

75~90 g/m2, A4R/8.5×11R: 2 sheets, Others: 1 sheet
Tri-Fold 91~105 g/m2: 1 sheets
Paper Weight Z-Fold 64~105 g/m2
Bi-Fold
Saddle Stitch
Tri-Fold
Dimensions (W × D × H) 8.23" × 28.75" × 38.59"

209 × 730 × 980 mm
NOTE
Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
11-36
Appendix > Backing up your data
Backing up your data

If the SSD, HDD, or memory of this machine installed in the machine failed for any reason, the files in the Custom box,
fax received data and various settings saved there will be deleted and cannot be restored. To prevent erasing data,
make regular backups as follows.
Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer

Use KYOCERA Net Viewer to save the following data registered in this machine to your PC regularly.
• System Settings
• Network Settings
• User List
• Address Book
• Custom Box Settings (Except for the file in the Custom Box)
Migrating the Address Book (page 2-78)
Backing up your data using Command Center RX

Use Command Center RX to save the data saved in the Custom Box and Fax Box to your PC regularly. This subsection
describes the procedure for backing up the data in the Custom Box. You can back up the fax box using the same
procedure.

3 Click the number or name of Custom Box which stores the documents.
2 Download the documents.

1 Select the document data you want to download to your computer.
Only one document data can be downloaded at a time.
2 Click [Download] icon. The selected file is shown in "Selected Files".
3 Specify [Color Selection] and [File Format] as necessary.
4 Click [Download].
Backing up your date using USB Drive

You can copy the data saved in the Custom Box and FAX Box to a USB drive. You can save multiple document data at
once.
Copying Documents in Custom Box to USB Drive (page 5-65)
11-37
Appendix > Functions List of Security Quick Setup
Functions List of Security Quick Setup

The functions configured in each level of Security Quick Setup are as follows. After selecting the security level, configure
the security function according to your operating environment.
Item Security Quick Setup
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
SSL On On On
Serverside TLS Version TLS1.1, TLS1.2, TLS1.2, TLS1.3 TLS1.2, TLS1.3

Settings*1 TLS1.3
Effective Encryption 3DES, AES, AES- AES-GCM, AES, AES-GCM, AES,

GCM, CHACHA20/ CHACHA20/ CHACHA20/
POLY1305 POLY1305 POLY1305
Hash SHA1, SHA2(256/ SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

384)
IPP Security Secure Only (IPPS) Secure Only (IPPS) Secure Only (IPPS)
HTTP Security Secure Only (HTTPS) Secure Only (HTTPS) Secure Only (HTTPS)
Enhanced WSD Secure Only Secure Only Secure Only

Security (Enhanced WSD over (Enhanced WSD over (Enhanced WSD over
SSL) SSL) SSL)
eSCL Security Not Secure (eSCL Secure Only (eSCL Secure Only (eSCL
over SSL & eSCL) over SSL) over SSL)
Clientside TLS Version TLS1.1, TLS1.2, TLS1.2, TLS1.3 TLS1.2, TLS1.3

Settings*1 TLS1.3
Effective Encryption 3DES, AES, AES- AES-GCM, AES, AES-GCM, AES,

GCM, CHACHA20/ CHACHA20/ CHACHA20/
POLY1305 POLY1305 POLY1305
Hash SHA1, SHA2(256/ SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)

384)
IPv4 settings DNS over TLS Off Auto On

(Wired
Network)*1 Certificate Auto Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period
Verification
Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)
IPv4 settings DNS over TLS Off Auto On

(Wireless
Verification
Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)
IPv6 Settings DNS over TLS Off Auto On

(Wired
Verification
Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)
11-38
IPv6 Settings DNS over TLS Off Auto On

(Wireless
Verification
Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)
Send Protocols: Certificate Auto Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period
FTP Client Verification
(Transmission)*1
Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)
Other Protocols: Certificate Auto Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period
HTTP (Client)*1 Verification
Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)
SOAP*1 Verification
Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)
LDAP*1 Verification
Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)
Send Protocols: Certificate Auto Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period
SMTP (E-mail Verification
TX)*1
Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)
E-mail: POP3 Certificate Auto Validity Period Validity Period Validity Period
User Settings*1 Verification
Hash SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384) SHA2(256/384)
Print Protocols NetBEUI On Off Off
LPD On On Off
FTP Server On Off Off

(Reception)
IPP On Off Off
IPP over SSL On On On
Raw On On Off
ThinPrint On Off Off
ThinPrint over SSL On Off Off
WSD Print On Off Off
POP3 (E-mail RX) Off Off Off
11-39
Send Protocols FTP Client On Off Off

(Transmission)
SMB On On Off
WSD Scan On Off Off
DSM Scan Off Off Off
eSCL On Off Off
eSCL over SSL On On Off
Other Protocols SNMPv1/v2c On On Off
SNMPv3 Off Off Off
HTTP On Off Off
HTTPS On On On
Enhanced WSD On Off Off
Enhanced WSD (SSL) On On On
LDAP Off Off Off
LLTD*1 Off Off Off
REST On Off Off
REST over SSL On On On
VNC (RFB) Off Off Off
VNC (RFB) over SSL Off Off Off
Enhanced VNC (RFB) On Off Off

over SSL
TCP/IP: Bonjour Bonjour On On Off

Settings
Network Wi-Fi Direct Settings Off Off Off

Settings
Connectivity Bluetooth Settings Off Off Off
NFC Off Off Off
Interface Block USB Host Unblock Unblock Block
USB Device Unblock Unblock Block
Optional Interface 1 Unblock Unblock Block
Optional Interface 2 Unblock Unblock Block
Energy Saver/ Auto Panel Reset On On On

Timer
User Account Lockout Off Off On

Lockout Setting
11-40
Job Status/Job Display Jobs Detail Show All Show All Hide All (Display only
Logs Settings Status when Administrator)
Display Jobs Log Show All Show All Hide All (Display only
when Administrator)
Display Fax Log Show All Show All Hide All (Display only
when Administrator)
Edit Restriction Address Book Off Off Administrator Only
One-Touch Key Off Off Administrator Only
Prevent Mis- Destination Check Off Off On

sending Settings before Send
Entry Check for New Off Off On

Dest.
New Destination Permit Permit Prohibit

Entry
New Destination Permit Permit Prohibit

Entry (FAX)
Recall Destination Permit Permit Prohibit
Broadcast Permit Permit Prohibit
Destination History Permit Permit Prohibit
History Settings Login History Off On On
Device Log History Off On On
Secure Comm. Error Off On On

Log
Protocol API for Enhanced Off Off Off

Settings: Services
RESTful API
Settings
*1 The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
11-41
Appendix > Glossary
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or
visually impaired. The angle of the touch panel is adjustable.
Apple Talk
AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another
computer on the same AppleTalk network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form
feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is
performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP
requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0
to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.
Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and
services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically
recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives
network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that
Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run
stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets
are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly
for Bonjour.
Custom Box
The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or
multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer's operation panel.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,
data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
11-42
Appendix > Glossary
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client
computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends
the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the
network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an
IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management
workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.
dpi (dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of
PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).
Enhanced WSD
Kyocera's proprietary web services.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,
FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black
at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:
that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16
bits.
Help
If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like more information on its functions or are having problems
getting the machine to work properly, select [?] (Help) to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.
The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be
between 0 and 255.
11-43
Appendix > Glossary
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be
sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and
enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication
mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
Job Box
The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data
later using the printer's operation panel.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
Multipurpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller
networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities
to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as
a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
Outline font
With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced
in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,
since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in
steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use
of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a
specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-
2), is currently being prepared.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional
graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that
enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for
the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
11-44
Appendix > Glossary
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is
downloaded from our website. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.
RA (Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information
is the Router Advertisement (RA).
ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
RAM Disk
Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a
RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected
from the list or entered at each time.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as
well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source
settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.
A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in
the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network
address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In
this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network
address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet
address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other
over a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and
expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also
introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.
11-45
Appendix > Glossary
TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)

A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The
TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted
on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with
USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)

A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This
function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of
operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)

WPS is a network security standard created by Wi-Fi Alliance, to make it easy to connect with the wireless devices and
set up the Wi-Fi Protected Access. The WPS-supported services can connect to the wireless access points by pushing
a button or entering passphrases.
11-46
Index Calibration 8-85, 10-55
Canceled before Sending 8-26
Card Authentication Kit 11-6
Numerics Cassette
1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-149 Loading Envelopes or Cardstock 3-10
1,000-sheet Finisher 11-4 Loading Paper 3-4, 3-7
100-sheet Staple Finisher 11-4 Cassette 1 2-2
2-sided/Book Original 6-73 Cassette 1 (to 4) Settings 8-13
3,000-Sheet Finisher Cassette 2 2-2
Manual Staple 5-76 Cassette 3 2-5
4,000-sheet Finisher 11-4 Cassette 4 2-5
Cassette 5 2-5
Centering 6-44
A Character Entry Method 11-10
Accessibility 11-42 Checking the Counter 2-64
Accessibility Functions 2-29 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-15
Address Book 3-38 Cleaning 10-2
Adding 3-38 Document Processor 10-2
Contact 3-38 Glass Platen 10-2
Deleting 3-44 Slit Glass 10-3
Editing 3-43 Clear Set. after Job Started 8-33
Group 3-42 Clear Settings after Job Started 8-21
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-84 Coated Paper 11-20
Image Adjustment 8-84 Collate/Offset 6-28
Others 8-86 Default 8-35
AirPrint 4-16 Color
AppleTalk 11-42 Calibration 8-85, 10-55
Application 5-14 Color Balance 6-37
Applications 11-8 Color Balance 6-37
Auto Detect Original Size 8-11 Color Selection 6-36
Auto Drum Refresh 8-85 Default 8-36
Auto Error Clear 8-23 Colored Paper 11-19
Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-42 Combine 6-42
Auto Image Rotation 6-69 Command Center RX 2-67
Default 8-35 Connecting
Auto Panel Reset 8-7 LAN Cable 2-8
Auto Paper Selection 11-42 Power Cable 2-9
Auto Sleep 2-46, 11-42 USB cable 2-9
Auto-IP 11-42 Connection Method 2-7
Settings 8-56, 8-58 Connectivity 8-69
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-13 Continuous Scan 6-68
Default 8-34, 8-36
B Contrast 6-38, 8-84
Background Density Adjustment 6-37, 8-84 Control Section of the Finisher 2-5
Default 8-34, 8-36 Conventions Used in This Guide xxiv
Backing up your data 11-37 Copy 5-19
Banner Tray 11-5 Copy Settings
Using 4-12 Auto Image Rotation Action 8-35
Bates Stamp 6-65 Original Size of Undetected Original 8-36
Bluetooth Settings 8-69 Paper Size for Small Original 8-35
Bonjour 11-42 Copy Speed 11-23
Settings 8-64 Counting the Number of Pages Printed
Booklet 6-47 Count by Paper Size 9-44
Border Erase 6-45 Counter 2-64
Border Erase (Copy) 8-35 Each Job Account 9-46
Border Erase/Full Scan (Fax) 8-36 Print Accounting Report 9-47
Border Erase/Full Scan (Send/Store) 8-36 Total Accounting 9-46
Cover 6-55
C Custom Box 11-42
Cables 2-7 Deleting Documents 5-67
Index-1
Editing and Deleting Custom Box 5-59 Skip Blank Page (Copy) 8-34
Printing Documents 5-61 Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) 8-36
Send 5-63 System Stamp 8-33
Storing Documents 5-60, 5-62 Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-34
Custom Original Size 8-12 XPS Fit to Page 8-35
Custom Paper Settings 8-16 Zoom 8-33
Default Gateway 11-42
D Settings 8-56, 8-58
Data Overwrite Method 8-75 Default Screen 8-10
Data Sanitization 8-74 Delete after Printed 6-85
Data Security 8-73 Delete after Transmitted 6-86
Date Format 8-7 Density 6-34, 8-84
Date/Time 8-6 Destination
Date Format 8-7 Adding a Destination 3-38
Date/Time 8-6 Address Book 5-47
Time Zone 8-7 Address Book Type 8-42
Default Check before Send 8-38
Auto % Priority 8-35 Checking and Editing 5-51
Auto Image Rotation (Copy) 8-35 Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-51
Background Density Adj. (Copy) 8-34 Entry Check for New Dest. 8-38
Background Density Adj. (Send/Store) 8-36 Multi Sending 5-42
Border Erase Default 8-33 Narrow Down 8-42
Border Erase to Back Page 8-33 One Touch Key 3-45
Clear Settings after Job Started 8-33 Search 5-48
Collate/Offset 8-35 Sort 8-42
Color Selection (Send/Store) 8-36 Developer Refresh 8-85, 10-55
Color TIFF Compression 8-37 Device Information 7-13
Color Type 8-36 Device Security Settings 8-72
Continuous Scan (Copy) 8-34 Administrator Authentication on Firm Update 8-72
Continuous Scan (Fax) 8-36 Job Status/Job Logs Settings 8-72
Continuous Scan (Send/Store) 8-36 Remote Printing 8-72
DP Read Action 8-33 Software Verification 8-72
EcoPrint 8-34 Unusable Time 8-72
Email Subject/Body 8-37 Device Settings 8-6
Erase Shadowed Areas (Copy) 8-36 Error Handling 8-22
Erase Shadowed Areas (Send) 8-38 Function Key Assignment 8-21
Erase Shadowed Areas (Store) 8-38 Keyboard 8-6
Fax TX Resolution 8-36 Language/System of Units 8-6
File Format 8-37 Numeric Keypad 8-6
File Name Entry 8-33 Operation Assist 8-21
File Separation 8-37 Original/Scan Settings 8-11
High Comp. PDF Image 8-37 Paper Feeding 8-13
iFax Subject/Body 8-38 Paper Output 8-20
Image Quality (File Format) 8-37 Sound 8-11
JPEG/TIFF Print 8-35 Toner Settings 8-24
Margin 8-35 Device Status Notification 8-27
OCR Output Format 8-37 Low Toner Alert Level 8-27
OCR Text Recognition 8-37 DHCP 11-43
OCR Text Recognition Action 8-37 Settings 8-56, 8-58
Org. Image (Send/Store) 8-36 DHCP (IPv6) 11-43
Original Image (Copy) 8-34 Settings 8-57, 8-59
Original Orientation (Copy) 8-34 Different Width Originals 8-12
Original Orientation(Send/Store) 8-36 Digital Signature Email 6-84
PDF/A 8-37 Direct Printing from Web 8-49
Prevent Bleed-through (Copy) 8-34 Display Brightness 8-10
Prevent Bleed-through (Send/Store) 8-36 Display Settings 8-10
Primary OCR Language 8-37 Default Screen 8-10
Repeat Copy 8-35 Display Brightness 8-10
Reserve Next Priority 8-35 Quick Setup Registration (Box Print) 8-10
Scan Resolution 8-36 Quick Setup Registration (Copy) 8-10
Index-2
Quick Setup Registration (Send) 8-10 Email/Folder 8-26
Quick Setup Registration (Sending from Box) 8-10 Emulation 11-43
Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box) 8-10 Selection 8-47
Show Power Off Message 8-10 Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-7
Wallpaper 8-10 Encrypted PDF Password 6-87
Disposing of the Punch Waste 10-19 Energy Saver Recovery Level 2-47, 8-9
1,000-sheet Finisher 10-21 Energy Saver/Timer 8-7
100-sheet Staple Finisher 10-22 Auto Panel Reset 8-7
4,000-sheet Finisher 10-22 EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-9
Inner Finisher 10-19 Interrupt Clear Timer 8-9
Disposing of the Staple Waste 10-17 Low Power Timer 8-7
DNS over TLS 8-56, 8-57, 8-58, 8-59 Panel Reset Timer 8-7
DNS Server Address Ping Timeout 8-9
Settings 8-56, 8-57, 8-58, 8-59 Power Off Rule 8-9
Document Box Power Off Timer 8-8
Basic Operation 5-54 Sleep Level 8-8
Custom Box 5-53 Sleep Rules 8-7
Job Box 4-18, 5-53 Sleep Timer 8-7
Removable Memory Box 5-53 Weekly Timer Settings 8-8
Document Processor 2-2 Energy Saving Control Function 1-13
Loading Originals 5-3 Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-13
Originals Not Supported by the Document Enhanced VNC over SSL
Processor 5-3 Protocol Settings 8-63
Originals Supported by the Document Enhanced WSD 11-43
Processor 5-3 Protocol Settings 8-62
Part Names 2-2 Enhanced WSD over SSL
Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and Protocol Settings 8-62
Multifeed Detection) 11-4 Enlarged Display 2-29
Document Processor (Dual Scan) 11-4 Entering Numbers 2-26
Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 11-4 Entry
Document Table 11-6 File Name 6-70
Domain Name Subject 6-83
Settings 8-58, 8-59 Envelope Feed Guide 3-10
DP Read Action 8-33 Envelope Stack Guide 3-19
dpi 11-43 Envelopes 11-19
Drum Heater 8-86 Environment 1-3
Drum Refresh 8-86, 10-54 Erase Colors 6-39
DSM Scan Erase Shadowed Areas 6-47
Protocol Settings 8-41, 8-60 Error Handling 8-22
Duplex 6-52 Auto Error Clear 8-23
Dynamic DNS 8-68 Continue or Cancel Error Job 8-23
Duplexing Error 8-22
E Error Job Skip 8-23
EcoPrint 6-36, 11-43 Finished Pages Exceeded 8-22
Default 8-34 Finishing Error 8-22
Printer 8-47 Inserted Paper Mismatch 8-22
Edit Destination No Staple Error 8-22
Address Book 3-38 Paper Jam before Staple 8-23
Contact 3-38 Paper Mismatch Error 8-22
Group 3-42 Punch Waste Full Error 8-22
One Touch Key 3-45 eSCL
E-mail Protocol Settings 8-62
POP3 8-40 eSCL over SSL
SMTP (E-mail TX) 8-40 Protocol Settings 8-63
Email 8-26
Email Encrypted TX 6-84 F
E-mail Settings 2-71 Favorites 5-11
E-mail Subject/Body 6-83 Deleting 5-13
Email Subject/Body Editing 5-13
Default 8-37 Recalling 5-12
Index-3
Registering 5-12 Grayscale 11-43
Fax 8-26 Group Authorization Settings 9-18
Fax Communication Report 8-28 Group Authorization 9-18
FAX Kit 11-6 Group List 9-18
FAX RX Result Report 8-26 Guest Authorization Settings 9-20
Fax Server 8-69 Guest Authorization 9-20
FAX Server Send 5-44 Guest Property 9-21
File Guides Provided with the Machine xxi
Format 6-75
PDF 6-77 H
Separation 6-82 Hagaki (Cardstock) 11-19
File Format 6-75 Handles 2-2
Default 8-37 Hard Disk 11-6
File Management Utility Connection 5-39 Hard Disk/SSD Initialization 8-73
File Name Entry 6-70 Help 11-43
Default 8-33 Help Screen 2-28
File Separation 6-82 History Settings 8-28
Default 8-37 Device Log History Settings 8-30
File Size Confirmation 6-85 Login History Settings 8-29
Finisher Tray 2-5 Secure Comm. Error Log 8-31
First Copy Time 11-23 Sending Log History 8-28
First Print Time 11-24 Home
Fold 6-26 Customize Desktop 2-17
Folding Tray 2-5 Customize Taskbar 2-17
Folding Unit 11-4 Wallpaper 2-17
Form Overlay Home Screen 2-15
Storing a Form 5-69 Host Name 8-53, 8-66
Front Cover 2-2 HTTP
FTP 11-43 Protocol Settings 8-62
FTP Client (Transmission) HTTPS
Protocol Settings 8-40, 8-60 Protocol Settings 8-62
FTP Encrypted TX 6-84
FTP Server (Reception)
Protocol Settings 8-60 I
Function Key Assignment 2-20, 8-21 ID Card Copy 6-34
Function Settings 8-33 ID Card Settings
Address Book 8-41 Additional Authentication 9-29
Copy/Print 8-38 Keyboard Login 9-28
Document Box 8-49 iFax
DSM Scan 8-41 Protocol Settings 8-60
Email 8-40 Image Adjustment
Fax Memory RX Box 8-50 Auto Color Correction 8-84
Fax/iFax 8-41 Auto Drum Refresh 8-85
Function Defaults 8-33 Background Density Adjustment 8-84
Home 8-50 Calibration 8-85, 10-55
Internet Browser 8-51 Calibration Cycle 8-85
Job Box 8-50 Contrast 8-84
Manual Staple 8-52 Correcting Black Lines 8-85
One-Touch Key 8-42 Density 8-84
Printer 8-47 Developer Refresh 8-85, 10-55
RX/Forward Rules/Fax Box 8-46 Drum Refresh 8-86, 10-54
Send and Forward 8-42 Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-86, 10-55
Send/Store 8-38 Sharpness Adjustment 8-84
Sending Job - Folder 8-40 Tone Curve Adjustment 8-85, 10-53
Status 8-51 Image Preview at DP Jam 8-23
WSD 8-41 Image Repeat 6-61
Functions List of Security Quick Setup 11-38 Inner Finisher 10-147, 11-5
Inner Tray 2-2
Insert Sheets/Chapters 6-60
G Inserter tray 8-15
Glossary 11-42 Install
Index-4
Macintosh 2-58 Private Print Box 4-19
Software 2-51 Proof and Hold Box 4-22
Windows 2-52 Quick Copy Box 4-21
Interface Block Setting 8-71 Quick Copy Job Retention 8-50
Internet Browser 8-51 Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-50
Instructions for use 5-74 Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing
Internet FAX Kit 11-6 the Job 4-18
IP Address 11-43 Stored Job Box 4-20
Settings 8-56, 8-58 Job Finish Notice 6-70
IP Filter (IPv4) Job Finish Notice Setting 8-26
Settings 8-65 Job Separator 11-5
IP Filter (IPv6) Job Separator Tray 2-2, 2-5
Settings 8-65 JPEG/TIFF Print 6-87
IPP 11-44 Default 8-35
Protocol Settings 8-61
IPP over SSL K
Protocol Settings 8-61 Keyboard 8-6
IPSec 8-65 Keyboard Holder 11-6
Keyboard Layout 8-6
J KPDL 11-44
Job
Available Status 7-2 L
Canceling 7-11 Label 11-18
Checking History 7-9 LAN Cable 2-7
Checking Status 7-2 Connecting 2-8
Detailed Information 7-8 LAN Interface 8-60
Detailed Information of Histories 7-10 Language/System of Units 8-6
Details of the Status Screens 7-3 Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-5
Displaying History Screen 7-10 Loading Paper 3-14
Displaying Status Screens 7-2 Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-86, 10-55
Pause and Resumption 7-11 LDAP
Sending the Log History 7-10, 8-28 Protocol Settings 8-41, 8-62
Job Accounting 9-32 Legal Information 1-11
Adding an Account 9-34 Limited Use of This Product 1-10
Apply Limit 9-49 Loading Originals 5-2
Copy/Printer Count 9-50 Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-3
Count by Paper Size 9-44 Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2
Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-45 Loading Paper 10-8
Default Counter Limit 9-42 Local Authorization 9-16
Deleting an Account 9-37 Login 2-30
Editing an Account 9-36 Logout 2-31
Enabling Job Accounting 9-33 Low Power Timer 8-7
FAX Driver 9-41 Low Toner Alert 8-24
Login 9-48 LPD
Logout 9-48 Protocol Settings 8-61
Overview of Job Accounting 9-32
Print Accounting Report 9-47
Printing 9-38 M
Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-35 Mailbox 11-4
TWAIN 9-39 Management 9-1
WIA 9-40 Manual Setting (IPv6) 8-57, 8-59
Job Accounting/Authentication Manual Staple 5-76, 8-52
Authentication Security 9-4 Margin 6-44
Job Accounting 9-32 Default 8-35
Unknown User Settings 9-51 Margin/Centering 6-44
User Login 9-2 Media Type Setting 8-17
Job Box 11-44 Memo Page 6-59
Deletion of Job Retention 8-50 Memory Diagnostics 8-86
Form for Form Overlay 5-69 Message Banner Print 8-48
Form Overlay 5-69 Message Board Settings 8-27
Index-5
Mirror Image 6-69 1,000-sheet Finisher 11-4
Mixed Size Originals 6-22 100-sheet Staple Finisher 11-4
Combinations 6-23 4,000-sheet Finisher 11-4
Copy Size 6-24 Banner Tray 11-5
Mixed Size Stapling 6-31 Card Authentication Kit 11-6
Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-12 Document Processor (Dual Scan with Skewed and
Mopria 4-16 Multifeed Detection) 11-4
Motion Sensor 2-2, 2-44, 8-9 Document Processor (Dual Scan) 11-4
MP Tray Settings 8-14 Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 11-4
Multi Sending 5-42 Document Table 11-6
Multipurpose Tray 2-2, 2-3, 11-44 Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-7
Loading Index Paper 5-9 FAX Kit 11-6
Folding Unit 11-4
N Hard Disk 11-6
Negative Image 6-69 Inner Finisher 11-5
NetBEUI 11-44 Internet FAX Kit 11-6
Protocol Settings 8-60 Job Separator 11-5
NetWare Keyboard Holder 11-6
Settings 8-68 Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-5
Network Interface 2-7 Mailbox 11-4
Network Interface Connector 2-4 Network Interface Kit 11-6
Network Interface Kit 11-6 OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-7
Network Settings 8-53 Optional Numeric Keypad 11-5
Bonjour 8-64 Overview 11-2
IP Filter (IPv4) 8-65 Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-5
IP Filter (IPv6) 8-65 Punch Unit 11-5
IPSec 8-65 Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-5
Ping 8-64 ThinPrint Option 11-7
Protocol Settings 8-60 Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6
Proxy 8-53 Option Interface Slot 2-4
Restart Network 8-65 Optional Keyboard Type 8-6
Wi-Fi Direct 8-53 Optional Network 8-66
Wi-Fi Settings 8-54 Host Name 8-66
Wired Network Settings 8-58 Restart Network 8-68
NFC Wired Network Settings 8-68
Printing 4-17 Wireless Network 8-66
Settings 2-43, 8-69 Optional Numeric Keypad 11-5
Notice 1-2 Org. Image
Notification/Report 8-25 Default 8-36
Device Status Notification 8-27 Orientation Confirmation 8-21
Fax Communication Report 8-28 Original
History Settings 8-28 Auto Detect 8-11
Message Board Settings 8-27 Custom Original Size 8-12
Printing Report/List 8-25 Size xxvi
Result Report Settings 8-26 Original Eject Table 2-2
Numeric Keypad 8-6 Original Image 6-35
Default 8-34
Original Orientation 6-25
O Default 8-34, 8-36
OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-7 Original Size 6-19
Offset Documents by Job 8-20 Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2
Offset One Page Documents 8-20 Original Stopper 2-2
One Touch Key Original Table 2-2
Adding 3-45 Original Width Guides 2-2
Editing and Deleting 3-46 Original/Scan Settings 8-11
Operation Assist 8-21 Auto Detect Original Size 8-11
Clear Settings after Job Started 8-21 Custom Original Size 8-12
Orientation Confirmation 8-21 Prevent Light Reflection 8-12
Preset Limit 8-21 Outline font 11-44
Operation Panel 2-2
Option
Index-6
P Right Cover 1 10-75
Page # 6-57 Right Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-81
Panel Reset Timer 8-7 Right Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) 10-80
Paper Paper Length Guide 2-3, 3-4, 3-7
Appropriate Paper 11-14 Paper Output 8-20
Auto Paper Selection 8-18 Offset Documents by Job 8-20
Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-15 Offset One Page Documents 8-20
Custom Paper Size 8-16 Paper Selection 6-20
Default Paper Source 8-18 Paper Stopper 2-2, 3-19
Loading Cardstock 3-10, 5-8 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 2-3
Loading Envelopes 3-10, 5-8 Paper Width Guide 2-3, 3-5, 3-8
Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder 3-14 Part Names 2-2
Loading in the Side Feeder 3-16 Password 8-54
Loading Index Paper 5-9 PDF/A 11-44
Loading Paper 3-2 PIN Login 9-30
Loading Paper in the Cassette 1 3-4 Ping 8-64
Loading Paper in the Cassette 2 3-7 Platen 2-2
Paper Selection 8-18 POP3 11-44
Paper Source for Cover 8-19 PostScript 11-44
Separator Paper Source 8-19 Power Cable
Show Paper Setup Message 8-18 Connecting 2-9
Size and Media Type 11-13 Power Management 1-13
Special Paper 11-17 Power Off 2-10
Special Paper Action 8-19 Power Off Rule 8-9
Specifications 11-13 Power Off Timer 2-47, 8-8
Paper Feed Mode 8-48 Power On 2-10
Paper Feed Settings 8-18 Power Switch 2-2
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-5 PPM 11-44
Paper Feeding 8-13 Precautions for Use 1-4
Cassette 1 (to 4) Settings 8-13 Preprinted Paper 11-20
Custom Paper Settings 8-16 Preset Limit 8-21
Inserter tray 8-15 Prevent Bleed-thru 6-38
Media Type Setting 8-17 Default 8-34, 8-36
MP Tray Settings 8-14 Prevent Light Reflection 8-12
Paper Feed Settings 8-18 Prevent Original Skewing 8-12
Show Paper Setup Message 8-18 Primary Network (Client) 8-70
Paper Jams 10-56 Print Report
1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-117 Data Sanitization Report 8-26
100-sheet Staple Finisher (Inner) 10-120 Print Settings 4-2, 4-15
100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray A) 10-121 Printer
100-sheet Staple Finisher (Tray B) 10-125 Copies 8-47
4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) 10-120 CR Action 8-48
4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) 10-121 Duplex 8-47
4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) 10-125 EcoPrint 8-47
Bridge Unit 10-83 Emulation 8-47
Cassette 1 10-59 Form Feed TimeOut 8-47
Cassette 2 10-62 Job Name 8-48
Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-67 KIR 8-49
Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) 10-65 LF Action 8-47
Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-69 Message Banner Print 8-48
Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) 10-72 MP Tray Priority 8-48
Document Processor 10-86, 10-88 Orientation 8-47
Folding Tray (100-sheet Staple Finisher) 10-143 Override A4/Letter 8-47
Folding Tray (4,000-sheet Finisher) 10-133 Paper Feed Mode 8-48
Folding Unit (100-sheet Staple Finisher) 10-137 Print setting 4-2
Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) 10-128 Printing Job Terminator 8-49
Inner Finisher 10-85 Resolution 8-49
Jam Location Indicators 10-56 Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-47
Mailbox 10-84 User Name 8-48
Multipurpose Tray 10-74 Wide A4 8-48
Index-7
Printer Driver 11-45 Resolution 6-82, 8-49, 11-23, 11-24
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings 4-3 Resource Saving - Paper 1-13
Help 4-3 Responding to Messages 10-34
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB REST
Memory 5-70 Protocol Settings 8-63
Printing from PC 4-4 REST over SSL
Non-standard Sized Paper 4-6 Protocol Settings 8-64
Standard Sized Paper 4-4 Restart Entire Device 8-70, 8-72
Printing Report/List 8-25 Restart Network 8-65, 8-68
Font List 8-26 RESTful API Settings
Network Status 8-25 API for Service/Maintenance 8-64
Optional Network Status 8-25 Result Report Settings 8-26
Print Accounting Report 8-25 Right Cover 1 2-3
Service Status 8-25 Right Cover 1 Lever 2-3
Status Page 8-25
Printing Speed 11-24 S
Priority Override 6-71 Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2
Proof Copy 5-21 Same Width Originals 8-12
Protocol Settings 8-60 Saving Documents to USB Memory 5-72
Punch 6-31 Scan Resolution 6-82
Punch Unit 11-5 Default 8-36
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB 3-33
Q Security Level 8-70
Quick Setup Registration (Box Print) 8-10 Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN 1-10
Quick Setup Registration (Copy) 8-10 Security Quick Setup 8-70
Quick Setup Registration (Send) 8-10 Security Settings 8-70
Quick Setup Registration (Sending from Box) 8-10 Authentication Security 8-82
Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box) 8-10 Data Security 8-73
Quick Setup Wizard 2-48 Device Security Settings 8-72
Interface Block Setting 8-71
R Network 8-83
RA (Stateless) 11-45 System Stamp 8-77
Settings 8-57, 8-59 Unknown User Settings 8-83
RAM Disk 11-45 Send and Forward
Raw File format 8-44
Protocol Settings 8-61 PDF Encryption Functions 8-45
Recipient Format 8-26 Send and Print 6-83
Recycled Paper 11-20 Printing 6-83
Regarding Trade Names 1-11 Storing 6-83
Regular Maintenance 10-2 Send and Store 6-83
Cleaning 10-2 Send as E-mail 5-23, 11-45
Disposing of the Punch Waste 10-19 Send Result Report 8-26
Loading Paper 10-8 Send to Folder (FTP) 5-23
Replace the Waste Toner Box 10-7 Send to Folder (SMB) 5-23
Replacing Staples 10-9 Send/Store
Toner Container Replacement 10-4 Broadcast 8-38
Remote Operation 10-32 Default Screen 8-38
Remote Printing 8-49 Destination Check before Send 8-38
Repeat Copy Entry Check for New Dest. 8-38
Default 8-35 New Destination Entry 8-38
Printing 6-71 Recall Destination 8-38
Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-50 Sending 5-23
Replace the Waste Toner Box 10-7 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-24
Replacing Staples Sending Size 6-74
1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-11 Setting Date and Time 2-32
100-sheet Staple Finisher 10-14 Sharpness 6-37
4,000-Sheet Finisher 10-12 Sharpness Adjustment 8-84
Folding Unit 10-15 Shortcuts
Inner Finisher 10-9 Adding 5-17
Reserve Next Priority 8-35 Editing and Deleting Shortcuts 5-18
Index-8
Show Paper Setup Message 8-18 Folding Unit (100-sheet Staple Finisher) 10-162
Show Power Off Message 8-10 Folding Unit (4,000-sheet Finisher) 10-157
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-5 Staple/Punch 6-29
Loading Paper 3-16 Status Monitor 4-23
Silent Mode 8-86 Accessing 4-23
Simple Login 2-31 Exiting 4-23
Simple Login Settings Notification Settings 4-26
Simple Login 9-25 Status Page 11-45
Simple Login Setup 9-26 Status/Job Cancel 7-1
Skip Blank Page 6-73 Storing Size 6-86
Default 8-34, 8-36 Subnet Mask 11-45
Sleep 2-46 Settings 8-56, 8-58
Sleep Level 8-8 Supplies
Energy Saver 8-8 Checking the Remaining Amount 7-15
Quick Recovery 8-8 Support Tray Section of the Multipurpose Tray 2-3
Sleep Rules 8-7 Symbols 1-2
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) 2-46 System Initialization 8-87
Sleep Timer 8-7 System Menu 8-2
Slit Glass 2-2 Add/Delete Application 8-83
SMB Client (Transmission) Adjustment/Maintenance 8-84
Protocol Settings 8-40, 8-60 Date/Time 8-6
SMTP 11-45 Device Settings 8-6
SMTP Auth and Sender Address 8-40 Display Settings 8-10
SNMPv1/v2c Energy Saver/Timer 8-7
Protocol Settings 8-62 Function Settings 8-33
SNMPv3 Job Accounting/Authentication 8-83
Protocol Settings 8-62 Network Settings 8-53
Solving Malfunctions 10-25 Notification/Report 8-25
Sound 8-11 Operation Method 8-2
Specifications 11-21 Quick Setup Wizard 2-48
1,000-sheet Finisher 11-29 Security Settings 8-70
100-sheet Staple Finisher 11-31 System Stamp 8-77
4,000-sheet Finisher 11-30 Default 8-33
Banner Tray 11-35 System/Network
Copy Functions 11-23 Security Level 8-70
Document Processor 11-26
Folding Unit (For 100-sheet Staple Finisher) 11-33 T
Folding Unit (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) 11-32 TCP/IP 11-45
Inner Finisher 11-28 Settings 8-56, 8-58
Inner Shift Tray 11-34 TCP/IP (IPv4)
Inserter tray 11-35 Settings 2-33, 8-56, 8-58
Job Separator Tray 11-34 TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-43
Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-27 Settings 8-57, 8-59
Machine 11-21 Thick Paper 11-19
Mailbox (For 4,000-sheet Finisher) 11-32 Thin Print over SSL
Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-26 Protocol Settings 8-61
Printer Functions 11-24 ThinPrint
Punch Unit (For 1,000-sheet/4,000-sheet/100-sheet Protocol Settings 8-61
Staple Finisher) 11-31 ThinPrint Option 11-7
Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) 11-28 Time Zone 8-7
Scanner Functions 11-25 Tone 8-11
Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-27 Tone Curve Adjustment 8-85, 10-53
Z Fold Unit 11-36 Toner Container (Black) 2-4
SSL Toner Container Replacement 10-4
Security Settings 8-83 Toner Settings 8-24
Stack Level Adjuster 3-20 Low Toner Alert 8-24
Staple 6-29 Toner Waste Full Alert 8-24
Staple Jam 10-147, 10-149 Toner Waste Full Alert 8-24, 8-27
100-sheet Staple Finisher 10-154 Touch Panel 2-13
4,000-sheet Finisher 10-152 Transparencies 11-17
Index-9
Tray 1 to 7 2-5 Setting WIA Driver 2-63
Tray A 2-5 Wide A4 8-48
Tray B 2-5 Wi-Fi
Troubleshooting 10-25 Settings 2-35, 8-54
TWAIN 11-46 Wi-Fi Direct
Setting TWAIN Driver 2-61 Printing 4-17
Settings 2-41, 8-53
U Wireless Connection 1-9
Universal Print 4-16 Wireless Network
Unknown User Settings Settings 2-35, 8-66
Unknown ID Job 9-51 Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6
User Property 9-52 WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) 11-46
USB 11-46 WSD Print
USB Cable 2-7 Protocol Settings 8-41, 8-60
Connecting 2-9 WSD Scan 5-35
USB Drive Protocol Settings 8-41, 8-60
Printing 5-70
Remove 5-73 X
USB Interface 2-7 XPS Fit to Page 6-87
USB Interface Connector 2-4 Default 8-35
USB Memory
Save 5-72 Z
USB Memory Slot 2-2 Zoom 6-39
USB Port 2-4 Default 8-33
User Login Administration 9-2
Adding a User 9-6
Changing User Properties 9-10
Enabling User Login Administration 9-3
FAX Driver 9-15
Group Authorization Settings 9-18
Guest Authorization Settings 9-20
ID Card Settings 9-28
Local Authentication 9-16
Login 2-30
Logout 2-31
Obtain NW User Property 9-23
Overview of User Login Administration 9-2
Password Policy Settings 9-5
PIN Code Authentication 9-30
Printing 9-12
Server Settings 9-17
Simple Login Settings 9-25
TWAIN 9-13
User Account Lockout Setting 9-4
WIA 9-14
Using MultiCrop Scan 5-40
V
VNC (RFB)
VNC (RFB) over SSL
W
Waste Toner Box 2-4
Waste Toner Box Cover 2-2, 2-4
Weekly Timer Settings 2-47, 8-8
White space 6-59
WIA 11-46
Index-10
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited
Headquarters 13/F., Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road, Tsuenwan,
225 Sand Road, Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, U.S.A. NT, Hong Kong
Phone: +1-973-808-8444 Phone: +852-2496-5678
Fax: +1-973-882-6000 Fax: +852-2610-2063
Latin America KYOCERA Document Solutions

8240 NW 52nd Terrace, Suite 301 (China) Corporation
Miami, Florida 33166, U.S.A. 8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,
Phone: +1-305-421-6640
Shanghai, 200003,China
Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
KYOCERA Document Solutions Fax: +86-21-5302-8300
Canada, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8, Canada KYOCERA Document Solutions
Phone: +1-905-670-4425 (Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
Fax: +1-905-670-8116 335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,
Bangkok 10800, Thailand
KYOCERA Document Solutions Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Mexico, S.A. de C.V. Fax: +66-2-586-0278
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo, Ciudad de KYOCERA Document Solutions
Mexico, C.P.11560, Mexico Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Phone: +52-555-383-2741 12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,Luxasia Building Singapore
Fax: +52-555-383-7804 534118
Phone: +65-6741-8733
KYOCERA Document Solutions Fax: +65-6748-3788
Brazil, Ltda.
Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás, KYOCERA Document Solutions
Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba-SP, CEP 06543-306, Hong Kong Limited
Brazil 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road, Tsuen
Phone: +55-11-2424-5353 Wan, NT, Hong Kong
Fax: +55-11-2424-5304 Phone: +852-3582-4000
Fax: +852-3185-1399
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Chile SpA KYOCERA Document Solutions
Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile Taiwan Corporation
Phone: +56-2-2670-1900 6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd., Zhongshan Dist.,
Fax: +56-2-2350-7150 Taipei 104, Taiwan
Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
KYOCERA Document Solutions Fax: +886-2-2507-8432
Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde NSW, 2113, KYOCERA Document Solutions
Australia Korea Co., Ltd.
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999 #10F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588 Seoul, Korea
Phone: +822-6933-4050
KYOCERA Document Solutions Fax: +822-747-0084
New Zealand Ltd.
Ground Floor. 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland, KYOCERA Document Solutions
New Zealand India Private Limited
Phone: +64-9-415-4517 First Floor, Block - A, First India Place, Sushant Lok Phase
Fax: +64-9-415-4597 - 1, M. G. Road, Gurugram - 122002 (Haryana), India
Phone: +91-124-4671000
Fax: +91-124-4671001

Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.
G/F & 2/F, No.71, Jalan SS15/5A, 47500 Subang Jaya,
Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Phone: +603-5634 5609
KYOCERA Document Solutions KYOCERA Document Solutions
Europe B.V. Deutschland GmbH
Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp, The Netherlands Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch, Germany
Phone: +31(0)20-654-0000 Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +31(0)20-653-1256 Fax: +49-2159-918100

Nederland B.V. Austria GmbH
Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands Wienerbergstraße 11, Turm A, 18. OG, 1100 Wien, Austria
Phone: +31-20-5877200 Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +31-20-5877260 Fax: +43-1-86338-400

(U.K.) Limited Nordic AB
Eldon Court 75-77 London Road, Reading, Berkshire RG1 Borgarfjordsgatan 11, 164 40 Kista, Sweden
5BS, United Kingdom Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Phone: +44-118-931-1500 Fax: +46-8-546-550-10
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
Italia S.p.A. Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway
Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Phone: +39-02-921791 Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
Belgium N.V. Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup, Denmark
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Phone: +45-70223880
Phone: +32-2-7209270 Fax: +45-45765850
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
France S.A.S. Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de I’Orme Portugal
91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX, France Phone: +351-21-843-6780
Phone: +33-1-69852600 Fax: +351-21-849-3312
Fax: +33-1-69853409
KYOCERA Document Solutions South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
Espana, S.A. KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park, 90 Bekker Road
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2, 28290 Las (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa
Matas (Madrid), Spain Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Phone: +34-91-6318392 Fax: +27-11-466-3050
Fax: +34-91-6318219
KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC
Finland Oy Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow, Russia
Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki, Finland Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Phone: +358-9-47805200 Fax: +7(495)741-0018
Fax: +358-9-47805212
KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East
KYOCERA Document Solutions Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Europe B.V. Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich, Switzerland Phone: +971-4-4330412
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950 KYOCERA Document Solutions
Czech, s.r.o.
KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions Harfa Office Park, Českomoravská 2420/15, Praha 9
Turkey A.S. Czech Republic
Altunizade Mah. Prof. Fahrettin Kerim Gökay Cad. No:45 Phone: +420-222-562-246
34662 ÜSKÜDAR İSTANBUL TURKEY
Phone: +90-216-339-0020 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
Fax: +90-216-339-0070 1-2-28 Tamatsukuri Chuo-ku Osaka 540-8585 Japan
Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
© 2021 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. 2021.4
is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation 2XFKDEN000

Taskalfa 7004i en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Taskalfa 7004i en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Taskalfa 7004i en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

kyoceradocumentsolutions.

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................ 1-1

2 Installing and Setting up the Machine .................................................. 2-1

3 Preparation before Use .......................................................................... 3-1

4 Printing from PC ..................................................................................... 4-1

5 Operation on the Machine ..................................................................... 5-1

6 Using Various Functions ....................................................................... 6-1

7 Status/Job Cancel .................................................................................. 7-1

8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) ............................................... 8-1

10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 10-1

11 Appendix ............................................................................................... 11-1

Document Box functions

Copying (page 5-19) Frequently-Used Saving Documents FAX Operation

Optimize your office workflow

You can interrupt other running jobs

Optimize your office workflow

1~10 11~20 21~30 1~30

Optimize your office workflow

Save frequently used documents Recover from low power mode or

You can save the frequently used

Save energy and cost

Create attractive documents

It is useful when preparing handout.

Create attractive documents

Print a stamp on copies

It is useful when adding text or date

Log in by ID card Strengthen security

Use functions more efficiently

The functionality of the machine can

Use functions more efficiently

Use functions more efficiently

When paper empty error occurs at

Use functions more efficiently

Perform remote operation

You can access to the machine

Color and Image Quality Functions

Basic Color Modes

Reference image Reference

Color/Gray Automatically recognizes whether a page 6-36

Full Color Scans a document in full color. page 6-36

Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. page 6-36

For details, refer to the following:

Adjusting Image Quality and Color

Clearly reproduce fine lines, Favorites page 5-11

Emphasize or blur the image Sharpness page 6-37

Darken or lighten the Background Density page 6-37

Adjust the scanned image

Convert a paper document to File format page 6-75

Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides (PDF) on our website

FAX Operation Guide

Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide

Data Encryption/Overwrite Operation Guide

Easily register Command Center RX User Guide

Print data from a Printer Driver User Guide

KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide

Monitor the machine KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

File Management Utility User Guide